INDIAN ARMY WEAPON PRECI HAND BOOK PART 1 INFANTRY SCHOOL MHOW

VISHAY SUCHI

KRAMSANKHYA VISHAY PAGE NO

1. 51mm Mortar 1-25

2. 40mm Multi Shot Grenade Launcher (MGL) 26-52

3. 40mm Under Barrel Grenade Launcher (UBGL) 53-78

4. 40mm Under Barrel Grenade Launcher (INSAS) 79-96

5. Rifle 7.62mm AK-47 97-100

6. 9mm Pistol 101-113

7. MP 9 114-154

8. Grenade aur Trip Flare 155-170

9. Improvised Explosive Devise (IED) 171-174

10. Integrated Weapon Training 175-236

11. MMHG 237-242

12 NEGEV LMG 243-276

13. SAKO TRG 42 Sniper Rif 277-280

14. 40mm Multi Shot Grenade Launcher (UGRA) 281-283

51 MM MORTAR

LESSON-1

51 MM MORTAR SE AAM JANKARI

1. 51mm Mortar ko Infantry 4B Mod ‘M’ istemal ke liye lagu kiya gaya hai. Is se dushman ko barbad karne keliye HE bomb aur dhuen ka parda banane keliye soke bomb, ilaqe ko roshan karne ka liye illuminating bomb istemal kiya ja ta hai. Is hathyar ko fire base mein istemal karke faida liya ja sakta hai.

2. 51mm Mortar ek smooth bore aur muzzle se bhara jane wala hathiyar hai. Iska istemal bombon ko kisi chune hue ilaqe mein fire karne ke liye kiya jata hai na ki kisi target ko hit karne ke liye. Mortar ki accuracy badhane ke liye dial sight ka istimal kiya jata hai. Sight se badi asani se range hasil kar sakte hain.

3. Ise platoon commander ka topkhana mana jata hain. Kyonki yeh high trajectory hathiyar hai isliye pahadi ilaqe mein karger hai jis karan mountain mein ek infantry battalion ko ek Inf platoon mein ek 51mm Mor lagu kiya gaya hai. Ek detatchment mein do jawan authorise hai. Do jawan milkar aasani se mortar ko bhar, lay aur fire karte hain lekin is hathiyar ko ek jawan bhi aasani se handle aur fire kar sakta hai. Lekin aise maukon mein rate of fire par fark padta hai.

Hathiyar ke Hisse Purze

4. 51mm mortar ko mote taur par nimnlikhit hisson mein bant sakte hai:-

(a) Muzzle cover : Barrel ke ander dhool mitti jane se rokta hai.

(b) Barrel : Bomb ko sidhai deta hai.

(d) Jublee Clip : Carrying pad ko lock karke rakhna.

(e) Base plate : Firing ke dauran sthirta pradhan karta hai aur Mor ko zamin main dhasne se rokta hai.

(f) Firing lever : Fire ki karwai karne mein madad karta hai.

(g) Steel pad : Steel pad par bomb rest karta hai.

(h) Firing pin : Firing pin bomb ke primer par chot marta hai.

(j) Firing pin spring : Firing pin spring firing pin ke upward aur downward movement ko control karta hai.

LESSON-2

51MM MORTAR SE WAQFIAT, KHOLNA, JORNA AUR SAFAI

Shuru-Shuru ka Kaam

1. Class ki ginti dets mein bant. hathiyar ka mulaiza karein. Yadi sikhlai paane wale jawan is ke bare mein kuch bhi nahin janta ho toh mulaiza ki karwai bayan ke sath karni chahiye.

Dohrai.

2. Pichle lesson se kiya jaen.

Pahunch.

3. 51mm Mortar platoon commander ka topkhana hai. Yeh sikhlai lene mein aur fire karne mein bahut hi assan hathiyar hai. Is se pura faidha uthane ke liye do jawan ki zarurat parti hain. Magar zarurat parne par ek jawan ise asani se handle aur fire kar sakta hai.

Uddesh.

4. 51mm Mortar ko kholna, jorna aur safai karna sikhana hai.

Saman.

5. 51mm Mortar, spare part box, spanner, cleaning brush, long easel, board, marker, duster.

Bhagon mein Baant.

6. Yeh sabak teen bhagon mein sikhaaya jayega:-

(a) Bhag-I - 51mm Mortar se waqfiat aur tech data.

(b) Bhag-II - Kholna, hisse purzon ke naam, kaam aur jorna.

7. Bhag-I : 51mm Mor se waqfiat aur tech data

(a) Visheshtayen

(i) Iska barrel chrome plated hai.

(ii) Iski lambai jyada hai.

(iii) Barrel bell shaped hai.

(iv) Rg hasil karne ke liye dial sight ki suvidha di gai hai.

(v) Firing lever bada hai.

(vi) Barrel nut catch upar se hai.

(vii) Base plate chaura hai aur spike diye hain.

(viii) 4 parkar ka bomb fire kiye jate hain.

(b) Tech Data

(i) Weight

(aa) Khali Mor - 4.88kg

(ab) Barrel - 2.14kg

(ac) Breech - 2.74kg

(ad) Sling aur muzzle cover - 300gms

(ae) Carrying pad - 280gms

(af) Mor ka kul wt - 5.46kg

(ii) Lambai

(aa) Barrel ki lambai - 540mm

(ab) Breech ki lambai - 130mm

(ac) Mor ki kul lambai - 670mm

(ad) Base plate ki lambai - 110mm

(ae) Base plate ki chaurai - 190mm

(af) Spike ki lambai - 25mm

(iii) Muzzle velocity - 107m/sec

(iv) Safety distance - 135mtr

(v) Firing Pin - Pulsing type

(vi) Low Calibre - 51.18mm

(vi) High Calibre - 51.28mm

(viii) Barrel ki life - 4000 Bombs EFC

(ix) Condemning limit - 51.78mm

(x) High Angle - 450 se 800

(xi) Low Angle - 450 tak

(xii) Service Pressure - 163.2kg/cm2

(xiii) Sidhant - Muzzle loaded trip action

(xiv) Mech safety - Chupa hua firing pin

(xv) Rate of fire

(aa) Normal 8 Bomb/min

(ab) Intense 12 Bomb/min

(xvi) Range

(ab) Min range 180mtr

(ac) Max range 1080mtr

(i) Box wooden IA.

(ii) Mid Pad lock IG 4 levers.

(iii) Brush Cleaning Artillery Tool 12A.

(iv) Can Oil MG MK 3.

(v) Cover Muzzle

(vi) Holder, spare parts

(vii) 40mm Sling.

(viii) Spare Part Box.

(d) Spare Part Box. (Box spanner 6A, screw driver 6 x 100mm, firing pin, firing pin spring, fixing screw, striker gauge, Allen key 5mm, Allen key 3mm, wing nut).

(e) Extraction key. Iska istimal jab barrel jyada garm ya ganda ho jaye to misfire bomb barrel mein phans jata hai, use nikalne mein kiya jata hai.

8. Bhag-II : Kholna, Hisse Purjon ke Naam, Kaam, Jorna

(a) Kholna. Barrel nut catch ko dabate hue barrel ko kholen. Box spanner 6A ki madad se steel pad ko kholen, firing pin aur firing pin spring ko bahar nikalen. Ek firer ko itna hi kholna ki zarurat parti hain. Purje - Barrel, carrying pad, jubilee clip, steel pad, firing pin, firing pin spring, firing mech fixing screw, lever, base plate, spike.

8. Jorna. Jorne ke liye sabse pahle firing pin ko housing mein dakhil karen, firing pin spring ko lagayen aur steel pad ko tight karen. Barrel nut catch ko dabate hue barrel ki safed line ko ek chauthai dahine rakhte hue jod den. Firing lever ko dabakar check karen.

9. Bhag-III : Safai karne ka tariqa. Safai baki hathiyaron ki tarah hi ki jati hai. Antar sirf itna hota hai ki agar Mor ko lagatar fire kiya ja raha ho to har 30 bomb fire karne ke baad iski safai nishchit roop se ki jaye. Lubrication baki hathiyaron ki tarah hi ki jati hai. Firing pin main oil OM-58 aur greese XO-285 ka istemal kiya jata hai. Firing mech ki safai ke liye C-70 Oil ka istemal kiya jata hain.

LUBRICANTS ( TEL/GREASE)

Ser No

Hathiyar ka hissa Taapmaan ke lihaaz se tel/grease ka istemaal

40 C se adhik 40 C to -180 C -180 C to -400 C

1. Barrel ki choodi/ breech piece Grease XO-280 Grease XO-285 Grease XO-285

2. Jahan C-70 Oil ka istemaal nahin hota. (saadharan uddeshya ke liye) Oil C-70 Oil OX-13 Oil OX-13 aur aale darje ka kerosene oil 1:1 ke mishran mein

3. Firing Mechanism Oil C-70 Oil CX-13 Oil OX-13 aur aale darje ka kerosene oil 1:1 ke mishran mein

10. Sankshep. Yaad rahe ki ek detachment ka kam kewal hathiyar ko fire karne tak seemit nahin hai. Ek mortar detachment hathiyar ke saaf safai ke liye bhi zimmewar hai. Isliye zaruri hai ki unhe mortar ke aam maintenance ke bare mein jankari ho.

LESSON-3

FIRINIG MECHANISM KI CHAL.

1. Mortar detachment ko firing mechanism ke bare mein bhi jankari hasil kar lena chahiye. Iske bare mein jankari hone se mortar detachment apne hathiyar ko behtar tariqe se istimal kar payenge.

Firing Mechanism.

2. Firing mechanism breech piece ke andar rahta hai. Firing mechanism mein kaam aane waale hisse purzon ke naam is prakar hain:-

(a) Sear.

(b) Sear Lip.

(d) Striker Spring.

(e) Firing Pin.

(f) Firing Bush Hole.

(g) Firing Pin Spring.

(h) Sear Housing .

(j) Firing Lever.

3. Firing Mech ki chal. Firing lever ko niche ki aur dabane se sear assembly apne spindle par ghumta hai. Sear lip jis ka lagao striker body ke cocking lug se hota hai uske barkhilaf ghumta hai Sear lip striker body ko nichhe ki taraf dhakelta hai jisse striker spring sikud jata hai. Sear 36 degree ghumne ke baad sear lip cocking lug se juda ho jata hai aur striker azad ho jata hai. Striker spring ab apna tanao ko kam karta hai aur striker ko aage dhakelta hai, striker pichhe se firing pin par thoker marta hai. Firing pin bush hole se bahar nikalta hai aur bomb ke percusion cap par thokar martha hai. Bomb ke fire hone ke baad firing pin, Firing pin spring ki takat se wapis bush hole mein dakhil ho jata hai aur Firing pin retainer stiker ke upper wale bhag per dabav dalta hain jisse striker apne normal position mein aa jata hai firing lever ko chhodane par sear, cocking lug per sawar ho jata hai aur Mor dobara fire ke liye taiyar ho jata hai.

NORMAL POSITION

TRIPPING POSITION

FIRED POSITION

Sankshep

4. Firing mechanism ki chal ko samajh lene se aap firing ke dauran mortar mein padne wali rokon ko pehchan kar door kar sakenge. Mortar detachment ke numbers ko iske baare mein jankari hone se woh apna kaam behtar tariqe se kar sakte hain.

LESSON-4

51MM MORTAR KE AMN SE JANKARI

Shuru-Shuru ka Kaam

1. Durghatnaon se bachne ke liye aam hidayatein de jayein.

Dohari

2. Pichle lesson se liya jaye.

Pahunch

3. Har detachment ke jawaan ko mortar se zyada se zyada faida uthane ke liye zaruri hai ki woh bombon ke bare mein achhi jankari hasil kare. Nos ko bombon ki pehchan karna aur unki visheshtaon se bhali bhanti parichit ho toh woh fire se accha nateeja haasil kar sakta hai. Har ek jawan ko bomb ki chal ke bare mein jankari ho toh woh hadson se bach sakte hain aur drill ki zarurat behtar samajh payenge.

Uddesh

4. 51mm Mortar se fire hone wale ammunition se jankari dena hain.

Saman

5. Sabhi parkar ke drill bomb, Bomb ki chal ke diagram ke bd, Sectionised bomb, Bd, marker duster, long pointer.

Fire hone wale Ammunition

6. 51mm Mortar se 4 parkar ke bomb fire kiye jate hain:-

(a) HE Bomb.

(b) Smoke Bomb.

(d) HE Inert.

(a) HE Bomb. Is bomb ka istemal hum anti personal role main karte hain. Yeh bomb bhi do kism ke hota hain.

(i) HE MK-I

(aa) Wazan - 1.120kg

(ab) Lambai - 270mm

(ac) Explosive - RDX (88%) & Wax (12%)

(ad) Fuze - Fuze Percussion DA 161 Mk-

III (M-I)

(ae) Killing area - 8mtr radius

(af) Danger area - 80mtr

(ag) Lethal area - 25mtr

(ah) Agumanting charge - 0.43gms

(ai) Min Range - 180mtr

(aj) Max Range - 850mtr

(ak) HE Mk-I Ch-I ka rg - 180mtr se 600mtr

(al) HE Mk-I Ch-II ka rg - 600mtr se 850mtr

(ii) HE MK-II

(aa) Wazan - 850gm

(ab) Fuze - Fuze No 5 DA 161

(ac) HE Mk-II Ch-I ka rg - 200mtr se 750mtr

(ad) HE Mk-II Ch-II ka rg - 750mtr se 1080mtr

HE MK-II CH-I BOMB

(iii) HE Bomb ke Hisse Purje. Brass cap, striker, striker spring, detent, detent spring, diagonal channel, detonator, CE stem, CE pallet, septum, mag.

DURING FLT ON IMPACT

(iv) HE Bomb ki Chal. Bomb fire hone ke baad bomb ko hawa mein discharge ka dhakka lagta hai, jisse detent aur striker donon piche dabta hain. Is dauran diagonal channel khul jata hai aur safety ball striker shoulder se azad hokar diagonal channel mein chala jata hai. Striker aur detent wapas apne spring ki madad se aage jata hai. Is dauran striker brass cap ke sath lag jata hai aur detent diagonal channel ko band kar deta hai. Jyonhi striker aage ki harkat karta hai detonator shutter par ghumkar striker ke nok ki sidh mein aa jata hai. Is samay bomb armed halat mein ho jata hai. Jyonhi bomb nose ke bal kisi satah ya thosh vastu se takrata hai to brass cap tut jata hai, brass cap ke dabne se striker ke upar dabav parta hai, jisse striker harkat karta hai aur striker nok detonator ke upar chot marta hai, jisse aag ki chingari nikalti hai. Aag ki yeh chingari CE stem se hoti hui, CE pallet mein aati hai, CE pallet mein bhare huye barood mein aag lag jata hai. Is aag ki garmi se septum pighal jata hai aur mag mein bhare barood mein aag laga deta hai, jisse bomb body dhamake ke sath phat jata hai aur 8mtr radius mein aane wale kisi bhi jandar vastu ko barbad kar deta hai.

(b) Smoke Bomb:- Is bomb ka istemal dhuan ka parda banana ke liye kiya jata hain. Iske concial adopter main char surakh hote hain. Iske ander ek delay holder hota hain jiske ander pyrotechnic delay composition hota hain aur 10 sec ka delay paida karta hain. Yeh bomb ke pichele hisse se dhuan dene wala ek bomb hain.

(i) Wazan - 935gms

(ii) Lambai - 283mm

(iii) Range - 850mtr

(iv) Dhuan dene ka

samay - 2 min

(v) Bomb ka Colour - Green

(vi) Main Filling - Hexachlorothane Base

(vii) Main filling - 450gms

(viii) Dhuan ka parda - 15 mtr chaura based on air

speed and direction

(ix) Muzzle Velocity - 110mtr/sec

SMOKE BOMB

(i) Wazan - 925gms

(ii) Roshni dene ka samay - 35 sec

(iii) Roshni dene ki takat - 2,50,000 candla power

(iv) Roshni dene ka ilaqa - 400mtr dia

(v) Pt of burst - 150mtr + 30mtr

(vi) Rate of descent - 3mtr/sec

(vii) Range - 900mtr

(viii) Is bomb ke rotating ring par 3, 5, 7 aur 9 ke ank khude hua hain jo 300m, 500m, 700m aur 900m ke rg ko jahir karte hain. Is rotating ring ko kisi bhi disha mein ghumaya ja sakta hai. Raat ke samay rg lagane ke liye steel ball ki suvidha di gai hai. 1 ball 300m, 2 ball 500m, 3 ball 700m aur 4 ball 900m range ko jahir karta hai. Click ki awaz par ek setting jahir hota hain.

ILLUMINATING BOMB

(d) HE Inert Bomb:- Is bomb ka istemal Mortar det ko zaida abhyas dene ke liye kiya jata hain.

(i) Wazan - 970gms

(ii) Lambai - 196mm

(iii) Range - 200mtr se 220mtr

(iv) Carts - NGB (Nitroglycerine Base)

(v) Cartridge ka wt - 1.43gms

HE INERT BOMB

LESSON-5

51MM MORTAR KE DIAL SIGHT 101A/102A, 102B SE JANKARI

Shuru-Shuru ka Kaam

1. Durghatnaon se bachne ke liye hathiyar ka mulaiza Jarur kar lena chahiye.

Dohrai

2. Pichhe wale sabaq se dohrai ki jaye.

Pahunch

3. 51mm Mortar ke fire mein dursti lane ke liye 51mm Mor ke sath dial sight

ki suvidha diya gaya hain. Sight ki madad se hum range hasil karke kafi tadat mein fire gira kar dushman ko barbad kar sakte hain.

Uddesh

4. 51mm Mortar ke dial sight se waqfiat aur range hasil karne ka tariqa sikhana hai.

Saman

5. 51mm Mortar, dial sight 101A/102A, 102B canvas bag, dial sight ka model.

Bhagon mein Bant

6. Sabaq teen bhagon mein sikhaya jayega:-

(a) Bhag-I - Dial sight se waqfiat.

(b) Bhag-II - Range hasil karna.

7. Bhag-I - Dial sight se waqfiat. 51mm Mor ke sath 3 parkar ki Dial sight diya gaya hai.

(a) Dial Sight 101A/102A:-

(i) Dial Sight 101A/102A ka istemal HE MK-I bomb fire karne ke liye kiya jata hai.

(ii) Dial Sight 101A/102A ke upar 180mtr se 850mtr tak range lagane ki suvidha hai.

(iii) Dial Sight 101A/102A ke upar bayen taraf CH-I aur dahine taraf CH-II bomb fire karne ke liye range diya hai.

(iv) Dial sight 101A ka istemal us Mor ke upar kiya jata hai jiska sight collar fiber ka bana hua hai.

(v) Sight collar ki motai kam hone ke karan dail sight ka mounting bracket chhota diya gaya hai.

(vi) Dail Sight 102A, Dail sight 101A ki tarah hi hai. Lekin is sight ka istemal us Mor par kiya jata hai jiska mounting collar metal ka bana hua hota hai.

(vii) Dial Sight 102A ka mounting bracket 101A ki banispat bada hai.

RANGE SCALE 101A/102A

CH-I CH-II

High Angle

40 60

45 70

55 75

CH-I CH-II

Low Angle

60 85

55 75

45 65

(b) DIAL SIGHT 102B.

(i) Is Sight ka istemal HE MK-II bomb ko fire karne ke liye kiya jata hai.

(ii) Is ke upar 200mtr se 1030mtr tak range lagane ki suvidha diya gaya hai.

(iii) Is sight ka istemal us Mor par kiya jata hai jiska mounting bracket metal ka bana hua hota hai.

(iv) Dial Sight 102B ka mounting bracket 101A ki banispat bada hai.

RANGE SCALE 102B

CH-I CH-II

High Angle

48 68

57 85

64 95

72 103

Low Angle

CH-I CH-II

68 100

53 80

(i) Clamp assembly.

(aa) Mounting bracket. Yeh dial sight ko Mor par mount karne ke kaam ata hai. Mounting bracket mein do ardh semi circular clamp hain. Clamp ko tight karne ke liye do allen head screw diye gaye hain.

(ab) Range drum. Rg drum ko sthai roop se clamp assembly mein lagaya gaya hai. Iske upar charge-I aur charge-II ka rg mark kiya gaya hai.

(ac) Central spindle. Yeh clamp assembly ke beecho beech lagaya gaya hai. Yeh housing assembly ko sahara deta hai. Spindle ke upar churiyan hain jis par wing nut ko tight kiya jata hai.

(ii) Housing Assembly.

(aa) TF Source. TF source ko aise jagah fit kiya gaya hai jahan par fire ke dauran asar kam se kam hota hai. TF source raat ke samay range scale aur spirit bubble ko illuminate karta hai. (Range drum mein 03 aur sprit bubble ke andar 02 TF sourses hota hai.)

(ab) Spirit bubble. Spirit bubble ko madhya mein karne se angle hasil hota hai.

(ac) Index. Index ke neche TF source hota hai. Ise ghumakar range hasil kiya jata hai. Index ke upar ek cursor kale rang ki line hoti hai, jiski madad se rg hasil kiya jata hai.

(ad) Plunger. Plunger Index ko apni jagah lock karke rakhta hai taki firing ke dauran Index hil na jaye.

DIAL SIGHT

9. Bhag-II - Range Hasil Karne ka Tariqa. Dial sight ke upar do prakar ke rg scale khude hote hain. Isse CH-I aur CH-II amn fire kiya jata hai. Bayen taraf ka rg scale CH-I ke liye aur dayen taraf ka scale CH-II amn ke liye istemal kiya jata hai. Mortar ko do angle se fire kiya jata hai.

(a) Low Angle. 0 se 45 degree ke angle ko low angle kahte hain.Is angle par fire karne se bomb ke uran ka samay aur hawa ka asar kam hota hai.

(b) High angle. 45 se 80 degree ke angle ko high angle kahte hain. Aam taur par high angle se crestline ko clear kiya jata hai.Rg lagane ke liye wing nut ko dhila karen, housing assembly ko ghumakar zarurat shuda range lagayen, wing nut ko tight karen.

10. Bhag-III - Suraksha sambandhi batein. TF source ek phosphorus coated sealed glass capsule hai. Jo raat ke samay chamkata hain. TF source ke tutne per karwai:-

(a) Jis jagah par TF sourses tut ta hai us jagah ke 10mtr ki duri par par 30 min tak na jayen.

(b) Tute huye glass capsule ko polythene bag mein chimte ki madad se band karen.

(d) Jis aadmi se tuta ho uske sharir ke khule hisse ko sabun pani se achi tarah dhulai karen.

(e) Jo aadmi uske nazdik ho uska urine test karayen.

(f) Jo aadmi usse prabhavit hua ho use 10 din tak pani aur juice jaida den.

(g) Workshop ko khabar karen. Woh use Radiation Technologhy Division, BARC (Baba Automic Research Centre), Trombay, Bombay Pin-400085 per bhej deta hai.

LESSON-6

51MM MORTAR KE BOMBON KO FIRE KE LIYE TAYAR KARNA, BHARNA, KHALI KARNA, LAY AUR FIRE

Shuru Shuru ka kaam.

1. Class ki ginti deton main

Dohrai

2. Pichle lesson se liya jaye.

Pahunch

3. 51mm Mortar ek Pl cdr ka topkhana hai. Ek jawan isko asani se carry kar sakta hain lekin bhar, khali kar aur tez Mor fire ke liye No 2 ki zarurat parti hain.

Uddesh

4. Bombon ko fire ke liye taiyar karna, bharna, khali karna, lay aur fire karna ka tariqa sikhana hai.

Saman

5. 51mm mortar, Convas bag, drill bomb, Rif, ground sheet, fig 11 tgt.

6. Bhagon mein Baant.

Yeh sabaq char bhagon mein sikhaya jayega:-

(a) Bhag-I - Bombon ko Fire ke liye Taiyar karna

(b) Bhag-II - Bharna aur khali karna

(d) Bhag-IV - Misfire hone per karwai

Bhag-I : Bombon ko Fire ke liye Taiyar Karna.

7. Convas bag ko len, ek convas bag mein 6 bomb tube aate hain. Convas bag ke strap ko kholen aur bomb tube ko bahar nikalen. Bomb tube ke upar chipakne wale pheete ko utaren aur surakshit sthan par rakhen. Bomb tube ke cap ko kholen, tail unit se pakarte huye bomb ko bahar nikalen, bomb ki body ka nirikshan karen ki body dabi to nahin hai, fins ko check karen, agar tuti ya muri hon to use bhi fire ke liye taiyar na karen. Agar bomb thik ho to safety cap ke upar chipkane wale pheete ko utaren, safety cap ko kholen, retainer ko tight karen (Agar retainer ko tight na kiya jaye to ho sakta hai firing pin bumb ke primer

tak na pahunche aur misfire ho sakta hai). Agar No-1 akela hi fire kar raha ho to safety pin bhi isi samay nikal diya jata hai. Agar No-1 aur No-2 donon milkar fire kar rahe hon to safety pin ko bharte samay nikala jata hai. Dhyan rahe bomb utne hi taiyar kiye jayen, jitni fire keliye jarurat ho sath hi bomb ko jyada der pahle taiyar na kiya jaye. Yeh tha bombon ko fire ke liye taiyar karne ka tariqa.

8. Repack:- Agar bomb ko fire na karna ho use repack karne ki jarurat parti hai. Dhyan rahe jin bombon ke safety pin nikal diye gaye ho, unhe repack nahi kiya jaye balki blind samajhkar barbad kar diya jaye. Jin bomb ka safety pin nahin nikala gaya ho unhi bombon ko repack kiya jata hain. Repack karne ke liye kisi saaf chindi ya kapre ki madad se brass cap ko saaf karen kyoki brass cap ke upar nami ka asar jaldi ho jata hain, safety cap ko lagayen, safety cap ke upar chipakne wale pheete ko lagayen, bomb ki tail unit ko upar ki taraf rakhte huye bomb tube mein dakhil karen, bomb tube ke cap ko lagayen, bomb tube cap ke upar chipakne wale pheete ko laga den, bomb tube ko convas bag mein band karen aur convas bag ka strap band karen. Yeh tha repack karne ka tariqa.

Bhag-II : Bharna aur khali karna

9. 51mm Mor se kneeling posn se fire kiya jata hai. Postiton ikhtiyar karen aur Mor ko mount karen. Mor det ko tgt dikhai de ya squad post trg ke duran aadesh mile bhar to No-1 karwai is parkar karta hai, dahine hath se muzzle cover ko utarta hai aur bayen hath se Mor ko apni taraf karte hue barrel ka nirikshan karta hai agar koi dul ya garda hai to kisi saaf chindi ya kapre se saaf karta hai aur Mor ko neche rakhta hai. Convas bag se bomb tube ko bahar nikalata hai aur bomb ko taiyar karta hai, safety pin ko bhi nikal deta hai aur surakshit jagah par rakhta hai, bayen hath se Mor ko uthata hai aur dahine hath se bomb ko is parkar se leta hai ki tail unit neeche ki taraf ho, bomb ko barrel main dakhil karta hai, bomb barrel main teen chauthai dakhil ho jata hai to dahine hath ko nazdiki raste se cut karte hain aur barrel ko hilata hain taki bomb steel pad par thik se baith jaye. Yeh tha No-1 ki hasiyat se bharna. Agar No-2 sath hai toh, No-2 No-1 ke diye hue addesh ko dohrata hai aur sath No-1 ke dahine aur itna nazdik kneeling posn ikhtiyar karta hai ki woh No-1 ke addesh ko sun sake aur bharna tatha khali karne ki karwai kar sake. No-2, No-1 ke diye hue addesh ko dohrata hai aur seekhe hue tariqe se bomb ko taiyar karta hai. Donon hathon se bomb ko is parkar se leta hai ki tail unit neche ki taraf ho bomb ko barrel main dakhil karta hai jyonhi bomb barrel main teen chouthai dakhil ho jata hai to dahine hath se safety pin ko nikalta hai aur donon hathon ko nazdiki raste se cut karta hain.

10. Khali Karna:- Agar Mor det ko tgt dikhai na de ya squad post trg ke duran addesh mile bina fire khali kar toh No-1 apne dayen hath ko muzzle ke upar le jata hain aur mortar ko itna dayen turn karta hain ki bomb apne hi weight se bahar aa jaye, tail unit ko apni taraf rakhte huye saaf jagah per rakhta hai. Agar No-2 sath hain toh bomb ke tail unit ko apni taraf rakhte huye No-2 ke hath main deta hain aur No-2 saaf jagah per rakhta hain.

KNEELING POSITION MEIN EK JAWAN AASANI SE BHAR SAKTA HAI AUR KHALI KAR SAKTA HAIN

NO-1 AUR NO-2 KI KNEELING POSITION

Bhag-III : Lay aur Fire karne ka tariqa

11. Lay. Lay kise kahte hain. Tgt, Mor ki safed line aur firer ke sir ko ek sidh mein karne ki karwai ko yani Mor ko tgt ki sidhai mein lane karwai ko lay kahte hain. Lay karne ki jimmewari No-1 ki hoti hai.

12. Fire karna. Yahan per Mor det ko tgt dikhaya jata hain, Mor det ke addesh per mor det savdhan ho jata hain aur rg milne per Mor det vishram ho jata hain. Mount Mor ho jane ke baad fire ke liye hatihyar aur amn tiyar kar ke addesh per No 1 dial sight per rg lagata hain aur No 2 bombon ko tayar karta hain. Bhar ki karwai ho jane ke baad No 1 lay ki karwai karta hain, apne dwara ki gayi lay ko check karne ke liye No 1 ON pukarata hain On ke addesh per No 2 No 1 ke piche aata hain aur No 1 dawara ki gayi lay ko check karta hain agar correction dene ki zarurat pade toh correction base plate ko utha kar di jaye na ki base plate ko ghasitkar. Durust lay ho jane ke baad No 1 apni muthi ko band karta hain aur No 1 ki pith par thapki marta hai sath hi up pukarate hue apni jagah

baith jata hai. Fire ke addesh per No 1 spirit bubble ko madhya main karta hua lever ko press karta hain is parkar lever press hone per bomb fire ho jata hain aur donon Nos bomb ki maar ko dekhte hain. Agar bomb on tgt nahin ho toh correction dekar dusra bomb fire karte hai is parkar ek achi sikhli paya hua Mor det ek min main 8 bomb normal aur 12 bomb tej fire karta hai.

Bhag-IV : Misfire per karwai

13. Misfire. Agar lever ko dabane se bomb fire na ho ya trg ke dauran adesh mile ‘FIRE NAHIN’, to No-1 sprit bubble ko madhya mein rakhte hue dubara lever ko dabata hai, is prakar dobara lever ko dabane se bhi bomb fire no ho ya aadesh mile ‘PHIR FIRE NAHIN’, to No-1 Mor ko hilata hai aur sprit bubble ko Madhya mein rakhte huwe teesri bar lever ko dabata hai,. Is parkar teesri baar lever dabane par bhi bomb fire na ho ya trg ke dauran adesh mile ‘PHIR BHI FIRE NAHIN’ to No 1 misfire khali kar ka adesh deta hai. Khali kar ho jane ke baad No 1, No 2 se check primer report leta hai. No-2 bomb ke cartridge ke primer ko check karta hai. Agar primer par chot na ho to donon Nos milkar firing pin ki badli karte hain. Agar primer par chot ho to No 2 bomb ke nose tgt ki taraf rakhte hue, firing posn se 10 mtr aage aur dahine rakhta hain. No-1, No-2 ko dusra bomb bharne ka aadesh deta hai, bhar aur lay ki karwai ho jane ke baad No-1 spirit bubble ko madhya mein rakhte huye lever ko dabata hai. Is parkar bomb fire ho jata hain aur tgt barbad ho jata hain

14. Misfire hone ke karan

(a) Striker spring ka kamjor hona (Spring ke kamjor ho jane se striker ko jitna force chahiye utna nahin mil pata).

(b) Firing pin ka tut jana ya ghis jana (Firing pin ka tut jana ya ghis jane se primer par chot nahi lagti jisse bomb fire nahin hota).

(c) Steel pad par dhatu ka jama hona. (Steel pad par dhatu ke jam jane se bomb steel pad par achhe se nahin baithta hai).

(d) Bomb ka steel pad per thik na baitha hona (isse primer par chot nahi lagti jisse bomb fire nahin hota).

(e) Retaining cap ka dhila hona (retainer cap ke dhila hone firing pin se primer par chot nahi lagti jisse bomb fire nahin hota).

(f) Bomb ke carts ke primer mein nuqs hona (Bomb ke carts ke primer mein nuqs hone se chingari paida nahin hogi jisse bomb fire nahin hoga) .

Sankshep

15. Jawanon se sawal puchhe jayein aur unhe bhi sawal puchne ka mauqa diya jaye.

16. Jawan ko Jyada abhyas diya jaye.

17. Akhir mein poore sabaq ka confirmation karna nihayat zaruri hai.

LESSON-7

51MM MORTAR SE DIRECT AUR INDIRECT FIRE

Shuru Shuru ka Kaam.

1. 51mm Mortar, Rif, tatha baki saman ka nirikshan karo.

Dohrai.

2. Pichle lesson se liya jaye.

Pahunch.

3. Larai ke maidan mein chand ek aise target hote hain jo hamen dikhai dete hain aur apne flat trajectory hathiyar se engage kar sakte hain. Kuch aise target jo dikhai nahin dete unhen hamen indirect fire se barbad karna parta hai. 51mm Mortar se hum donon kism ke targeton ko barbad kar sakte hain. Zaruri hai ki har Mortar detachment ko direct fire aur indirect fire se target ko barbad karna aana chahiye.

Uddesh.

4. 51 mm mortar se direct fire aur indirect fire karne ka tariqa sikhana hai.

Saman.

5. 51mm Mortar, Rif, drill bomb, convas bag, auxillary aiming mark, black bd, chalk duster.

Bhagon mein Baant.

6. Yeh sabaq do bhagon mein sikhaya jayega:-

(a) Bhag I - Direct fire

(b) Bhag II - Indirect fire

Bhag-I : Direct Fire

7. Jab ek Mor det tgt ko dekte hue tgt ke uper Mor ko lay karke, tgt per fire karta hai use direct fire kahte hai.

(a) Direct fire main Mor aur tgt ke beech kisi parkar ki rukawat jaise crest, makan, ped aadhi nahin hona chaiya, jisse ki bomb ki uddan main badha pare.

(b) Jahan tak ho sake direct fire hamesha low angle se karna chahiye. Low angle se bomb ki uddan main hawa ka asar kam hota hain.

Bhag-I : Indirect Fire

8. Aiming Mark Jab Mor det kudrati ya banawati nishanon ki madad se Mor ko tgt par lay karke use barbad karta hai use aiming mark kahte hai. Ye 2 prakar ke hote hai.

(a) Subsidiary aiming mark

(b) Auxiliary aiming mark

9. Subsidiary Aiming Mark Trg area mein pahle se maujud voh kudrati ya banawati nishan hote hai jinki madad se Mor ko tgt par lay karke tgt ko barbad kiya jata hai use subsidiary aiming mark kahte hai.

10. Auxiliary Aiming Mark Aise nishan jinhe banawati taur par taiyar kiya jata hai jinki madad se Mor ko tgt par lay karke tgt ko barbad kiya jata hai use auxiliary aiming marks kahte hai. Jaise ki - Lakri, Pathar, Bayonet ityadi.

10. Tgt Ko Barbad Karne Ka Tariqa Mor det ko fire ka aadesh milne par Mor det GLD ko dhyan mein rakhte huye subsidiary aiming mark ka chunav karta hai. Dono Nos milkar tgt area mein nishan ko dekhte hai. Nishan tgt ke 12 baje ya 6 baje ki line mein ho sakta hai. Jab nishan 6 baje chuna jaye to dhyan rahe bomb ki uddan ke raste mein koi bhi badha na ho. Yadi nishan 12 baje ya 6 baje ki line mein na mile to auxiliary aiming mark ka istemal kiya jata hai. Auxiliary aiming mark ko lagate samay dhyan mein rakhne wali batyen.

(i) Back ground se milta julta ho.

(ii) Sky line par na lagaya jaye.

(iii) Lagane wala dushman ko na dikhai de.

(iv) Kam se kam 2 aur zyada se zyada 3 lagaye jaye.

(v) Mazbooti se gada jaye.

(vi) Control item ka istemal kiya ja raha ho to dismount Mor par wapas nikal lena chahiye.

11. No 2 bataye huye fire line ki sidh mein pahle auxiliary aiming marks ko lagata hai (ye fire line hame apne sniper det, leading sec, PP, MFC aur FOO dwara diya jaa sakta hai. Udaharan ke liye yadi hamara No 1 sec leading sec kaam kar raha hai uska sec cdr hame tgt ka hawala de sakta hai, Jaise ki range, direction aur dushman ki tadad). Pahla auxiliary aiming mark lag jane par No 2 pahle auxiliary aiming mark ko aur Mor posn ko dhyan mein rakhte huye dushra auxiliary aiming mark lagata hai (Yahan par No 1 ka madad bhi liya ja sakta hai. Dhyan rahe auxiliary aiming mark lagate samay tgt, auxiliary aiming mark aur Mor ek hi sidh mein ho. Agar aisa sambhav na ho to apne aage wale troops ki madad se mor posn ki badli ki jaye jisse ki tgt, auxiliary aiming mark aur mor ek hi sidh mein aa jaye). No 2 No 1 ke paas aata hai aur dono Nos milkar fire ke liye hathiyar aur amn ko taiyar karte hai. No 2 No 1 ke dwara lay kiye gaye Mor ko check karte hai yadi correction ki jarurat ho to

drust lay karwata hai. Dono Nos milkar fire ko jari karte hai. Bomb fire hone par Mor det leading sec ke sec cdr se bomb ki mar ka pata karta hai. Yadi bomb on tgt na ho to munasib correction dekar dusra bomb fire kiya jata hai. Bomb on tgt hone par mor det tez mor fire ki karwai karta hai. Mor det duwara leading sec ke sec cdr se tgt ka hawala leta hai. Yadi tgt barbad ho gaya ho to dismount Mor ki karwai kiya hata hai. Yeh tha tgt ko barbad karne ka tariqa. Subsidiary aiming mark aur auxiliary aiming mark ka istemal karte samay fire karne ka tariqa ek jaisa hi hoga.

12. Correction Dene ka Tariqa. Agar tgt 500m tak ki duri par ho to 50 dayen / bayen aur 50m upar/niche ka correction nahi diya jata hai. Agar tgt 1000m ki duri par ho to 30 dayen/bayen aur 50m upar/niche ka correction nahi diya jata hai. Agar isse jyada correction ho to correction pura diya jata hai

40MM MULTI SHOT GRENADE LAUNCHER MK-I

LESSON-I

40MM MULTI SHOT GRENADE LAUNCHER MK-I SE AAM JANKARI

(Ref - Multi Shot Granade Launcher MGL-40)

1. 40mm Multi Shot Grenade Launcher Mk-I halke wajan, semi automatic aur kandhe se fire hone wala grenade launcher hai. Yeh hathiyar South Africa ka bana hua hai. Yeh hathiyar revolver ke type ka hai, is hathiyar mein 6 grenade bharne ki kshamta hai.

Visheshtaen.

2. 40mm Multi Shot Grenande launcher ki visheshtaen is prakar se hain:-

(a) 40mm Multi Shot Grenade Launcher ek halke wajan ka, kandhe se fire hone wala hathiyar hai aur ek badi size ke revolver ki tarah dikhai deta hai.

(b) Multi Shot Grenade Launcher mein 6 revolving cylinder hain, jo ki 6 grenade rakhne ki khsamata rakhta hai.

(c) Multi Shot Grenade Launcher mein upar ki taraf Occluded Eye Gun Sight lagi hui hai. Is prakar ki sight main ek firer ko dono ankhon ko khula rakhte hue shist lekar fire karne mein madad deti hai.

(d) Multi Shot Grenade Launcher ko istemal karna asan aur iska rakhrakhav karna bhi asan hai.

Mukhya Bhag.

3. 40mm Multi Shot Grenade Launcher ke mukhya bhag is prakar se hain:-

(a) Barrel with Front Frame Group.

(b) Cylinder Group.

(d) Sight Group.

(e) Butt Group.

4. Barrel with front frame group. Barrel group grenade launcher mein sabse aage fit kiya gaya hai. Barrel group ka mukhya uddesh anya hisson purjon ko sahara dena hai. Barrel group ke chhote hisse, naam aur unke kaam is prakar se hain:-

(a) Barrel. Barrel ki lambai 300mm aur outer dia 44mm hai. Iski barrel steel ki bani hui hai aur is prakar se banaya gaya hai ki grenade ko sahi trajectory ke sath fire kiya ja sake. Barrel mein 6 grooves hain aur inka ghumav dahine ki taraf hai. Barrel mein bane grooves grenade ko ghumav dene aur udaan ke dauran grenade ko arm karne mein madad karte hain.

(b) Hand Grip. Hand grip nylon ka bana hai aur ise clamp ke dwara barrel par lagaya gaya hai. Hand grip firing ke dauran launcher ko majbooti se pakadne aur seedha rakhne mein madad karta hai.

(c) Launcher Housing. Launcher housing steel ka bana hai. Yeh barrel, pistol grip, index mechanism aur gas plug ke liye housing ka kaam karta hai.

40mm Multi Shot Grenade Launcher ke Mukhya Bhag

5. Cylinder Group. Cylinder group ko launcher ke beech mein lagaya gaya hai. Cylinder ka mukhya kaam 6 grenade ke liye housing ka kaam karna hai. Cylinder group ke mukhya bhag aur unke kaam is prakar se hain:-

(a) Cylinder. Cylinder ki lambai 100mm aur bahri dia 135mm hai. Cylinder aluminium ka bana hai aur ise is prakar se design kiya gaya hai ki 6 grenades ko bhara ja sake.

(b) Release Handle. Release handle ke mukhya 2 kaam hain jo ki is prakar se hain:-

(i) Rear frame ko kholna jiske liye release handle ko aage ki taraf khinchana padata hai.

(ii) Extractor ko Activate Karna. Release handle ko peeche ki taraf dabane se iske sath jude extractor ke dwara fired case aur cylinder mein bhare grenade ko bahar nikala jata hai.

6. Rear Frame and Trigger Mech Group. Rear frame aur trigger assembly ko launcher ke pichhle hisse mein lagaya gaya hai. Iska kaam grenade ko sahi tariqe se fire karne mein madad dena hai. Rear frame aur trigger mech group ke mukhya hisson ke naam aur kaam is prakar se hain:-

(a) Pistol Grip. Pistol grip nylon ka bana hai aur ise screw ki madad se rear frame par joda gaya hain. Pistol grip shist lete samay aur firing ke dauran majbooti se pakadne mein madad karta hain.

(b) Rear Frame. Rear frame steel ka bana hain aur ismein trigger mechanism ko lagaya gaya hain.

(c) Trigger Mechanism. Trigger mechanism steel ka bana hai aur iske mukhya bhag trigger, hammer assembly, firing pin, firing pin assembly aur safety lever hote hain.

(d) Hammer Assembly. Hammer assembly steel ka bana hua hain aur iske mukhya hisse hammer, index pin hote hain .

7. Sight Assembly. Sight assembly ko launcher ke sabse upar fit kiya gaya hain aur iske mukhya hisse is prakar hain:-

(a) Range Plates. Range plate ke dono taraf 0 se 375m tak ke ank khude hain jismein 50 mtr ke baad 300 mtr tak 25-25 mtr ka antraal main range lagaya ja sakta hain. 325 aur 350 rg ke liye click ki suvidha nahi hai, rg lagane ke liye rg indicator arm ko us ank ke samne milane ki zarurat paregi.

(b) Sight. Sight ka kaam hathiyar se shist lena hai. Sight ka naam Occluded Eye Gun Sight hain aur iski madad se target par donon ankhon ko kholkar shist liya jata hain. Sight ko kharab mausam mein bhi istemal kiya ja sakta hai jahan tak target dikhai de raha ho. Sight ke vertical red bar ki madad se target ke range ka anumaan bhi lagaya ja sakta hai yeh 200mtr ke range par target ke barabar hota hai.

8. Butt Group. Butt group ko multi shot grenade launcher ke sabse akhir mein fit kiya gaya hai. Butt ka kaam firing ke dauran support pradan karna aur kandhe se fire karne mein madad karna hai. Butt ki lambai 300mm hoti hai aur butt ke sabhi hisse steel ke bane hote hain, butt plate jo ki nylon ki bani hai. Butt ko teen alag-alag position mein set kiya ja sakta hai.

LESSON-2

40MM MULTI SHOT GRENADE LAUNCHER MK-I SE WAQFIAT, KHOLNA, JORNA AUR SAFAI KA TARIQA

(Ref:- Multi Shot Granade Launcher MGL-40)

Shuru Shuru ka Kaam.

1. Is mein nimn karwai ki jayegi:-

(a) Bandobast ki karwai.

(b) Class ki ginti groupon mein bant.

Dohrai.

2. Dohrai pichhle sabak se do sawal puch kar liya jaye.

Pahunch.

3. 40mm Multi Shot Grenade Launcher ko Infantry Platoon mein shamil kiya gaya hai. Infantry platoon se sambandhit hathiyar hone ke karan zaruri hai ke har jawan ko is hathiyar ke bare mein jankari ho.

Uddesh.

4. 40mm Multi Shot Grenade Launcher se waqfiat, kholna jorna aur safai karne ka tariqa sikhana hai.

Saman.

5. 40mm MGL, cleaning kit holder, board, easel, ground sheet, MArker aur duster.

Bhagon Mein Bant.

6. Sabaq teen bhagon mein chalaya jayega:-

(a) Bhag-I - 40mm MGL ki visheshtayen, technical data aur amn

(b) Bhag-II - Kholna, hisse purjon ke naam, kaam aur jorna

7. Bhag-I : 40mm MGL Ki visheshtayen aur technical data

(a) Visheshtayen.

(i) Yeh hathiyar South Africa ka bana hua hain.

(ii) Is mein ek sath 6 grenade bhar sakte hain.

(iii) Is ka sight system upar diya gaya hai aur isse shist lete samay donon ankhon ko khula rakha jata hain.

(iv) Isse point target aur area target ko barbad kar sakte hain.

(v) Ek jawan asani se carry aur handling kar sakta hain.

(vi) Iske sight se target ka range bhi pata kar sakte hain.

(b) Technical Data.

(i) Calibre - 40mm Inner, 44mm Outer

(ii) Weight - 5.3kg

(iii) Lambai Butt

Extended - 778mm

(iv) Lambai Butt folded - 566mm

(v) Barrel ki Lambai - 300mm

(vi) Butt ki lambai - 300mm

(vii) Cylinder ki lambai - 100mm

(viii) Cylinder ka dia - 135mm

(ix) Muzzle velocity - 76m/sec

(x) Barrel ki banawat - Steel

(xi) Cylinder ki

banawat - Aluminium

(xii) Grooves - 06 (RH)

(xiii) Rifling pitch - 1200mm

(xiv) Safety distance - Trg-80mtr & Operational-30mtr

(xv) Arming distance - 9-28mtr

(xvi) Sight - Occulded Eye Gun Sight

(xvii) Range - Min-50tr, Max-375mtr

(xviii) Sidhant - Semi automatic gas operated

(xix) Killing Area - 5mtr (Radius)

(xx) Barrel ki life - 5000gren

(xxi) Applied safety - Safety catch

(xxii) Mech safety - Index pin, Drop safety & Hung fire

(xxiii) Rate of fire - 18 gren/min (Practical)

(xxiv) Max rate of fire - 06 gren/3 sec

(xxv) Origin - South Africa

(xxvi) Point target - 50 se 150mtr

(xxvii) Area Target - 150- 375mtr

8. Ammunition. 40mm Multi Shot Grenade Launcher mein 6 prakar ka ammunition fire kiya jata hain.

(a) HEAP (HIGH EXPLOSIVE ANTI PERSONAL).

(b) HEDP (HIGH EXPLOSIVE DUAL PURPOSE).

(d) TMO (TARGET MARKER ORANGE).

(e) TP (TRAINING PURPOSE).

(f) MITA (MGL INERT TRAINING AMMUNITION).

40MM MGL AMMUNITION

(a) High Explosive Anti Personal (HEAP).

(i) Wazan - 277gms

(ii) Lambai - 103mm

(iii) Projectile ki lambai - 82mm

(iv) Projectile ka wazan - 180gms

(v) Killing area - 5mtr radius

(vi) Explosive (RDX & TNT) - 40gms (60:40)

(vii) Arming distance - 9-28mtr

(viii) Safe distance - 0-9mtr

(ix) Fragmentation - 425 (Pre pattern steel cup size)

(x) Fragmentation ka wazan - 120mg, Size 3x3x2mm

(xi) Fuse - Nose percussion PDM-851

High Explosive Anti Personnel Cut Section

(b) High Explosive Dual Purpose (HEDP)

(i) Wazan - 227gms

(ii) Lambai - 103mm

(iii) Projectile ki lambai - 82mm

(iv) Projectile ka wazan - 180gms

(v) Arming distance - 9-28mtr

(vi) Pentration - 50mm Armr Plate 400mm Concrete

Phosphorus (SBRP)

(i) Wazan - 225gms

(ii) Lambai - 103mm

(iii) Projectile ki lambai - 82mm

(iv) Projectile ka wazan - 175gms

(v) Arming distance - 9-28mtr

(vi) Red Phosphorus - 32gms

(vii) Dhuan ka samay - 45sec

(viii) Dhuan ka parda - 10mtr radius

(d) Target Marker Orange (TMO)

(i) Wazan - 227gms

(ii) Lambai - 101mm

(iii) Smoke emission - 2 min se jyada

(iv) Colour - Highly visible orange

(e) Practice

(i) Wazan - 226gms

(ii) Lambai - 101mm

(iii) Projectile ki lambai - 75mm

(iv) Projectile ka wt - 174gms

(v) Arming distance - 9 se 28mtr

(vi) Range - 200 se 260mtr

(f) MGL Inert training ammunition (MITA) Training ke liye istemal kiya jata hain.

9. High Explosive Anti Personnel/High Explosive Dual Purpose Grenade ki marak kshamta. High explosive anti personal/high explosive dual purpose grenade ki marak kshamta ka area 5 mtr radius hai jismein 50% casualty ki umeed ki jati hai. Grenade High Explosive Anti Personnel aur High Explosive Dual Purpose ke 6 grenade ki marak kshamata ka area 60x20mtr hai. 6 grenade ka mark area diagram ki madad se niche dikhaya gaya hai.

High Explosive Anti Personnel/High Explosive Dual Purpose ka Mark Area

SAFE ARMING DISTANCE

FG RANGE LAYOUT

Bhag-II : Kholna hisse purjon ke naam, kaam aur jorna

10. Kisi bhi hathiyar ki saaf safai karne aur purjon ki tutfut ko badli karne ke liye kholne ki zarurat padti hai. Usi prakar se 40mm Multi Shot Grenade Launcher ko bhi kholne ki zarurat pad sakti hai. 40mm Multi Shot Grenade Launcher ko 5 bhagon mein banta gaya hai:-

(a) Barrel with front frame group.

(b) Cylinder group.

(d) Rear frame aur trigger mechanism group.

(e) Butt group.

11. Kholna. Ek firer ko MGL mein kewal gas plug aur index mechanism cover hi kholna lagu hai.Isse jyada hisse purjon ko kabhi bhi ek firer na khole, kyonki iske liye special tool ki zarurat padti hai. Yeh tool ek firer carry nahi karta hai.

(a) Sabse pehle yakin kare ki MGL unwind hain.

(b) Sight ko zero par karen.

(c) Produding Gas plug locking spring ko 5mm allen key ki madad se dabate hue gas plug ko anti clockwise ghumaye aur sidha upar uthate hue bahar nikalen.

(d) Index mechnaism cover ko kholne ke liye manual release catch ko dabate hue upar ki taraf nikalen.

12. Hisse Purjon ke Naam.

(a) Barrel with Front Frame. Barrel, Hand grip, Front frame, Front sling loop, Release handle, Gas pot.

(b) Cylinder Group. Cylinder, Ejector assy, Index pin hole, Center pin, Stopper, Index mechanism cover.

(c) Rear Frame with Trigger Mechanism. Rear frame locking plate, Index pin, Firing pin, Firing pin locking plate, Pistol grip, Trigger mechanism, Safety catch.

(d) Sight Group. Range plate, Plunger, Range indicator, Red bar, Elevation screw aur Deflection screw.

(e) Butt Group. Butt release plate, Butt plate, Rear sling loop.

13. Jorna. Gas plug ko gas pot mein dakhil karen. Produding spring ko kisi 5mm allen key se dabate hue gas plug ko clock wise ghumate hue joren. Index mechanism cover ko lagayen.

Bhag-III : Accessories se waqfiat aur safai karna

14. Yeh hathiyar kafi low maintenance hathiyar hai. Phir bhi kisi bhi hathiyar ki zindagi uske maintenance ke upar nirbhar karta hai.

(a) Accessories

(i) Cleaning kit holder (Tool rool).

(ii) Cleaning rod 2 section.

(iii) Copper with Nylon brush.

(iv) Mob brush.

(v) Brush cleaning small arms/gas cylinder brush .

(vi) Allen key 5mm long series.

(vii) Applicator bottle.

(viii) Storage aur Transport Box.

(ix) User pamphlet.

(x) Sling.

15. Safai karne ka tariqa. Safai karne ke liye launcher ko kholen, brush cleaning small arms ki madad se gas pot ki safai karen. Cleaning rod ke 2 section ko joren aur uske sath copper with nylon brush ko joren. Launcher ko pura wind karen aur barrel tatha cylinder ki safai karen. Pehla cylinder saaf hone ke baad manual release catch ki madad se cylinder ko aage karen aur dusre cylinder ki bhi usi tarah safai karen. Is prakar barrel aur cylinder donon ki ek sath safai ki jati hai.

16. Lubrication. Niminlikhit tapman mein prayog karne hone wale lubricant ki suchi is prakar hai:-

Istemal Tapman Lubricant

Body aur trigger mech ke sabhi purje

4 degree C se adhik tapmaan 4 degree C se -18 degree C

-18 degree C se -40 degree C

-40 degree C se -50 degree C

Oil OX 52

Oil OX 13

Oil OX 13 + Superior quality K/Oil 1:1(ASC/9140-000008)

Oil OX 13 + Superior quality K/Oil 2:3

17. Sankshep. Sabhi bhagon se sawal kiye jayen.

LESSON-3

40MM MULTI SHOT GRENADE LAUNCHER KI FIRING POSITION, BHARNA, KHALI KARNA, FIRE AUR MISFIRE

(Ref - Multi Shot Granade Launcher MGL-40) Shuru Shuru Ka Kaam.

1. Is mein nimn karwai ki jayegi:-

(a) Bandobast ki karwai.

(b) Class ki ginti aur groupon mein bant.

Dohrai.

2. Dohrai pichhle sabak se do sawal puch kar liya jaye.

Pahunch.

3. 40mm Multi Shot Grenade Launcher ek semi automatic hathiyar hai, isse area target ko barbad karne ke sath sath dushman ke bunker par asani se fire dal sakte hain. Ek infantry platoon ka hathiyar hone ke karan zaruri hai ki sabhi jawanon ko iski firing position, bharna, khali karna fire aur misfire hone par karwai karne ka tariqa aana chahiye.

Uddesh.

4. 40mm Multi Shot Grenade Launcher ki firing position, bharna khali karna, fire aur misfire hone par karwai karne ka tariqa sikhana hai.

Saman.

5. 40mm Multi Shot Grenade Launcher, drill grenade, fig 11 tgt, board, easel, duster, marker aur ground sheet.

Bhagon Mein Bant.

6. Yeh sabak 4 bhagon mein chalaya jayega:-

(a) Bhag-I - 40mm Multi Shot Gren Launcher ki firing position

(b) Bhag-II - Bharna aur khali karna

(d) Bhag-IV - Fire aur Misfire hone par karwai karne ka tariqa

(a) Bhag-I : 40mm Multi Shot Gren Launcher ki firing position.

Firing position sikhaon use pehle butt ki posn batana zaruri samajta hun taki aapko posn lene mein asani ho. Multi Shot Gren Launcher ke but ki 3 posns hai:-

(i) Folded Butt.

(ii) Semi Extended Butt.

(iii) Fully Extended Butt.

(i) Folded Butt

Zarurat. Jab launcher ko istemal mein na laya ja raha ho ya kote mein rakhna ho, us samay folded butt mein rakha jata hai.

Karne ka Tariqa. Bayen hath ke anguthe aur kalme wali ungli ki madad se butt release plate ko ander ki taraf dabayen. Dayen hath ki madad se butt ko upar ki taraf harkat den, butt release plate ko chod den butt ko tab tak harkat den jab tak click ki awaz na aa jaye.

(ii) Semi Extended Butt

Zarurat. Jab launcher ko 150mtr se 375mtr range par fire karna ho us samay semi extended butt lagaya jata hai.

Karne ka Tariqa. Dayen hath ke anguthe aur kalme wali ungli ki madad se butt release plate ko ander ki taraf dabayen. Bayen hath ki madad se butt ko upar ki taraf harkat den, butt release plate ko chod den butt ko tab tak harkat den jab tak click ki awaz na aa jaye.

(iii) Fully Extended Butt.

Zarurat. Jab launcher ko 50 mtr se 150 mtr range par fire karna ho to fully extended butt ko lagaya jata hai.

Karne ka Tariqa. Bayen hath ke anguthe aur kalme wali ungli ki madad se butt release plate ko ander ki taraf dabayen. Dayen hath ki madad se butt ko niche ki taraf harkat den, butt release plate ko chod den butt ko tab tak harkat den jab tak click ki awaz na aa jaye.

Firing Position. 40mm Multi Shot Gren Launcher se hum 4 parkar ki firing posn se fire karte hain.

(a) Standing Position.

(b) Kneeling Position.

(d) Lying Position.

Standing Position.

(a) Zarurat Yeh posn us samay ikhtiyar kiya jata jab aad 4 ft se 4.5 ft ki ho ya fire trench se fire karne ki zarurat pade toh standing posn se fire kiya jata hain.

(b) Position lene ka tariqa Bayen paon ko tgt ki seedh main aage rakhen aur dayen paon ko dayen aur thoda piche rakhen. Is posn mein dekhne wali baten :-

(i) Bayen paon tgt ki sidh mein.

(ii) Donon paon kad ke mutabik khule hue ho.

(iii) Bayen hath ki pakar front grip par.

(iv) Dayen hath ki pakar pistol grip par, kalme wali unguli trigger se bahar.

(v) Dayen kohani zamin ke samanantar.

(vi) Donon ankhen khuli hui nigah samne.

Standing Position

Kneeling Position.

(a) Zarurat Yeh posn us samay ikhtiyar kiya jata jab aad 2 ft se 2.5 ft ki ho ya niche se upar ki taraf fire karne ki zarurat pare toh kneeling position se fire kiya jata hain.

(b) Position lene ka tariqa Bayen paon ko tgt ki seedh main aage rakhen aur dayen ghutne ke bal kneeling position ikhtiyar karen. Is posn mein dekhne wali baten:-

(i) Bayen paon tgt ki sidh mein.

(ii) Dahina ghutna pura dahine aur zamin par laga hua body weight dahine paon ki eddi par ho.

(iii) Bayen hath ki pakar front grip par aur bayen hath ki kohini bayen ghutne ke upar.

(iv) Dayen hath ki pakar pistol grip par, kalme wali unguli trigger se bahar.

(v) Dayen kohni zamin ke samantar.

(vi) Donon ankhen khuli hui nigah samne.

Kneeling Position

Sitting Position.

(a) Zarurat Yeh posn us samay ikhtiyar kiya jata hain jab upar se niche ki taraf ya dhalandar zamin par fire karne ki zarurat pare toh sitting position se fire kiya jata hain.

(b) Position lene ka tariqa Bayen paon ko tgt ki seedh main aage rakhen aur dayen paon dayen, donon paon kad ke mutabik khule hon. Launcher ko bayen hath main pakden aur butt bayen kandhe ke upar aur dayen hath ko zamin per lagate hua sitting position ikhtiyar karen. Is posn mein dekhne wali baten:-

(i) Bayen paon tgt ki sidh mein aur dayen paon dayen aur donon ediyan zamin per lagi hui panje aasman ko point karte huwe.

(ii) Dono kohniyan donon ghutne ke upar.

(iii) Bayen hath ki pakar front grip par aur bayen hath ki kohni bayen ghutne ke upar.

(iv) Dayen hath ki pakar pistol grip par, kalme wali unguli trigger se bahar.

(v) Dayen kohni dayen ghutne ke upar.

(vi) Body weight seat ke upar.

(vii) Donon ankhen khuli hui nigah samne.

Sitting Position

Lying Position.

(a) Zarurat Yeh posn us samay ikhtiyar kiya jata jab aad 1 feet ya usse kam ki ho ya khule maidan se fire karne ki zarurat pare toh lying position se fire kiya jata hain.

(b) Position lene ka tariqa Dayen paon ko tgt ki seedh main aage rakhen aur bayen paon ko chalti halat main aage len launcher ko bayen hath main pakde aur butt ko bayen kandhe per rakhen, dayen hath se zamin per lagate hue lying position ikhtiyar karen. Is posn mein dekhne wali baten:-

(i) Target, launcher, firer ka dayen kandha aur dayen tang ek sidh main honi chahiye.

(ii) Donon kohniyan zamin per lagi hui.

(iii) Badan line of fire se tircha ho.

(iv) Dayen hath ki pakar pistol grip par charon unguliyan bahar se angutha andar se, kalme wali unguli trigger se bahar. Khada hone ke liye launcher ko bayen kandhe per rakhe aur dayen tang ko close karen aur dayen hath ka sahara lete hua khade

ho jaye. Dhyan rahe agar aad ka istemal kar rahe hain to cylinder aad ke sath touch na ho.

LyingPosition

Bhag-II : Bharna aur khali karna. Jab firer ko fire karne ki zarurat ho ya trg ke dauran addesh mile bhar to karwai is prakar se karen:-

(a) Bharna. Sabse pehle grenade ko bahar nikalen aur mulahija karen agar grenade ki body dabi ho to aise grenade ka istemal na kiya jaye. Agar grenade thik ho toh, grenade ko saaf karen aur saaf jagah par rakhen.

(i) Barrel ko surakshit disha main karen.

(ii) Safety catch ‘S’ per karen, manual release catch ko dabate hue yakin karen ki launcher unwind hai.

(iii) Barrel ko niche ki taraf rakhte hue launcher ke rear frame ko kholen.

(iv) Cylinder ka nirikshan karen agar dhul, mitti ho to saaf kapde ya chindi ki madad se saaf karen.

(v) Dahine hath ki madad se cylinder ko wind karen.

(vi) Saaf kiye hua grenade ko laen aur pehle grenade ko barrel ki seedh wale cylinder mein dakhil karen. Baki grenade ko anti clock wise ek ek karke bharen. Rear frame ko band karen.

(b) Khali karna. Jab firer ko fire karne ki zarurat na ho ya training ke dauran addesh mile bagair fire khali kar to karwai is parkar se karen:-

(i) Barrel ko surakshit disha mein karen.

(ii) Yakin karen ki safety catch ki position ‘S’ par hai.

(iii) Release handle ko anguthe ki madad se khinche aur rear frame ko kholen.

(iv) Bayen hath ki madad se release handle ko andar ki taraf dabayen aur sabse pahile barrel ke sidhai wale cylinder ke dahine wale cylinder ke grenaed ko bahar

nikale isi prakar ek ek karke grenade ko clock wise bahar nikalen aur saaf jagah par rakhen.

(v) Rear frame ko band Karen. Manual release catch ko dabayte hue cylinder ko unwind karen.

(vi) Range ko down karen.

(vii) Grenade ko pouch mein band karen.

Bhag-III : Range lagana aur shist lena. Range lagana aur shist lena bataun use pahle zaruri samjhta hun ki aapko sight ke hisse purje ke naam bataye jayen taki shist lene main asani hon. 40mm MGL ki sight Occluded Eye Gun Sight hai (OEG). Iske niminlikht hisse hai:-

Eye glass, Glass protector, Red bar, Red bar glass, Red bar glass protector, elevation screw, deflection screw, range plate, left and right plunger, range indicator arm left and right.

(a) Range Lagana

(i) Din ke samay. Range milne per dayen hath ke anguthe aur kalme wali ungali ki madad se plunger ko dabate hue range indicator arm ko mile hue range ke seedh mein milayen aur plunger ko chhod den. Yeh tha din ke samay rg lagane ka tariqa.

(ii) Raat ke samay. Is sight ka istemal kam roshni ya raat ke samay (Chand sitaron ki roshni) mein kiya ja sakta hain jahan per tgt dikhai de raha ho. 40mm Multi Shot Grenade Launcher ki range plate ki madad se 375mtr tak ka range hasil kiya ja sakta hai. Raat ke samay range lagane ke liye pehle 50mtr range lagaya jata hai. 50mtr range lagane ke liye sight ke dono plunger ko andar ki taraf dabayen aur thora upar karein, Ab plunger ko chod dein. Sight se pakarakar sight ko thoda upar uthayen jisse 50mtr range hasil ho jata hai. Isse adhik range hasil karne ke liye sight ke bayen wale plunger ko andar aur upar ki taraf dabane se range mein 25mtr ki vridhi hoti hai. Sight par 75mtr range ho jayega. Is parkar bina dekhe (ek bar bayen wale aur ek bar dahine wale plunger ko dabakar 25-25mtr ke antral mein 300 mtr tak range lagaya ja sakta hai. 375mtr range hasil karne ke liye donon plunger ko andar ki taraf dabate huye sight ko pura upar karen. 350mtr range hasil karne ke liye dono plunger ko under ki taraf dabaye aur thoda niche karen plunger ko chhod de sight ko niche ki taraf dabaye, 325mtr range hasil karne ke liye karwai isi prakar se Karen.

(iii) Shist lene ka Tarika. 40mm Multi Shot Grenade Launcher mein OEG sight ki suvidha hone ke karan donon aankhon ko khula rakhte hue shist liya jata hai. Target aur red bar ko dekhen. Jaise hi red bar target ke point of aim par mil jata hai toh durust shist mana jata hai.

(iv) Range Estimation. Red bar ko range estimation ke liye bhi istemal kiya ja sakta hai. Agar red bar kisi human target ko barabar cover karta hai to target ka range 200 mtr mana jata hai. Agar red bar se tgt bada dikhai de toh range 200 mtr se kam mana jata hai. Agar red bar se tgt chhotadikhai de toh target ka range 200 mtr se adhik mana jata hai. (Range estimation ustad ke dwara board ki madad se bataya jayen).

Range Extimation

Bhag-IV : Fire aur misfire per karwai. 40mm Multi Shot Grenade Launcher mein trigger operation ki karwai baki hathiyaron ki tarah hi hoti hai. Is hathiyar mein bhi trigger ke do khinchav hain. Pahle halka aur lamba khinchav aur dusra chotta aur sakhat khinchav.

(a) Fire Karne ka Tarika. Bhar ki karwai karne ke baad, diya hua range sight par lagayen, launcher ko kandhe par le jayen. Target ko dekhen aur trigger ke pehla khinchav hasil karen, durust shist milne par trigger ka dusra khinchav bhi hasil karen. Is prakar trigger press karne se grenade fire ho jata hai. Grenade fire ho jane ke baad target area mein grenade ki mar ko dekhen. Ek firer 1 min mein 18 grenade fire kar sakta hai.

(b) Stop. Agar firing ke dauran target area mein koi jaandar vastu aa jaye ya training ke dauran addesh mile ‘STOP’ toh butt kandhe ka milap toren, launcher ko kandhe se niche layen, safety catch ki position ko ‘S’ par karen aur agle hukum ka intezar karen.

(c) Jari Kar. Agar target area se jaandar vastu hat jaye ya training ke duran addesh mile ‘GO ON’ ya ‘JARI KAR’ to safety catch ki position ko fire par karen, butt kandhe ka milap karen aur durust shist lete hue launcher ko fire mein shamil karen.

(d) Misfire hone par Karwai. Agar trigger ko press karne par grenade fire na ho ya training ke dauran adesh mile ‘FIRE NAHIN’ to pakad aur shist ko kayam rakhte hue trigger ko teen baar press karen. Agar teen baar trigger ko press karne ke baad bhi grenade fire na ho ya aadesh mile ‘PHIR FIRE NAHIN’ toh pakad aur shist ko kayam rakhte hue 30 sec ka waqfa den. Agar 30 sec ke wakhva dene ke baad bhi grenade fire na ho ya adesh mile ‘PHIR BHI FIRE NAHIN’ toh

safety catch ki position ko safe per karen, rear frame ko khole aur barrel ki sidh wale grenade ko cylinder se bahar nikale grenade ke primer ko check karen, agar primer par chot na ho toh firing pin ka badli karvayen. Agar primer par chot ho toh misfire grenade ko firing position se 10mtr aage aur dahine rakhen. Rear frame ko bandh karen. Manual release catch ko dabate hue agle cylinder ko barrel ki seedh mein layen aur fire ko jari karen. (Misfire grenade ko blind samajhkar barbad kar diya jaye). Misfire hone ke karan:-

(i) Firing pin ka ghis jana ya tut hona.

(ii) Grenade ke primer mein nuqs hona.

Abhiyas ke liye Aadesh.

(a) Fire Nahin ke aadesh per Trigger ko 3 baar press karen.

(b) Phir Fire Nahin ke aadesh per 30 sec ka wakhva den.

7. Sankshep. Sabhi bhagon se sawal kiye jayen.

LESSON-4

40MM MULTI SHOT GRENADE LAUNCHER KA MECHANISM KE BARE MAIN JANKARI

(Ref - Multi Shot Grenade Launcher MGL-40) Shuru Shuru Ka Kaam.

1. Is mein nimn karwai ki jayegi:-

(a) Bandobast ki karwai.

(b) Class ki ginti aur groupon mein bant.

Dohrai.

2. Dohrai pichhle sabak se do sawal puch kar liya jaye.

Pahunch.

3. 40mm Multi Shot Grenade Launcher ko hamari sena main shamil kiya gaya hain iska pura faida uthane ke liye zaruri hain ki har jawan iske mechanism ke bare main janta ho taki roken parne par usko dur kar saken aur launcher ko fire main shamil kar saken.

Uddesh.

4. 40mm Multi Shot Grenade Launcher ka mechanism ke bare main jankari dena hain.

Saman.

5. 40mm Multi Shot Grenade Launcher, Assy bag, chal diagram board, easel, duster, marker aur ground sheet.

Bhagon Mein Bant.

6. Yeh sabak 3 bhagon mein chalaya jayega:-

(a) Bhag-I - Index mechanism ki chal

(b) Bhag-II - Trigger mechanism ki chal

(a) Index mechanism ki chal. Chal batane se pahle chal main kaam aane wale hisse purjon ke naam.

(i) Gas Plug. (aa) Piston.

(ab) Cross Shaft.

(ii) Index Mechanism.

(aa) Manual release catch. (ab) Manual release projection. (ac) Manual release spring. (ad) Index Plate.

(ae) Index plate hook.

(af) Index plate projection. (ag) Index plate cam.

(iii) Cylinder catch, cylinder catch spring.

(iv) Toggle guide, toggle guide spring.

(v) Cylinder.

(aa) Chamber ka index pin. (ab) Cylinder stop.

(ac) Cylinder stopper.

Winding ke dauran karwai

(i) Jab cylinder ko wind karne ke liye anti clock wise ghumate hai toh index pin, index plate cam ko upar utha deta hai jisse index plate hook niche ki harkat karta hai.

(ii) Jab dusra index pin wind ke liye ata hai to index plate hook ko upar utha deta hai jis se cam niche ki harkat karta hai.

(iii) Jab index pin cam ke niche se gujarta hai to cam ko upar utha deta hai jisse hook niche ki taraf ata hai.

(iv) Yeh karwai tab tak jari rahti hai jab tak akhri index pin cam ko upar uthae hue age chala jata hain.

(v) Isi duran cylinder stop, stopper ke sath takrata hai. Ab cylinder spring ki taqat se clockwise ghumta hai.

(vi) Isi duran 1st wale chamber ka index pin, index plate ki hookke sath takrata hai aur cylinder catch index pin ko lock karta hai ab chamber aur barrel ek sidh mein hote hai.

(vii) Yeh harkat cylinder ke pure ghumav ka 1/8 bhag hota hai.

Note :- Toggle guide spring index plate hook ko upar/niche rokne mein madad deta hai. Yadi ham cylinder ko pura wind ke bina chor dete hain to hum phir tab tak cylinder ko wind nahi kar sakte jab tak manual release catch ko na dabaen. Kyonki cylinder catch ne index pin ko lock kiya hota hain.

Firing ke dauran karwai.

(i) Gren fire hone se gas paida hoti hai jo ki gren ko age dhakelti hai.

(ii) Jab projectile gas port ke samne se gujarta hai, kuch gas piston ko upar utha deti hai. Jisse piston mein laga cross shaft index mechanism hook ko upar utha deta hai aur hook aur index pin ka milap tut jata hai.

(iii) Cylinder spring ki taqat se apni harkat jari rakhta hai, isi duran dusra index pin cam ko upar uthata hai jisse hook niche ki harkat karta hain.

(iv) Jab index pin hook ke pass pahunchta hain toh hook dubara index pin ko rokta hai aur cylinder catch lock kar deta hai, ab dusra gren barrel ki sidh mein aa jata hai.

(v) Yeh karwai tab tak jari rehti hai jab tak akhri gren fire hota hain.

(vi) Isi dauran cylinder barrel se 1/8 bhag aage ki harkat karta hai aur stop, stoper se takrakar ruk jata hai.

(b) Trigger mechanism ki chal. Chal batane se pahle chal main kaam aane wale hisse purjon ke naam ish prakar hai-

(i) Safety catch.

(ii) Trigger.

(iii) Trigger guide & spring.

(iv) Trigger toe.

(v) Trigger sear.

(vi) Index Pin.

(vii) Index pin guide hole.

(viii) Hammer.

(ix) Hammer guide and spring.

(x) Firing pin.

(xi) Firing pin spring

Safety catch ‘S’ par. Safety catch hammer guide ke pichhe aa jata hai, jisse trigger sear hammer ko play nahi kar pata. Kyoki hammer guide ko safety catch pichhe jane se rokta hai. Is halat mein trigger ka toe hammer ke vent se azad nahi ho pata.

Safety catch ‘F’ par. Jab safety catch ko ‘F’ par karte hain to safety catch hammer guide ke piche se hat jata hai. Ab trigger press karne par trigger toe vent se azad ho jata hai aur trigger sear ki madad se hammer apni axis mein pichhe ki harkat karta hai. Isi duran index pin apne hole se nikal kar index pin guide hole mein chala jata hai. Trigger par lagatar dabav rehne se trigger sear aur hammer vent ka milap tut jata hai. Hammer, hammer guide ki taqat se aage ki harkat karta hai aur firing pin ke pichhe thokar marta hai. Jis se firing pin aage ki harkat karta hai aur gren ki primer par chot marta hai jis se gren fire ho jata hain. Firing pin spring apne tanav ko kam karte hue firing pin ko pichhe dhakelta hain, Isi dauran firing pin ka pichhe wala bhag hammer par thokar marta hai jisse hammer apni jagah par beth jata hai. Ab tab tak dubara hammer firing pin par chot nahin marega jab tak trigger release karke press na kiya jae. Kyoki trigger sear hammer vent se aage hota hai. Dubara trigger release karne par trigger sear aur hammer vent ka milap ho jata hain aur launcher fire ke liye tayar ho jata hain.

Trigger Mechanism

(i) Applied Safety

(ii) Mechanical safety

(i) Applied safety. Isme ek safety catch diya gaya hain jiski do posn hain “S’ aur ‘F’. Jab hum safety catch ko ‘S’ per karte hain toh safety catch hammer guide ko piche jane se rokta hain, jisse trigger press nahin hota hain.

(ii) Mechanical Safety. Mechanical safety teen parkar ki hain.

(aa) Index Pin Safety. (ab) Drop safety.

(ac) Hung Fire

(aa) Index Pin Safety. Jab tak cylinder barrel ki sidh mein nahin hoga aur rear frame puri tarah se band nahin hoga tab tak index pin corresponding hole main nahin jata, tab tak trigger press nahi hota hain.

(ab) Drop Safety. Jab safety catch ki position ‘F’ par hota hain aur bhara hua MGL niche ghir jaye toh bhi fire nahin karega kyoki hammer per dabav parne se trigger ka toe vent for trigger sear mein phans jata hain jiske karan hammer piche ruk jata hai aur index pin corresponding hole main jata hai is halat mein rear frame nahin khul pata aur manul release catch ko dabane se cylinder bhi nahin ghumte hai ish halat mein launcher ko range per le jakar fire karne ki jarurat parti hai.

(ac) Hung Fire. Kisi karan agar grenade fire nahin hoga to cylinder aage harkat nahin karega, tab tak dusra grenade fire ke liye barrel ke sidh mein nahin ayega. Isliye cylinder aage advance nahin hoga to pahile wala cylinder barrel ki seedh mein hi rahega. Jab tak firer misfire ya hang fire drill ke baad manually cylinder ko advance nahin karta tab tak aage activate nahi hoga.

Roken

Ser No Roken Sambhav Karan Fauri Ilaj

(a)

Trigger ka press na hona - Safety Catch ki position ‘S’ par.

- Rear frame ka puri tarah band na hona.

- Cylinder ka puri tarah unwind hona. - Safety catch ‘F’ par Karen.

- Rear frame ko puri tarah band karen.

- Cylinder ko wind karen.

(b)

Trigger press ke bawjood grenade fire na ho - Amn mein kami.

- Firing pin ka tut jana ya trigger mechanism mein nuks hona. - Misfire/hungfire drill karen.

- Armourer ki madad lein.

(c)

Cylinder ka aage advance na hona - Cylinder ka unwind hona.

-Grenade misfire hona. - Cylinder ko wind karen.

- Misfire drill ko karen.

- Index mechanism or gas plug ka dheela hona. - Manual release ki madad se operate karen firing ke baad safai karen. Agar yeh karwai ke baad bhi launcher kaam na kare to armourer ko dikhayen.

- Main spring mein nuqs hona. - Armourer ko dikhayen.

40MM UNDER BARREL GRENADE LAUNCHER (GP-25) BULGARIA

CHAPTER-1

INTRODUCTION TO 40MM UBGL GP-25

(Ref - Under Barrel Grenade Launcher, UBGL-2006)

1. Parichay. 40mm Grenade Launcher se dushman ki khule mein chal rahi paidal sena ke sath sath bunker, pill box aur reverse slopes mein chupi hui Infantry par bhi fire daal sakte hain. UBGL ko full size assault rifle AKM, AKMS, AK47, AK74M, AK101,AK103 aur AN94 par fit karke fire kiya ja sakta hai. UBGL ko assault rifle par chada kar hi fire kiya ja sakta hai.Firer rifle aur grenade launcher dono ko ek sath bhi fire kar sakta hai lekin ye ladai ki halat par nirbhar karta hai.

40MM UBGL FITTED WITH AK 47 RIFLE

2. Tech Data.

(a) Calibre - 40mm.

(b) Weight - 1.5kg.

(d) Sight Radius - 120mm.

(e) Muzzle Velocity - 76mtr/sec.

(f) Range.

(i) Direct - 50 se 400 mtr.

(ii) Indirect - 200 se 350 mtr.

(g) Grooves - 12 (RH).

(h) Rate of Fire - 4 se 5 grenade/minute.

3. Grenade Launcher ki Sub Assemblies. UBGL nimnlikhit assemblies se milkar bana hai:-

(a) Barrel with support.

(b) Body with breech piece.

(d) Damper with strip.

4. Functioning of Assembly Units.

(a) Barrel with Support. Barrel with support group ki madad se UBGL ko Rifle AK-47 par chadaya jata hai. Barrel with support gp, Barrel support aur sight ko milakar banayagaya hai (Fig:1) aur sight ko support ke sath fit kiya gaya hai.

Fig: 1 (1. Barrel 2. Support 3. Sight)

(b) Barrel. Barrel grenade ko sidhai deta hai. Barrel mein 12 grooves hote hain. Iska calibre 40mm hota hai. Barrel ke ander ek retainer aur ek blocking mechanism laga hota hai. (Fig: 2) Retainer Grenade ko lock karke rakhta hai aur blocking mechanism UBGL ko mech safety pardan karta hai. Barrel ke breech ki taraf wale hisse par teen knurled projections hote hain, jo ki barrel ko breech piece ke sath lock karta hai.

Fig: 2 (1. Retainer 2. Blocking device 3. Knurled buldge)

(c) Support. Support ko is prakar se banaya gaya hai ki yeh UBGL ko Rifle AK-47 par fit karta hai aur sath hi iske upar sight ko fit kiya gaya hai. Support ke aage aur bayen ek latch diya gaya hai jo ki UBGL ko Rifle se lock aur unlock karne ke kam aata hai. (Fig:3) Support par bayen aur aage ek blocking device lever lagaya gaya hai jo ki mechanical safety pardan karta hai.

Fig: 3 (1. Latch)

(d) Sight Group. Sight ko target par sisht lene ke liye lagaya gaya hai. Ismein adjustable front sight pole type aur adjustable rear sight 'U' type lagaya gaya hai. Iske sight par do range scale diya gaye hai. Direct fire ke liye white range scale aur indirect

fire ke liye red range scale hai. White range scale par 50mtr se 400mtr tak range lagane ki suvidha hai. Chhoti line 100mtr ko aur bari line 50mtr kojahir karti hai. Red range scale par 200mtr se lekar 350mtr tak range lagane ki suvidha hai. (Fig: 4). Sight par ek detent catch lagaya gaya hai jisko press karke range lagaya jata hai. Range scale ke sath ek range indicator hota hai joki range ko indicate karta hai. Indirect fire ke dauran angle hasil karne ke liye plumb sight diya gaya hai. Plumb sight ko lock karne ke liye plumb hai. Rear Sight ke sath ek adjusting screw diya gaya hai jo ki zeroing ke dauran rear sight ko correction dene kekam aata hai.

Fig: 4 (1. Fore sight 2. Detent catch 3. Plumb sleeve

4. Plumb retainer 5. Rear sight 6. Zeroing screw)

(e) Body with Breech Piece. Jab UBGL ko bag for artillery GP-25 mein rakhna ho to body with breech piece ko UBGL se alag kar liya jata hai. Yeh group breech piece aur body with pistol grip ko milakar banaya gaya hai.Inko body axispin aur safety lock ki madad se jora gaya hai aur catch pin body axis pin aur safety lock ko lock karke rakhta hai.(Fig: 5,6)

Fig: 5 (1. Feed arm 2. Barrel locking catch 3. Catch pin

4. Trigger 5. Pusher 6. Body axis pin)

Fig: 6 (1. Safety lock 2. Manual extractor 3. Body axis pin)

(f) Breech Piece. Breech piece ke chamber ko is parkar se banaya gaya hai ki yeh barood ke high pressure ko sehan kar sake. Ismein knurled projection diya gaya hai, jo ki breech piece ko barrel with support gp ke sath lock karke rakhta hai. Breech piece ke pichhe wale bhag par do ears diye gaye hai jo ki breech piece ko trigger mech with pistol grip ke sath jor kar rakhta hai. Breech piece ke beech mein striker fit kiya gaya hai.(Fig: 7) Breech piece ke upar feed arm aur barrel locking catch diya gaya hai. Feed arm mechical safety pardan karta hai aur barrel locking catch barrel with support aur trigger mechanism with pistol grip ko lock karta hai. Breech piece ke bayen side manual extractor fit kiya gaya hai joki grenade ko bahar nikalne ke kam karta hai. Extractor ki harkat iski pin ki lambai par nirbhar hai. Breech piece ke sath do compensators riveted hai jo ki breech pieceaurbarrel ke gap ko cover karta hai aur fire ke dauran lagne wale dhakke ko sahan karta hai.

Fig: 7 (1. Breech piece)

Fig: 8 (Trigger mechanism with pistol grip)

(g) Trigger mechanism with pistol grip. Trigger mechanism ke ander hammer aur trigger mechanism ko fit kiya gaya hai. Ish mein ek trigger bar aur trigger bar hook diya gaya hai.Pistol grip UBGL ko fire karte samay grip karne ke kam aata hai. Iske upar ek safety lock diya gaya hai jo ki UBGL ko applied safety pardan karta hai.

(Fig: 8)

(h) Trigger mechanism ki chal. Yeh ek self cocking trigger mech hota hai. Jab firer trigger ko press karta hai to trigger bar hook aur hammer hook ka milap ho jata hai. Jisse hammer spring sikud jata hai. Jab trigger pura press ho jata hai tab trigger bar hook aur hammer hook ka milap tut jata hai.Jisse hammer spring ke karan piston aage ki harkat karta hai. Jiske karan hammer ke sath jura huwa striker grenade keprimer par chot marta hai. Jisse grenade fire ho jata hai. Jab firer trigger ko release karta hai tospring ke karan trigger apni jagah par wapis aa jata hai. Jisse trigger bar

hook hammer hook ke upar aa jata hai aur UBGL dobara fire ke liye taiyar ho jata hai.

(Fig: 9 & 10)

Fig:9 (Triggermechanism normal position)

Fig: 10 (Trigger mechanism coocking position)

(j) Safety. Safety do parkar ki hoti hain. Applied safety aur Mechnical safety.

(i) Applied Safety. UBGL mein applied safety ke liye safety lock diya gaya hai. Jiski do position hoti hain "NP" & "OR". Jab safety lock "NP" (verticle position) par hota hai, UBGL fire nahin hoga, kyonki safety lock ka gol wala bhag hammer ke katav mein aa jata hai jisse hammer pichhe ki harkat nahin kar pata hai. Jab safety lock ki position "OR" (horizontal position) par hota hai tab fire ho jata kyonki safety lock ka kata bhag hammer ko pichhe aane ke liye jagah de deta hai. (Knob in Horizontal position is fire).

(ii) Mechanical safety. Jab UBGL ke dono hisson (barrel with support & trigger mechanism with pistol grip) ko jora jata hai to barrel ke andar fit kiya hua blocking device feed arm ke head ke upar dabav dalta hai jisse feed arm ka tail hammer ki tail ke upar aa jata hai. Jiske karan hammer ko pichhe jane ke liye jagah nahin mil pata hai jisse trigger press nahin hota. Jab UBGLko Rifle AK-47 par fit kiya jata hai tab Rifle AK-47 ka front cup UBGL ke support par lage lever par dabav dalta hai jisse lever upar sebahar aur nichhe se ander ki aur harkat karta hai jiske karan horizontal lever bayen se dayen ki taraf harkat karta hai. Jisse barrel ke andar fit kiya gaya blocking device upar ki aurharkat karta hai aur feed arm ke head se dabav hata deta hai. Jis karan feedarm ki tail ka hammer tail se milap tut jata hai.

(k) Catch Pin. Catch pin U aakar ki pin hoti hai jo safety lock aur body axis pin ko lock karke rakhta hai aur safety lock ko "NP", "OR" par rok kar rakhta hai.

Fig: 11 (1.Catch pin, 2. Body axis pin, 3. Safety lock)

5. Accessories:-

(a) Bag for artillery GP-25.

(b) Bag for projectile VOG-25.

(d) Cleaning brush.

(1. Bag for artillery GP-25, 2. Bag for projectile VOG-25, 3. Cleaning brush, 4. Damper with strap )

(i) Bag for artillery GP-25. Is bag mein UBGL, damper aur cleaning brush ko rakha jata hai.

(ii) Bag for projectile VOG-25. Is bag ka istemal grenade ko carry karne ke liye kiya jata hai. Ismein 10 grenade rakhe jate hain. Is bag par ek fixing belt hota hai jisko kamar ke sath fit kiya jata hai aur ek adjustable shoulder strip hota hai jisse isko shoulder par carry kiya jata hai.

(iii) Cleaning Brush. Cleaning brush UBGL ke barrel ki safai aur lubricating ke liye istemal mein laya jata hai. Brush ko Rifle AK-47 ki rod ke sath fit kiya jata hai.

(iv) Damper with strap. Damper fire ke dauran firer ke shoulder ki suraksha aur support ke liye diya gaya hai. Iske sath ek strap diya gaya hai jiski madad se damper ko Rifle AK-47 ke butt par lagaya jata hai.

6. Group SPTA Set (Spare Parts Tools and Accessories). Group SPTA set ko UBGL ke technical maintenanceaur repair ke liye diya gaya hai. 20 UBGL par ek SPTA set lagu hota hai.

7. Ammunition. UBGL se fire hone wale grenade ko "case less" banaya gaya hai jiske karan fire ke baad barrel mein grenade ka koi bhi hissa nahin bachta hai. Grenade ki body steel ki banaya gaya hai. Grenade ke nichhe wale bhag mein primer KVM-3 fit kiya gaya hai joki super quick point detonation impect fuse hota hai. Iske ander fuse VMG-K hota hai. UBGL ke grenade ke upar driving band diya gaya hai jo ki barrel ke ander obturation ki karwai mein madad karta hai jisse grenade ko spin milta hai. (Fig: 12 &13)

(a) Grenade ke mechanism. UBGL ke grenade mein 4 mechanism hote hain.

(i) Safety Mechanism. Jab grenade 3mtr upar se gir jata hai to grenade apni chal jari nahin hain karta.

(ii) Remote Arming Mechanism. Jab grenade10-40mtr ki duri ke beech pahunchta hai to grenade arm ho jata hai.

(iii) Impact & Punching Mechanism. Grenade arm hone ke bad kisi bhi vastu se takrata hai to blast ho jata hai. Jaise snow, water aur swamp (daldal).

(iv) Auto Destruction Mechanism. Yadi grenade kisi bhi vastu se nahi takrata hai to bhi 09 se 14 sec ke baad grenade ke ander laga huya self destruction mechanism chal jari kar deta hai aur grenade blast ho jata hai.

(b) UBGL se 3 prakar ke grenade fire kiye jate hain.

(i) VOG 25. Yeh ek fragmentation type ka grenade hota hai jiska rang purple hai. VOG 25 grenade ki vishestaen niminlikht hain:-

(aa) Calibre - 40mm.

(ab) Length - 102.64mm.

(ac) Weight - 250gms.

(ad) Killing Area - 7mtr radius.

Fig: 12 (Grenade VOG-25) Fig: 13 (1.VOG-25, 2. VOG-25P)

Fig: 13 A ( VOG-25P) Fig: 13 B ( VOG-25P)

(i) VOG 25P. VOG 25P ek uchalne wala grenade hai. Iska rang green hota hai aur iska aakar aerodynamic hota hai. VOG 25P grenade ki nose mein ek special charge diya gaya hai jo grenade ko kisi bhi vastu ya zamin se tak rane par ignite karta hai aur 50se150 cm ke jump ke sath grenade ko blast kar deta hai.(Fig: 13 A, B).

(ii) Inert (Niskriya) Grenade. Yeh Grenade training aur zeroing ke dauran istemal kiya jata hai.Is Grenade ka range 200-220 mtr hota hai. (Fig: 13C).

Fig: 13 C ( Inert Grenade)

UBGL Zeroing.

(a) Position - Lying supported.

(b) Ground range - 100 mtr.

(d) Ammunition - Inert grenade.

(e) Target - 3x3 mtr plywood board.

(f) Target par circle - 35cm radius.

8. Zeroing karne ka tariqa. 100 mtr ki duri se lying supported position se 4 grenade fire kiye jate hain. Grenade ki MPI 35cm ke circle ke ander banta hai to UBGL ko sahi zero mana jata hai. Agar grenade ki MPI 35cm ke circle mein nahin banta hai to jarurat suda correction diya jata hai.

9. Correction dene ka tariqa.

(a) Upar niche ka correction. Upar niche ka correction fore sight se diya jata hai. Fore sight ko ek chhaker dene se 75cm ka farq parta hai. Fore sight ko clock wise ghumane se MPI upar aata hai aur anti clock wise ghumane se MPI niche aata hai. Iski fore sight pole type hone ke karan minor correction bhi diya ja sakta hai.

(b) Dayen bayen ka correction. Dahyen bayen ka correction rear sight ke screw se diya jata hai. Rear sight ke niche 8 runner line di gai hain 4 line madhya se bayen aur 4 line madhya se dayen. Ek runner se dusre runner ka correction dene par 75cm ka antar parta hai. Ek runner 4 click ko jahir karta hai aur ek click se dusre click ka correction dene par 18.75 cm ka antar parta hai. Rear sight screw ko clock wise ghumane se MPI dahine jata hai aur anti clock wise ghumane se MPI bayen jata hai. Is prakar upar/niche aur dayen/bayen ka correction dekar MPI ko circle ke ander laya jata hai.

10. Safai. UBGL ki safai anya hathiyaron ki tarah hi ki jati hai. Is ke liye lubrication ke oil is prakar se hain:-

(a) Yadi temp +50 se -50 degree centigrade ho to Gun oil RANGE GOST 9811-61 ka istemal kiya jata hai.

(b) UBGL ke mechanism ke ander Grease SOTY 38.101.1315.90 ka istemal kiya jata hai jab tapman 5 degree centigrade se upar ho.

(d) Barrel ke grooves, cut aur holes ki safai lakri ki sticks se bhi kar sakte hain.

11. Storage & Transportation. UBGL ko store karte samay Rifle AK-47 se alag karke bag ke ander rakh kar wooden box mein store kiya jaye. Storage box ko windows (khirki) aur heating devices (stoves) addi se door rakha jaye. Combat situation ke dauran yadhi UBGL ko Rifle AK-47 par fit karke rakhna pade to yakin karen ki safety lock ki position NP (safe) par ho.

12. Grenade ki Packing. UBGL ke grenade wooden box mein aate hain. Ek wooden box mein teen steel ke box hote hain ek steel box mein 40 grenade aate hai.

13. Transportation of UBGL & Grenade. UBGL ko wooden case ke ander pack karke transport se ek sathan se dusre sathan par le jaya ja sakta hai. Speed aur distance ki koi limit nahin hoti.Grenade ko transportation ke dauran speed aur distance ka koi limit nahin hai lekin grenade ko acchhi tarah se pack kar liya jaye. Parantu paved (pakka) aur earth (kachha) roads par transportation ke dauran 500mtr ki duri aur speed 40 km/hrs se adhik nahin honi chahiye.

14. Suraksha sambhandi batein.

(a) UBGL ko fire karne se pahle yakin karen ki Rifle AK-47 ke butt par damper laga hua hai.

(b) Yakin karen ki UBGL ka elevation angle 80 degree se adhik na ho.

(d) Misfire ya blind grenade ke sath cherkhani na karen.

(e) Yadi grenade asani se na bhara ja raha ho to use jabardasti bharne ki koshish na karen. Aisi sthiti mein UBGL ka nirikshan karen.

LESSON-2

40MM UNDER BARREL GRENADE LAUNCHER SE WAQFIAT, KHOLNA JORNA AUR SAFAI KARNE KA TARIQA

(Ref - Under Barrel Grenade Launcher, UBGL-2006) Shuru Shuru ka Kam

1. Shuru-shuru ke kaam mein nimnlikhit baton par gaur kiya jaye:-

(a) Bandobast ki karwai.

(b) Class ki ginti groupon mein bant.

Dohrai

2. Prashn pichhle sabaq se puche jayen.

Pahunch

3. 40mm Under Barrel Grenade Launcher Bulgaria desh ka bana hua hai. Is hathiyar ko Infantry section mein shamil kiya gaya hai. Infantry section se sambandhit hathiyar hone ke karan zaruri hai ke sabhi jawanno ko is hathiyar ke bare mein jankari ho.

Uddesh

4. 40mm under barrel grenade launcher se waqfiat, kholna jorna aur safai karne ka tariqa sikhana hai.

Saman

5. 40mm UBGL, Rifle AK-47, pointer, balck board, easel, ground sheet, marker aur duster.

Bhagon Mein Bant

6. Yeh sabaq teen bhagon mein chalaya jayega:-

(a) Bhag-I - UBGL ki visheshtayen aur technical data.

(b) Bhag-II - Kholna, hisse purjon ke naam, kam aur jorna.

tariqa.

Bhag-1:UBGL ki visheshtayen aur technical data

7. Visheshtayen:-

(a) Direct aur Indirect fire kar sakte hain.

(b) Halka hathiyar hai.

(d) Yeh ek muzzle loaded hathiyar hai.

(e) Ek samay par UBGL aur AK-47 se fire kar sakten hain.

(f) UBGL se teen parkar ka amn fire kiya jata hai.

(g) UBGL ko full size assault rifle ie AKM, AKMS, AK-74, AK-47, AK-101, AK-103 aur AN-94 par fit karke bhi fire kiya ja sakta hai.

(h) 80 degree tak ke angle par fire kiya ja sakta hai.

(j) UBGL Bulgaria desh ka bana huya hathiyar hai.

8. Tech Data.

(a) Calibre - 40mm.

(b) Grooves - 12 (RH).

(d) Lambai - 323mm.

(e) Barrel - 98mm.

(f) Sight radius - 120mm.

(g) Muzzle velocity - 76 mtr/sec.

(h) Maximum range - 400 mtr.

(j) Direct range - 50 to 400 mtr.

(k) Indirect range - 200 to 350 mtr.

(l) Arming Distance - 10 to 40 mtr.

(m) Applied Safety - Safety Lock.

(n) Mechnical Safety - Blocking device & Lever.

(o) Rate of fire - 4 to 5 grenade/min.

9. Grenade.

(a) Weight - 250 gms.

(b) Lambai - 102.64mm.

(d) Fuze - KVM-3.

(e) Type of fuze - Super Quick Point Detonation Impact Fuze.

(f) Primer - VMG-K.

(g) Killing area - 7mtr radius

(h) Principle - Direct action and inertia.

(j) Ammunution.

(i) VOG 25.

(ii) VOG 25P.

(iii) Inert Grenade.

(k) Grenade ka mechanism. UBGL ke grenade mein 4 mechanism hote hain.

(i) Safety Mechanism. Jab grenade 3mtr upar se gir jata hai to grenade apni chal jari nahi karta.

(ii) Remote Arming Mechanism. Jab grenade 10 se 40mtr ki doori ke beech pahunchta hai to woh arm ho jata hai.

(iii) Impact & Punching Mechanism. Grenade arm hone ke baad kisi bhi vastu se takrata hai to blast ho jata hai jaise snow, water aur swamp(daldal).

(iv) Auto Destruction Mechanism. Yadi grenade kisi bhivastu se nahin takrata hai to bhi 14 se 19 sec ke baad grenade ke ander laga hua self destruction mechanism chal jari kar deta hai aur grenade blast ho jata hai.

Bhag-II:Kholna, Hisse Purjon ke Naam, Kam aur Jorna

10. 40mm UBGL ko 3 bhagon mein khola jata hai.

(a) Pistol gp with trigger mechanism.

(b) Barrel with support.

11. Kholna. Dahine hath ke anguthe se barrel locking catch ko dabayen aur bayen hath se barrel ko ghari ke ulte rukh 60 degree ghumayen aur barrel ko alag karen. Breech piece ko kholne ke liye AK-47 ki drift ki madad se catch pin ko bhar nikalen. Safety lock aur

body axis pin ko bahar nikalen aur breech piece ko trigger mechanism se alag karen. Ek firer ko itna hi kholna lagu hai.

12. Hisson purjon ke naam.

(a) Pistol Gp with trigger mechanism. Trigger bar, trigger bar hook, trigger, hammer, piston, striker aur hammer tail.

(b) Barrel with support. Barrel, latch, fore sight pole type, rear sight 'U' type, detent, detent sleeve, plumb, plumb sleeve, plumb retainer, runner, blocking device, leaver, compensator aur knurled bulge.

(c) Breech piece. Sitted for projectile, Mannual extractor, Single limb compensator, double limb compensator, Feed arm, Feed arm tail aur Barrel locking catch.

13. Jorna. Breech piece ke striker hole se striker ko milate hue joren. Body axis pin ko lagayen aur safety lock ko lagayen. Body axis pin aursafety lock ke upar catch pin kolagayen.Barrel with support ko pistol grip with trigger mechanism ke sath jorne ke liye breech piece ko dahine ye bayen rakhte huye barrel mein dakhil Karen aur tab tak ghumayen jab tak click ki aawaj na aa jaye.

Bhag-III: UBGL ki accessories se jankari aur safai karne ka tariqa.

14. 40mm UBGL ke sath 4 prakar ki accessories aati hai.

(a) Bag for artillery GP-25. Is bag mein UBGL, damper aur cleaning brush ko rakha jata hai.

(b) Bag for projectile VOG-25. Is bag ka istemal grenade ko carry karne ke liye kiya jata hai. Ismein 10 grenade rakhe jate hain. Is bag par ek fixing belt hota hai jis ko kamar ke sath fit kiya jata hai aur ek adjustable shoulder strip hota hai jisse is ko shoulder par carry kiya jata hai.

(c) Cleaning Brush. Cleaning brush UBGL ke barrel ki safai aur lubricating ke liye istemal mein laya jata hai. Brush ko Rifle AK-47 ki rod ke sath fit kiya jata hai.

(d) Damper with strap. Damper, fire ke dauran firer ke shoulder ki suraksha aur support ke liye diya gaya hai. Iske sath ek strap diya gaya hai. Jiski madad se damper ko Rifle AK-47 ke butt par lagaya jata hai.

15. Safai. UBGL ki safai anya hathiyaron ki tarah hi ki jati hai.

16 Lubrication.

(a) Yadi temp +50 se -50 degree centigrade to Gun oil RANGE GOST 9811-61 ka istemal kiya jata hai.

(b) UBGL ke mechanism ke ander grease SOTY38.101.1315.90 ka istemal kiya jata hai jab tapman 5 degree centigrade se upar ho.

(d) Barrel ke grooves, cut aur holes ki safai lakri ki sticks se bhi kar sakte hain.

17. Storage & Transportation. UBGL ko store karte samay Rifle AK-47 se alag karke bag ke ander rakh kar wooden box mein store kiya jaye. Storage box ko windows (khirki) aur heating devices (stoves) addi se door rakha jaye.Combat situation ke dauran yadi UBGL ko Rifle AK-47 par fit karke rakhna pade to yakin karen ki safety lock ki posn NP (safe) par ho.

18. Grenade ki Packing. UBGL ke grenade ek wooden box mein aate hain. Ek wooden box mein teen steel ke box aate hain ek steel box mein 40 grenade hote hai.

19. UBGL Zeroing.

(a) Position - Lying supported.

(b) Ground range - 100 mtr.

(d) Ammunition - Inert grenade.

(e) Target - 3x3 mtr plywood board.

(f) Target par circle - 35cm radius.

20. Zeroing karne ka tariqa. 100 mtr ki doori se lying support position se 4 grenade firekiye jate hain. Grenade ka MPI 35 cm ke circle ke ander banta hai to UBGL ko sahi zero mana jata hai. Agar grenade ki MPI circle mein nahi banta hai to jarurat suda correction diya jata hai.

21. Correction dene ka tariqa.

(a) Upar niche ka correction. Upar nichhe ka correction fore sight sediya jata hai. Fore sight ko ek pura chhaker dene se 75cm ka farak parta hai. Foresight ko clockwise ghumane se MPI upar aata hai aur anti clock wise ghumane seMPI nichhe aata hai. Iski fore sight pole type hone ke karan minor correction bhi diya ja sakta hai.

(b) Dayen bayen ka correction. Dahine bayen ka correction rear sight ke screw se diyajata hai. Rear sight ke nichhe 8 runner line di gai hain 4 line madhya se bayen aur 4 line madhya se dahine. Ek runner se dusre runner ka correction dene par 75 cm ka farak parta hai. Ek runner 4 click ko jahir karte hain aur ek click se dusre click ka correction dene par 18.75 cm ka farak parta hai. Rear sight screw ko clock wise ghumane se MPI dahine jati hai aur anti clock wise ghumane se MPI bayen jati hai. Is parkar upar/niche aur dayen/bayen ka correction dekar MPI ko circle ke ander laya jata hai.

Sankshep.

22. Sabhi bhagon se prashna puchhe jayen.

LESSON-3

40MM UNDER BARREL GRENADE LAUNCHER KI FIRING POSITION, BHARNAKHALI KARNA, FIRE AUR MISFIRE HONE PAR KARWAI KARNE KA TARIQA

(Ref - Under Barrel Grenade Launcher, UBGL-2006) Shuru Shuru ka Kam

1. Shuru-shuru ke kaam mein nimnlikhit baton par gaur kiya jaye:-

(a) Bandhobast ki karwai.

(b) Class ki ginti gp mein bant.

Dohrai

2. Prashna pichhle sabaq se kiya jayen.

Pahunch

3. 40mm Under Barrel Grenade Launcher ek Infantry section ka direct aur indirect fire karne wala hathiyar hai, iski madad se hum dushman ke upar karger fire girakar uska jiada se jiada nukshan kar sakte hain. Ek infantry section ka hathiyar hone ke karan zaruri hai ki sabhi jawanon ko iski firing position, bharna, khali karna fire aur misfire hone par karwahi karne ka tariqa aana chahiye.

Uddesh

4. 40mm under barrel grenade launcher ki firing position, bharna khali karna, fire aur mis fire hone par karwai karne ka tariqa sikhana hai.

Saman

5. 40mm UBGL, Rifle AK-47, Drill grenade, Chindi, Pointer, Board, Easel, Ground sheet, marker aur Duster.

Bhagon Mein Bant

6. Yeh sabaq 4 bhagon mein chalaya jayega:-

(a) Bhag-I - UBGL ki firing position.

(b) Bhag-II - Bharna khali karna.

(d) Bhag-IV - Fire aur misfire hone par karwai karne katariqa.

Bhag-1 : UBGL ki Firing Position

7. Firing position waise to zamin ki banawat aur larai ki halat par nirbhar karti hain. Lekin training ki lihaz se 40mm UBGL ko 4 prakar ki firing position sefire kiya jata hai.

(a) Lying Posn.

(i) Jarurat. Jab firer ke samne aad 1'ya 1' se niche ho ya khule madan se fire karne ki jarurat ho to lying position ko istemal mein laya jata hai.

(ii) Position lene ka tariqa. Dahine paon ko target ki sidh mein rakhen, bayen paon ko chalti halat mein aage len sath hi dahine hath se UBGL ko badan ke samne itna uchale ki bayen hath ki pakar UBGL ke pistol grip par aa jaye, aur dahine hath ka sahara lete hue lying position ikhtiyar karen. Butt aur kandhe ka milap karen. Is position mein dekhne wali batein:-

(aa) Target, UBGL, firer ka dahina kandha aur dahina paon ek sidh mein ho.

(ab) Badan line of sight se tirchha ho.

(ac) Ho sake to dono paon ki adiyen zamin par tiki ho. (ad) Dono kohniyan zamin par tiki ho.

(ae) Bayen hath ki pakar UBGL ke pistol grip par kalme wali unguli trigger ke bahar. Dahine hath ki pakad AK-47 ke pistol grip par kalme wali unguli trigger ke bahar.

(af) Najar samne.

(ag) 100 mtr range se jaida range par fire karne ki jarurat ho to firing position ki badli ki jati hai.

Fig- 14 Lying Position

(b) Sitting Position.

(i) Jarurat. Jab firer ke samne aad kneeling position se nicha ho ya dhalandar zamin se upar se niche fire karne ki jarurat ho to sitting position koistemal mein laya jata hai.

(ii) Position lene ka tariqa. Bayen paon ko target ki sidh mein rakhen. UBGL ko bayen hath mein pakren aur dahine hath ki hatheli ka sahara lete hue sitting position ikhtiyar karen. Butt aur kandhe ka milap karen. Is position mein dekhne wali batein:-

(aa) Bayen pair target ki sidh mein dahina paon dahine aur dono paon kadke mutabiq khule huye.

(ab) Donon paon ki edhiyen zamin par tiki ho. Toe aasman ko point karta hue ho.

(ac) Donon kohniyan dono ghutne par dhyan rahe haddi se haddi ka milap na ho.

(ad) Baki pakar lying positon ki tarah.

(ae) Yadi 150 mtr se adhik range par fire karne ki jarurat ho to AK-47 ke butt ko dahine bagal mein lagakar fire kiya jata hai.

Fig-15 Sitting Position

(i) Jarurat. Jab firer ke samne aad 2 se 2.5 ft ki ho ya niche se upar fire karne ki jarurat ho to kneeling position istemal mein laya jata hai.

(ii) Position lene ka tariqa. Bayen paon ko target ki sidh mein rakhen aur dahine ghutne ke bal kneeling position ikhtiyar karen. Is position mein dekhne wali batein:-

(aa) Bayen paon target ki sidh mein.

(ab) Dahina ghutna pura dahine aur zamin par tika hua.

(ac) Bayen hath ki kohni bayen ghutne par. dhyan rahe ki haddi se haddi ka milap na ho.

(ad) Dahine hath ki kohni zamin ke samanantar. (ae) Body weight dahine paon ki adhi par.

(af) Najar samne, baki pakar sitting position ki tarah.

(ag) Yadi 150 mtr se adhik range par fire karne ki jarurat ho to AK-47 ke butt ko dahine bagal mein lagakar fire kiya jata hai.

Fig-15 Kneeling Position

(d) Standing Position.

(i) Jarurat. Jab firer ke samne 4 se 4.5 ft ki aad ho ya fire trench se fire karne ki jarurat pade to standing position ko istemal mein laya jata hai.

(ii) Position lene ka tariqa. Bayen paon ko target ki sidh mein rakhen, dahine paon kodahine aur thora piche len. Butt aur kandhe ka milap karen. Is position mein dekhne wali batein:-

Fig-16 : Standing Position

(e) Elevated position.

(i) Bayen paon target ki sidh mein ho.

(ii) Dahina paon thora dahine aur pichhe.

(iii) Dahine hath ki kohni jamin ke samananter.

(iv) Najar samne, baki pakar sitting position ki tarah.

(i) Jarurat. Jab firer ko 45 degree se 80 degree ke elevation ke beech fire karne ki jarurat ho to elevated position ko istemal mein laya jata hai.

(ii) Elevated position lene ka tariqa.

(aa) Kneeling position ikhtiyar karen. Rifle AK-47 ke butt ke upar wale bhag ko sandbag par tikayen aur niche wale bhag ko zamin parti kayen.

(ab) Bayen hath ki pakar UBGL ke pistol grip par aur dahine hath ki pakar AK-47 ke small of the butt par.

(ac) Butt firer ke dahine ghutne ke sathlaga ho.

Fig-17 : Elevated Position

Bhag-II : Bharna khali karna

8. Bhar karne ka tariqa. Jab firer ko fire karne ki jarurat ho ya training ke dauran aadesh mile bhar to karwahi is prakar se karen:-

(a) UBGL ko saaf jagah par rakhen. Bag for projectile VOG 25 se grenade ko bahar nikalen.

(b) Grenade ka mulaiza karen. Yadi grenade ki body kahin se dabi ya crack ho to aise grenade ka istemal na kiya jaye. Aise grenade ko anya grenade se alag rakhen. Yadi grenade istemal ki lihaz se thik to chindi ya kapre ki madad se Grenade ki safai

karen. UBGL ko len aur safety lock ki position ko safe par karen. Barrel ka mulaiza karen yadidhul, mitti ho to chindi ya kapde ki madad se safai karen. Dahine hath se taiyar kiye huye grenade ko len. Nose ko upar ki taraf karte huye grenade ko barrel mein dakhil karen. Dono hathon ke anguthe se grenade ko tab tak press karen jab tab click ki aawaj na aa jaye.

9. Khali karne ka tariqa. Jab firer ko fire karne ki jarurat na ho ya traning ke daruan aadesh mile bagair fire khali kar to karwahi is parkar se karen:-

(a) Yakin karen ki safety lock ki position safe par ho.

(b) Bayen hath ke anguthe se mannual extractor ko aage ki aur press karen aur dahine hath ko muzzle ke aage le jayen. Bayen hath se UBGL ko aage ki aur jhukayen. Jisse grenade bahar aa jata hai. Grenade ko bag for projectile VOG 25mein band karen.

Bhag-III : Range lagana aur shist lene ka tariqa

10. Sight ke hisson purjon ke naam. Fore sight - 'Pole' type, Rear sight 'U' type, detent, detent catch, detent sleeve, plumb sight, plumb sleeve, plumb catch, range indicator aur rear sight.

11. Range scale. Iske upar do prakar ki range scale diya gaya hain. White range scale aur red range scale. UBGL se do prakar ka fire kiya jata hai. Direct fire aur indirect fire. Direct fire ke liye white range scale ka itemal kiya jata hai. Iske upar 50 to 400 mtr tak range lagane ki suvidha di gayi hai. Jiske upar chotti line 100mtr aur badi line 50 mtr ko jahir karti hain.Indirect fire ke liye red range scale ka istemal kiya jata hai. Iske upar 200 to 350 mtr tak range lagane ki suvidha di gayi hai. Iske upar bhi chhoti line 100mtr aur badi line 50 mtr ko jahir karti hai.

12. Range lagane ka tariqa. Direct fire ke liye aadesh mile range 200 mtr to bayen hath ke anguthe se detent catch ko niche ki aur dabate huye range indicator ko white range scale parmile huye range ki sidh mein milayen. Yakin karen ki range thik lag gaya.

13. Shist lene ka tariqa. Rear sight ko khara karen. Butt aur kandhe ka milap karen. Rear sight ke katav mein fore sight tip ko milate huye target ke POA par milayen. Indirect fire ke liye aadesh mile range 300 mtr to bayen hath ke anguthe se detent catch ko niche ki aur dabate huye range indictor ko red range scale par mile huye range ki sidh mein lagayen. Yakin karen ki range thik lag gaya.

14. Angle hasil karne ka tariqa. UBGL ko target ki sidh mein align karen. Plumb retainer ko dabate huye plumb sight ko azad karen. Plumb sleeve aur detent sleeve ko milate huye durust angle hasil karen.

Bhag-IV : Fire aur Misfire hone par karwai karne ka tariqa

15. Fire karne ka tariqa. Firing position ikhtiyar karen. Bhar ki karwai ho jane ke bad mila huwa range, sight par lagayen. Aadesh mile ready tab safety lock ki position ko fire par karen. Range ke anusar butt aur kandhe ka milap karen. Durust shist lete huye trigger ko press karen. Is prakar trigger press karne se grenade fire ho jata hai. Firer target area mein grenade ki mar ko dekhta hai. Yadi grenade on target na ho to munasib correction dete huye dusra grenade fire karta hai. Isprakar ek achchhi training paya huwa jawan ek minute mein 4-5 grenade ke hisab se fire karta hai.

16. Misfire hone par karwai karne ka tariqa. Agar trigger dabane se grenade fire na ho ya training ke dauran aadesh mile “FIRE NAHIN” to karwai is prarkar se karen. Pakad aur shist ko kayam rakhte huye dubara se trigger ko press karen. Dubara trigger press karne ke bad bhi grenade fire na ho ya training ke dauran aadesh mile“PHIR FIRE NAHIN” to pakad

, shist aur trigger par dabav kayam rakhte huye 1 minute ka waqfa diya jaye. Agar 1 minute ka waqfa pura ho jane ke bad bhi grenade fire na ho yatraining ke dauran aadesh mile “PHIR BHI FIRE NAHIN” to misfire khali kar ki karwahi ki jati hai. Karne ka tariqa. Kalme wali unguli ko trigger se bahar nikalen. Butt aur kandhe ka milap toden. Safety lock ki position ko safe par karen. Grenade ko manual extractor ki madad se bahar nikalen. Grenade ke primer ko check karen. Grenade ke primer par chot na ho to striker ki badli karwaya jaye. Yadi grenade ke primer par chot ho to grenade ki noseko target ki taraf rakhte huye firing positon se 10mtr aage aur dahine rakhen. Dusra grenade bharen. Safety lock ki position ko fire par karen aur butt kandhe ka milap karen. Durust shist len aur UBGL ko fire mein shamil karen.

17. Misfire hone ke karan.

(a) Striker ka ghis jana ya tut jana.

(b) Grenade ke primer mein kami hona.

18. Abhiyas ke liye aadesh.

(a) “FIRE NAHIN” ke aadesh par dobara trigger press kiya jayega.

(b) “PHIR FIRE NAHIN” ke aadesh par 1 minute ka waqfa diya jayega.

Sankshep

19. Sabhi bhagon se prashna puchhe jayen.

FAQ

1. UBGL kaun se desh ka bana hai?

2. Ek Battalion mein kitne UBGL auth hain?

3. UBGL ki barrel mein kitne grooves hote hain?

4. UBGL se kitne prakar ka Ammunition fire kiya jata hai?

5. UBGL ka arming distance kitna hain?

6. UBGL mein grooves ka ghumav kis taraf hai?

7. UBGL ki muzzle velocity kitni hai?

8. UBGL ke grenade ka killing area kitna hai?

9. UBGL ka grenade kis sidhant par kam karta hai?

10. UBGL ka sight radius kitna hai?

11. UBGL ko kitne bhagon mein khola jata hain?

12. UBGL mein kitne parkar ki sight di gayi hain?

13. UBGL mein indirect fire ke liye kaunsi sight ka istemal kiya jata hai?

14. UBGL ka rate of fire kitna hai?

15. UBGL se direct fire kitne range tak kar sakte hain?

16. UBGL mein kaun se lubrication ka istemal hota hai?

17. UBGL se jyada se jyada kitni degree se fire kiya jata hain?

18. UBGL mein damper ka istemal kyon kiya jata hain?

19. UBGL mein MGL ka Amn fire kar sakte hain ki nahi?

20. UBGL ki fore sight ka ek chakkar 100mtr par kitna farak dalta hai?

21. UBGL ka Defence, attack aur Counter Insurgency mein kya role hain?

22. UBGL mein grenade ko sithirta kaise pradan hoti hai?

23. UBGL ke grenade mein kaun sa fuze hota hai?

24. UBGL ka grenadekitne distance par arm hota hai?

25. UBGL ka grenade snow, water aur daldal se takraka bhe blast kaun ho jata hai?

26. UBGL ke grenade ko colour se kaise pehchanege?

27. UBGL ke grenade VOG-25 aur VOG-25P mein kaya antar hain?

28. UBGL ka safety lock safe par hone se trigger press kyon nahi hota hai?

29. UBGL ka striker kaun se hisse mein laga hua hain?

30. UBGL ka mechnical safety kya hai?

40. UBGL Rifle AK-47 par fit kiye bagair fire kyon nahi karta hai?

41. UBGL ke sath kitne prakar ki assy aati hai?

42. UBGL ko zeroing ke dauran fore sight tip ko kis tool se correction denge?

43. UBGL ke grenade ka auto destruction mechanism kab kaam karta hain?

44. Rifle AK-47 par UBGL ko fit karne ke baad bayonet laga sakte hain ki nahi?

45. UBGL se Elevated postion se fire kab kiya jata hai?

46. UBGL ke rear sight zeroing screw ko clock wise ghumane se MPI kis taraf jata hai?

47. Zeroing karte samay kaun se Grenade ka istemal kiya jata hai?

48. Kya UBGL ko bayen master eye (aankh) ka firer bhee fire kar sakta hai?

49. UBGL se indirect fire ke liye kaun se range scale se fire kiya jata hai?

50. UBGL mein catch pin ka kya kaam hota hai?

51. UBGL ke Grenade VOG-25P ka shape kaisa hota hai?

52. UBGL ke bag for projectile VOG-25 mein kitne grenade aatehain?

53. UBGL mein misfire hone ke karan kya hain?

54. UBGL ka first line Amn kitna hota hai?

55. Inert Grenade ka range kitna hota hai?

56. UBGL ke grenade ki lambai kitna hai?

57. UBGL mein compensators kahan par lagaya gaya hai?

58. UBGL ke Grenade ka barrel mein jam hone ka karan?

59. UBGL ki barrel mein grenade jamming hone par aap kaya karwai karenge?

60. UBGL ke mechanisim mein kaun sa grease ka istemal kiyajata hai?

61. Grenade VOG 25 mein kitna explosive aata hai?

62. UBGL is fore sight aur rear sight kis parkar ki hoti hain?

63. Rear Sight par kam se kam correction kitna diya ja sakta hai?

64. UBGL ka sight radius kitna hota hai?

65. UBGL ko Infantry section mein kis jawan ko diya gaya hai?

66. UBGL ke Grenade ek steel box mein kitne aate hain?

67. UBGL ke zeroing target ki size kitna hai?

68. UBGL ke zeroing target par bane circle ka size kitna hota hai?

69. UBGL ko zeroing karte samay sight par kitna range lagaya jata hai?

70. UBGL ko zeroing ke dauran koun se range scale ka istemal kiya jata hai?

71. Loaded halat mein UBGL ko carry kiya ja sakta hai ya nahin?

72. Yadi MPI zeroing ke dauran POA se 150cm upar ban rahi hai to kon se sight ko kitna correction kis disha mein diyajayega?

73. 150 mtr range se adhik range par UBGL ko kandhe se firekyon nahin kiya jata?

74. SPTA ka full form kya hota hai?

75. UBGL ki cleaning brush ka istemal kis parkar se kiya jatahai?

76. UBGL ke trigger machanisam ki chal batao?

77. UBGL ke grenade ka fuze ki type kiya hai?

78. UBGL ke grenade mein driving band kyon diye gaye hain?

79. UBGL mein fire ke dauran obturation ki karwai hoti hai yanahin?

80. UBGL ke sight mein lage huye spring ka kya kam hota hai?

40MM UNDER BARREL GRENADE LAUNCHER (INSAS)

LESSON NO - I

40MM UNDER BARREL GREN LAUNCHER (INSAS) SE WAQFIAT KHOLNA, JORNA AUR SAFAI KARNE KA TARIQA SIKHANA HAI

Parichay

1. Second world war ke bad duniya ke sabhi deshon ne naye naye hathyaron ka avishkar kiya hai. Hamare desh ke vagyanikon ne 40 MM UBGL (INSAS) ka avishkar kya hai. Is hathiyar ko sec mein Rif Man No-3 ko diya gaya hai. Naya hathiyar hone ke karan zaruri hai ki sec ke har jawan ko is hathiyar ki visheshtayen, tech data, kholna, jorna aur safai karne ka tariqa achhi tarah janta ho taki hathiyar ki sahi dekh bhal kar sake aur apne hathiyar ko hamesha fire ke liye taiyar rakh sake. Lekin Yeh tabhi ho sakta hai jab har jawan ne sqd post sikhlai ke dauran achhi sikhlai paya ho. Inhi baton ko maddhenazar rakhte hue sune sabak ka uddesh.

Uddesh

2. 40 mm UBGL (INSAS) se waqfiat, Kholna, Jorna aur Safai Karne ka Tariqa Sikhana Hai.

Saman

3. UBGL (INSAS), AK-47, Insas Rif, Ground Sheet, Small pointer, Black board, Long Easel, Marker aur Duster.

Bhagon Mein Bant

4. Nimn bhagon me sikhaya jayega.

(a) Bhag-I - 40mm UBGL (INSAS) ki Visheshtayen aur Jaruri Tech Data.

(b) Bhag -II - 40mm UBGL (INSAS) ko Kholna, Hisse Purjon ke Naam, Kaam, Jorna, Rifle par Fit karna aur utrane ka tariqa.

Yahan tak kiye bayan aur karwai mein kisi student ka koi sawal, sawal nahi to Bhag I

Bhag I- 40mm UBGL (INSAS) Ki Visheshtayen Aur Jaroori Tech Data

5. (a) Visheshtayen.

(i) Yeh Apne desh ka bana hua hathiyar hai.

(ii) Yeh ek halka hathiyar hai.

(iii) Kargar rg adhik hai.

(iv) Yeh ek breech loaded hathiyar hai.

(v) Is hathiyar se direct aur indirect dono role mein fire kar sakte hain.

(vi) UBGL(INSAS) ko Insas rif aur AK-47 dono par chada kar fire kar sakte hain.

(vii) Is hathiyar se char prakar ka amn fire kiya jata hai.

(viii) 80° ke angle tak fire kar sakte hain.

(ix) Dono hathiyaron se ek sath fire kar sakte hain.

(b) Tech Data.

(i) Caliber - 40mm

(ii) Weight - 1.5 Kg

(iii) Lambai - 450mm

(iv) Brl ki Lambai - 350mm

(v) Grooves - 06 (RH) 1 trun =1200mm

(Progressive)

(vi) Muzzle Velocity - 60m/sec

(vii) Fore sight - Post Type

(viii) Rear sight - Ladder type

(xi) Direct Range - 100,150, 200, 250, 300 aur

400m (Ladder Sight)

(x) Indirect Range(B/S) - 300m aur 400m

(Aage-400m aur Pichhe-300m)

(xi) Mech Safety - Inbuilt safety for trigger ops aur brl locking

(xii) Applied Safety - Safety Catch

(xiii) Rate of Fire - 9 se 10 Gren/ min

(xiv) Max Range - 400 Mtrs

(xv) Sight - Open Sight aur Bubble Sight

(xvi) Sidhant - Single Shot Pump Action

(xvii) Amn - HE, HEDP, SBRP, PRAC

(xviii) Recoil energy - 17 jule

(xix) Raat ke samay Beta Light ki suvidha di gai hai (100m aur 200m par).

(xx) Abhi ismein optical sight nahi diya gaya hai lekin aane wale samay mein diya ja sakta hai.

(xxi) Cart size - 40x46mm

Bhag II - 40mm UBGL (INSAS) Ko Kholna, Hisse Purjon Ke Naam, Kaam, Jorna Aur Rifle Par Chadane Aur Utrane Ka Tariqa

6. Isse nimn bhaag me sikhaya jayega.

(a) Kholna. Sabse pahle yakin karen ki UBGL khali hai. Bayen hath ke anguthe se barrel locking catch ko dabyen hand guard se pakadte hue barrel ko aage ki aur le jayen aur bayonet lug catch for Insas rif ko dabate huwe body se barrel ko alag karen. Mote taur par UBGL (INSAS) do bare bhagon mein hi khulta hai.

(b) Body Housing Assy ke hisse purje.

(i) Bayonet lug catch (INSAS).

(ii) Bayonet lug catch (AK- 47).

(iii) Spring lug catch.

(vi) Races for cocking arm.

(v) Brl locking lever.

(vi) End plate.

(vii) Back plate.

(viii) Trigger.

(ix) Safety catch.

(x) Sitted for gren primer.

(xi) Ejector.

(xii) Pin Firing.

(xiii) Recoil spring.

(xiv) Recoil spring housing.

(xv) Extractor.

(xvi) Extractor spring.

(xvii) Guide spring.

(xviii) Safety catch.

(xix) Retainer.

(xx) Dust Plate.

(i) Brl.

(ii) Hand guard.

(iii) Leaf spring.

(iv) Cocking arm.

(v) Rivit cocking arm.

(d) Sight.

(i) Fore sight (Post Type).

(ii) Rear sight (Ladder Type).

(iii) Housing for ladder sight.

(iv) Locking lever.

(v) Pin locking lever.

(vi) Nut for locking sight.

(vii) Screw axis for sight.

(viii) Screw housing ladder.

(ix) Spring ladder sight.

(x) Pin ladder.

(xi) Beta source.

(e) Jorna. Jis parkar khola tha thik uske vipreet karwai karen.

(f) Insas Rif Par Chadane Ka Tariqa.

(i) Insas rifle ke fore hand gaurd ko kholen.

(ii) Rifle ke cup hand guard ko upar ki aur karen.

(iii) UBGL (INSAS) ko len aur bayonet lug catch (Insas Rif) mein bayonet lug ko fit karen.

(iv) UBGL (INSAS) ke nichhe wale bhag ko rifle mein fit karen aur cup hand guard ko lagayen.

(g) AK 47 Rif Par Chadane Ka Tariqa. AK 47 Rif par chadane ka tariqa bhi hubahu INSAS Rif ki tarah hi hai. Lekin AK 47 Rif ko pura kholna jaruri hai. Bayonet lug catch(AK 47) mein bayonet lug ko fit kiya jata hai.

(h) Dismount.

(i) Cup hand guard ke locking catch ko 900 upar khara karen aur cup hand guard ko uppar karen.

(ii) Bayonet lug catch ko nichhe ki aur dabate hue UBGL ko upar uthayen aur rif se alag karen.

(iii) Rifle ke hand guard ko lagayen.

Bhag III - Safai Karne Ka Tariqa

7. Safai karne ka tariqa, Baki hathiyaron ki tarah hi is hathiyar ki bhi safai ki jati hai. Safai karne ke liye cleaning rod ke sath cleaning brush ko joren aur iski safai karen. Safai ke baad baki hathiyaron ki tarah hi iska bhi lubrication kiya jata hai.

Do’s

(a) Diye gaye brush se hi safai karen aur oil lagayen.

(b) Jab UBGL ko ek jagah se dussri jagah le jaya ja raha ho ya istemal mein na laya ja raha ho to ladder sight ko down karke rakha jaye.

(d) UBGL ko cock karte samay jhatke se cock na karen.

(e) UBGL ko inspaction karna ho to Rif se alag karen.

(f) Rifle par fit karne se pahle safai kar len.

Don’t

(a) Do’s ke vipreet karwai na karen.

Sankshep

8. Shuru shuru mein class ki ginti groupon mein bant kiya gaya. Pahla lesson hone ke karan Hathiyar aur saman ka nirikshan mere dawara kiya gaya. bandobast ki karwai mere dawara check ki gai. Dhorai pichhle lesson se karaya gaya. Uddesh ko dohraya gaya. Sabak se sambandhit saman ko pointer ki madad se dikhya gaya. Sabak tarteeb se chale aur class ko assani se samajh mein aaye is liye teen bhagon mein chalaya gaya.

Bhag-I. 40mm UBGL (INSAS) ki Visheshtayen aur Jaruri Tech Data.

Q1. UBGL (INSAS) ki lambai kitni hai? Ans. 450mm.

Bhag –II. 40mm UBGL (INSAS) ko Kholna, Hisse Purjon ke Naam, Kaam, Jorna aur Rifle par Fit karna aur utrane ka tariqa.

Q2. UBGL (INSAS) ko kitne bare bhagon mein khola jata hai? Ans. 02 bhagon mein.

Bhag -III. Safai Karne ka Tariqa.

Q3. UBGL (INSAS) ki safai kis parkar ki jati hai? Ans. Anya Hathiyaron ki tarah.

Yahan par lesson sankshep ke sath samapt hota hai abhi bhi pure lesson mein kisi bhi student ka koi sawal, aapka aagla lesson 40mm UBGL (INSAS) ki firing posn bharna khali karna fire aur misfire hone par karwai karne ka tariqa sikhana hai, isse aap padhkar ayenge.

LESSON NO 2

40MM INSAS UBGL KI FIRING POSNS, BHARNA KHALI KARNA, FIRE

AUR MISFIRE HONE PAR KARWAI KARNE KA TARIQA SIKHANA HAI

Parichay

1. Ek jawan ko UBGL ka pura faida uthane ke liye UBGL ki firing posns, bharna, khali karna fire aur misfire hone per karwai karne ka tariqa bhi achhi tarah se ana chahiye, taki ladai ke maidan mein ek jawan apna mudda hasil kar sake.

Uddesh

2. 40mm INSAS UBGL ki firing posns, bharna, khali karna, fire aur misfire hone par karwai karne ka tariqa sikhana hai.

Saman

3. INSAS UBGL, INSAS Rif, Mag, Drill Gren, fig 11 tgt, black board, long easel, pointer, ground sheet.

Bhagon mein bant: -

4. Nimn bhagon me sikhaya jayega.

(a) Bhag - I:40mm INSAS UBGL ki firing posns.

(b) Bhag - II:Bharna aur khali karna.

(d) Bhag - IV: Fire aur misfire hone par karwai karne ka tariqa .

Bhag – I

5. 40 MM INSAS UBGL ki firing Posns. 40mm INSAS UBGL se panch prakar ki firing posn se fire kiya jata hai.

(a) Standing Position.

(b) Kneeling Position.

(d) Lying Position.

(e) Elevation Position.

Lying Position

6. Lying posn uthayen UBGL. Firing posns mein sabse pahle sikhaunga lying posn. Zarurat. Jab firer ko ek feet ya isse kam arh mile ya khule ilaqa se fire karne ki jarurat pare to lying posn ekhtiyar kiya jata hai. Karne ka tariqa. Lying posn ekhtiyar kar is adesh par firer dahine paon se tgt ko align karta hai aur bayen paon ko chalti halat main aage leta hai. Dahine hath se UBGL ko badan ke samne is parkar se uchhalta hai ki bayen hath ki pakar UBGL ke hand guard par aa jaye. Dahine hath ka take lete huye lying posn ikhtiyar karta hai. Butt aur kandha ke milap karen. Is posn mein dekhne wali baten.

(a) Tgt, UBGL, firer ka dahine kandha aur dahine paon ek sidh mein ho.

(b) Badan line of fire se tircha ho.

(d) Bayen hath ki pakar UBGL ke hand guard par ho. Dahine hath ki pakar Rif ki pistol grip par kalme wali ungli trigger guard ke bahar. Nazar samne.

(e) 150m se jyada range par fire karne ki zarurat pare to firing posn ki badli kiya jata hai.

Kneeling Position

7. Zarurat. Jab arh 2 se 2.5 feet ki mile ya niche se uppar ko fire karne ki zarurat pare to kneeling posn ekhtiyar kiya jata hai. Karne ka tariqa. Kneeling posn ekhtiyar kar ke adesh par firer bayen paon ko tgt ki seedh mein align karta hai aur dahine hath se UBGL ko badan ke samne is parkar se uchhalta hai bayen hath ki pakar hand guard par aa jaye. Dahine ghutne ke bal kneeling posn ekhtiyar karen. Butt aur kandha ka milap karen. Nazar samne. Is posn mein dekhne wali baten.

(a) Bayan paon tgt ki sidh mein.

(b) Dahina ghutna pura dahine aur zamin par tika hua. Body wt dahine paon ki ari ki upar.

(c) Bayen hath ki pakar UBGL ke hand guard par ho. Dahine hath ki pakar Rif ke pistol grip par. kalme wali ungli trigger guard ke bahar.

(d) Bayen hath ki kohni bayen ghutne par. Dhyan rahe firing ke dauran haddi se haddi ke milap na ho.

(e) Dahine hath ki kohni zamin ke sath samanantar.

Yadi 150m se adhik range par fire karne ke zarurat pare to Rif ke butt ko dahine bagal mein daba kar fire kiya jata hai.

Sitting Posn

8. Zarurat. Jab firer ko kneeling posn se kam arh mile ya dhalawdar zameen se neeche ki aur fire karne ki jarurat pare to sitting posn ekhtiyar kiya jata hai. Karne ka tariqa. Sitting posn ekhtiyar kar ke adesh par firer bayen paon ko tgt ke seedh mein align karta hai. UBGL ko apne badan ke samne itna uchhalta hai ki bayen hath ki pakar hand guard par aa jaye. Dahine paon ko chalti hui halat mein aage leta hai. Sath hi dahine hath ki hatheli ka take lete hue sitting posn ekhtiyar karta hai. Butt kandha ka milap karen. Nazar samne. Is posn mein dekhne wali baten.

(a) Bayen paon tgt ke seedh mein.

(b) Dahine paon dahine aur dono paon kad ke mutabik khule huye.

(d) Bayen hath ki pakar UBGL ke hand guard par ho.Dahine hath ki pakar Rif ke pistol grip par kalme wali ungli trigger guard ke bahar.

(e) Dono hath ki kohniyan dono ghutne par dhyan rahe firing ke dauran haddi se haddi ka milap na ho.

Yadi 150m se adhik range par fire karne ke zarurat pare to Rif ke butt ko dahine bagal mein daba kar fire kiya jata hai

Standing Position

9. Zarurat. Jab firer ko 4 se 4.5 feet ki arh mile ya fire trench se fire karne ki zarurat pare to standing posn ekhtiyar kiya jata hai. Karne ka tariqa. Standing posn ekhtiyar kar ke adesh par firer bayen paon ko tgt ke seedh mein align karta hai aur dahine hath se UBGL ko badan ke samne itna uchhalta hai ki bayen hath ki pakar hand guard par aa jaye. Dahine paon ko dahine aur thora pichhe len. Butt aur kandhe ka milap karen. Nazar samne. Is posn main dekhne bali baten.

(a) Bayan paon tgt ki seedh mein.

(b) Dahina paon dahine aur thora pichhe.

(c) Bayen hath ki pakar UBGL ke hand guard par ho. Dahine hath ki pakar Rif ke pistol grip par. kalme wali ungli trigger guard ke bahar.

(d) Dahine hath ki kohni zamin ke sath samanantar.

Yadi 150m se adhik range par fire karne ke zarurat pare to Rif ki butt ko dahine bagal mein daba kar fire kiya jata hai.

Elevated Position

10. Jab ek firer ko 300m se 400m ke range par indirect fire karne ki jarurat ho to bubble sight ka istemal kiya jata hai. Bubble sight ka istemal karte huye indirect fire karne ke liye elevated posn ekhtiyar kiya jata hai. Elevated posn ekhtiyar karne ka tariqa. Elevated posn

ekhtiyar kar ke adesh par kneeling posn ekhtiyar karen. Rif ke butt ko dahine ghutne ki dahine bagal mein jamin par rakhen. Rif ke butt ke upar wale bhag ko sand bag par tikayen. Is posn mein dekhne wali baten.

(a) Tgt, launcher aur firer ka sar ek hi seedh mein ho.

(b) Bayen hath ki pakar UBGL ke hand guard par. Dahine hath ki pakar Rif ke small of the butt par.Dahine hath se butt ko majbut se pakare aur niche dabakar rakhen.

(d) Bayen hath ki pakar UBGL ke hand guard par.

Bhag II - Bharna aur Khali Karna

11. Bharna. Kneeling posn uthayen UBGL. Kneeling posn ekhtiyar kar.Sunne. Jab firer ko tgt area mein tgt dikhai de ya sqd post trg ke dauran adesh mile bhar, bhar ke adesh par sabse pahle UBGL ko neeche rakhta hai. Pouch se gren ko bahar nikalta hai aur gren ki body ko check karta hai. Yadi gren ki body dabi ho ya crack ho to aise gren ko istemal mein na liya jaye. Aise gren ko anya gren se alag rakhen. Yadi gren fire ki lihaj se thik ho to saaf kapde ya chindi ke madad se saaf karen aur saaf jagah par rakhen. Dono hathon se UBGL ko uthayen. Bayen hath ke anguthe ki madad se barrel locking lever ko dabate huye barrel ko unlock karen. Dhyan rahe unlock karte samay barrel ko kabu mein rakhe. Barrel ko aage ki taraf dakhalen. Chamber aur barrel ka nirikshan karen. Chamber ya barrel mein dhool, mitti ya garda hai to kisi saaf kapre ya chindi ki madad se saaf karen. Saaf kiya gaye gren ko len aur gren ko chamber mein dakhil karen. Bayen hath ki madad se barrel ko pichhe ki taraf khinche. Yakin karen barrel lock ho gaya hai. Yadi barrel sahi lock hai to launcher bhi sath mein cock ha jata hai.

12. Khali Karna. Agar firer ko fire karne ka jarurat na ho ya sqd post trg ke dauran adesh mile bagair fire khali kar ke adesh par bayen hath ke anguthe ki madad se barrel locking lever ko dabate huye barrel ko unlock karen. Bayen hath ka angutha aur kalme wali ungli se hand guard ke pichhle hisse par pakarte huye barrel ko aage dakhele taki eject hua grenade hatheli mein aa jaye. Gren ko pouch mein band karen. Barrel ko lock karen.

Bhag III - Shist Lena Aur Bubble Sight ka Istemal Karne ka Tariqa

13. Shist lena aur bubble sight ka istemal karne ka tariqa sikhaon usse pahle sight ke hisse purjon ke naam aur kaam batana jaruri samajhta hun taki aap ko shist lena aur bubble sight ka istemal karne mein asani ho. INSAS UBGL mein do prakar ke sight diya gaya hai. Open sight aur bubble sight. Sights ke hisse purjon ko dekhne ke liye class hathiyar ke najdik sthan lo.

Open Sight

14. Open sight ke do hisse hote hai. Front open sight aur rear open sight.

(a) Front Open Sight.

(i) Fore sight tip post type hai.

(ii) Uppar niche aur dahine bayen ki correction de sakte hai.

(b) Rear Open Sight.

(i) Rear open sight ladder type hai.

(ii) Rear ladder sight par 100m, 150m, 200m, 250m, 300m aur 400m ke ank likhe hai. Raat ke waqt 100m aur 200m ke range par shist leke fire karne ke liye beta light sight diya gaya hai.

15. Rear ladder sight ke liye housing diya gaya hai. Housing ke sath nimn purjen hote hai:-

(a) Housing sight.

(b) Screw axis foresight.

(d) Pin locking lever.

(e) Screw housing ladder.

(f) Pin ladder.

(g) Spring sight ladder.

16. Rear ladder sight ko housing sight mein lever locking sight dwara lock karke rakhta hai.Rear ladder sight ko khara karne ke liye lever locking sight ko aage dhakele. Rear ladder sight khara ho jayega. Rear ladder sight ko housing mein dubara rakhne ke liye sight ko niche dabaye. Rear ladder sight lock ho jayega

17. Bubble Sight. Bubble sight ko indirect fire ke liye istemal kiya jata hai.

(a) Bubble.

(b) Tritium filled.

(d) Do posn hoti hai.

18. Ek firer kis prarkar se shist leta hai aur bubble sight ka istemal karta hai isi karwai ka namuna main UBGL par bayan ke sath dunga aap dekhen, sune aur samjhe. Kneeling posn uthayen UBGL. Kneeling posn. Abhi sikhaonga shist lene ka tariqa.

Shist Lene Ka Tariqa

19. Lever locking sight ko dabate huye rear ladder sight ko khara karen. Rear ladder sight par 100m se lekar 400m tak ki range diya gaya. Har 50m ke antaral par 100m se 300m tak range diya gaya hai. 100m se 400m tak direct fire kar sakte hai. Shist lene ke liye UBGL ko kandhe par le jaye. Tgt par shist lene ke liye aperture ke beech se foresight tip ko tgt ke POA par milayen. Is prakar butt ko kandhe par rakh kar 150m tak shist liya ja sakta hai. 150m se adhik range par shist lene ki jarurat ho to butt ko dahine bagal mein dabakar shist liya jata hai. Yeh hai direct fire ke liye shist lene ka tariqa.

Bubble Sight Ko Istemal Karne Ka Tariqa

20. Indirect fire karne ke liye bubble sight ka istemal kiya jata hai. Bubble sight se 300m aur 400m ki duri par indirect fire kiya jata hai. Bubble sight ke do posn hota hai. Jab bubble sight ki posn aage hota hai to 400m range hasil hota hai aur Jab bubble sight ki posn pichhe hota hai to 300m range hasil hota hai. Indirect fire ke liye elevated posn ekhtiyar karen. Abhi ke liye range 300m to bubble sight ko pichhe karen aur sahi angle hasil karne ke liye bubble ko dono hair line ke madhya mein karen. Range hasil hoga 300m.

Bhag IV - Fire aur misfire hone par karwai karne ka tariqa

21. Fire aur misfire hone par karwai karne ka tariqa sikhaon usse pahle trigger operation ke bare mein batana jaruri samajhta hun taki aap ko fire karne mein ashani ho. Kneeling posn. Uthayen UBGL (UBGL ko cock karen). 40mm INSAS UBGL ki trigger operation ki karwai annya hathiyaron se alag hai. Trigger ko press karne ke liye bayen hath ke anguthe se safety catch ko aage ki aur push karen sath hi trigger ko ander ki taraf dabayen. Munasib dabav aane par trigger press ho jata hai. Dekhen is prakar.

22. Ek firer kis prakar se fire aur misfire hone par karwai karta hai isi karwai ka namuna hathiyar par bayan ke sath dunga aap dekhen, sunne aur samjhe.

Fire

23. Kneeling posn uthayen UBGL. Kneeling posn. Bhar. Range milne par ladder sight ko khara karen. Abhi ke liye range 100m. Ready. Ready ke adesh par butt aur kandhe ka milap karen, bayen hath ke anguthe ko trigger ke upar le jaye aur durust shist le. Ready. Fire. Fire ke adesh par chand second ke liye sans ko roken aur durust shit lete huye trigger ko press karen sath hi tgt area par grenade ki maar ko dekhen. Yadi grenade on tgt na ho to munasib correction dekar dusra grenade fire karen. Dekhen is prakar. Fire. Is prakar ek achhi sikhlai paya hua firer ek minute mein 9 se 10 grenade fire kar sakta hai. Fire ki karwai mein kishi student ka koi sawal, sawal nahi to yahin se sikhaunga misfire hone par karwai karne ka tariqa.

Misfire

24. Unlock, lock aur ready tak ki karwai dubara karen. Fire. Sune, is prakar trigger ko press karne se grenade fire na ho ya squad post trg ke dauran adesh mile fire nahi, to pakar, shist aur trigger par dabao ko kayam rakhte huye 30 second ka waqfa de (without shouting). Dekhen is prakar. Fire nahi. Is prakar 30 second ke waqfa dene ke baad bhi grenade fire na ho ya squad post trg ke dauran adesh mile phir fire nahi ke adesh par misfire ki karwai karen. Dekhen is prakar. Phir fire nahi misfire khali kar. Check primer

report ke adesh par grenade ki primer ko check karen. Yadi primer par chot na ho to firing pin tuta hua samajhkar firing pin ki badli karwai jaye. Yadi primer per sahi chot ho to aise grenade ko misfire grenade kaheta hai. Misfire grenade ko firing posn se 10m aage aur dahine nose tgt ki taraf karte huye rakhta hai. Dekhen is prakar. Check primer report. Grenade ki primer par sahi chot aise greande ko misfire grenade kaheta hai. Misfire grenade ko firing posn se 10m aage aur dahine nose tgt ki taraf karte huye rakhe. Abhi ke liye ground sheet ke madhya rakha misfire grenade. Dusra grenade bhar, ready. Fire. Grenade on tgt, tgt barbad drill grenade khali kar. Misfire hone ke karan. Firing pin ka tut jana ya grenade ke primer par nuqs hona.

Sankshep

25. Shuru shuru ke kaam mein bandobast ki karwai pahle se kar diya gaya hain. Class ki ginti aur groupon mein bant ho jane ke baad class se student bulakar hathiyar aur saman ka nirikshan karaya gaya. Pichhle lesson se do sawal puch kar dohrai liya gaya. Pahunch sabaq sambandit batate huye uddesh ko dohraya gaya. Sabaq se sambandit saman ko kneeling posn se small pointer dwara ek ek kar ke dikhya gaya. Sabaq tarteebwar chale aur sabaq ko assani se samjhane ke liye chaar bhagon mein chalaya gaya.

Bhag - I 40mm INSAS UBGL ki firing posns.

Q. 1. 40mm INSAS UBGL se kitne firing posns se fire kiya jata hai? Ans. 5 firing posn.

Bhag - II Bharna aur Khali karna.

Q.2 Gren ko Bharne se pahle se kya karwai kiya jata hai? Ans. Gren ko body ko mulaiza aur saaf kiya jata hai.

Bhag - III Shist lena aur bubble sight ka istemal karne ka tariqa.

Q. 3. Rear sight kaunsi type ka hai? Ans. Ladder type.

Bhag - IVFire aur misfire hone par karwai karne ka tariqa .

Q.4. Misire hone ka kya karan hai? Ans. Grenade ke primer par nuqs h.

Yehan par lesson sankshep ke sath samapt hota hai. Abhi bhi pure lesson mein kisi bhi student ka koi sawal. Aapka agla lesson 40mm INSAS UBGL ke trigger mechanism ke bare mein jankari dena hai. aa Ise aap padh keayenge.

LESSON NO – 3

40 MM INSAS UBGL KE FIRING MECHANISM KI CHAL AUR SAFETY MECHANISM KE BARE MEIN JANKARI DENA HAI

Parichay

1. 40 mm INSAS UBGL ek Direct aur indirect fire karne wala hathiyar hai Isko ek jawan asani se carry aur fire kar sakta hai. Har firer iske firing mechanism ke bare mein achhi jankari rakhta ho samay parne par isse asani se istemal mein la sake aur iska pura faida utha sake. Lakin yeh tabhi sambhav hai jab ke har ek jawan ne sqd post trg ke dauran achhi sikhlai paya ho.

Uddesh

2. 40 mm INSAS UBGL ke firing mechanism aur sefaty mechanism ke bare mein jankari dena hai.

Saman

3. 40 mm INSAS UBGL, metallic board, chalk, duster, pointer, fig 11 tgt, chal ka diagram ka board aur ground sheet.

Bhagon mein Bant

4. Nimn bhagon me sikhaya jayega.

(a) Bhag –I. Firing Mechanism ki chal.

(b) Bhag –II. Sefaty mechanism ke bare mein jankari.

Bhag I – Firing mechanism ki Chal

5. Firing mechanism ke hisse purjon ke naam: -

(a) Lever locking barrel.

(b) Safety catch.

(d) Lever operating pin firing.

(e) Safety Cover.

(f) Dust Cover.

(g) Firing Pin.

(h) Sear Cocking.

(j) Cocking Arm.

(k) Plunger.

(l) Extractor.

(m) Leaf spring.

(n) Firing Pin spring.

(o) Guide firing pin spring.

(p) Returner.

Firing mechanism ki chal .

6. Safety catch Safe par. Jab sefaty catch ki posn normal halat mein hoti hai toh sefaty catch ka pichla projection trigger ke katav mein fans jata hai. Jis se trigger press nahi hota hai.

7. Safety catch Fire par.Jab safety catch ko Aage ki taraf push kiya jata hai to safety catch ka pichala projection trigger ke katav se alag ho jata hai aur trigger unlock ho jata hai.

8. Cocking ki karwai.

(a) Unlock ke dauran.

Jab ek firer barrel locking lever ko dabate hue barrel ko unlock karta hai to recoil spring, recoil housing ko aage ki taraf dhakelta hai jisse recoil housing aage ki aur harkat karta hai is harkat ke dauran recoil housing bottom surface sear cocking ke head ke uppar se gujarta hai jisse sear cocking lug fg pin ko peeche ki aur dakhelta hai jisse fg pin peeche ki harkat karte hai isi dauran retaining spring fg pin mein sikhur jata hai aur lever operating pin fg, fg pin ke age wale hisse par phans jata hai.

(b) Lock Ke Dauran. Jab barrel ko peeche karte hai toh cocking arm recoil housing ke uppar dabav dalta hai jisse recoil housing peeche ki aur harkat karte hai aur recoil spring shIkur jata hai sath hi recoil housing surface sear cocking head se peche ho jata hai jisse sear cocking ko harkat karne mein jagha mil jata hai aur launcher fire keliye taiyar hojata hai.

(c) Fg Ke Dauran Karwai. Jab firer safety catch ko aage ki aur push karke trigger ko press karta hai to trigger connecting lever ka aage wala bhag bahar ki taraf harkat

karta hai. Jis se trigger connecting lever ka piche wala bhag firing pin operating lever ke upper wale kinare par dabav dalta hai jisse firing pin operating lever aur firing pin ka milap tut jata hai retaining spring ki takat se firing pin aage harkat karta hai. Jis se firing pin apne hole se nikalkar gren ke primer par chot marta hai. Jisse Gren fire ho jata hai.

Bhag-II - Safety mechanism ke bare mein jankari

9. Jab tak safety catch ko aage ki aur push nahi karte tab tak trigger press nahi hota hai. Kyonki Safety catch ka pichla projection trigger ke katav mein fansa hota hai. Jab launcher bhar ki halat mein safety catch ko aage ki aur push karne par aur firer galti se barrel locking lever ko dabata hai to bhi barrel unlock nahi hoga Kyonki safety catch ka arm barrel locking lever ke piche wala bhag par sawar ho jata hai.

Sankshep

10. shuru mein bandobast ki karwai mere dwara check ki gai, Class ki ginti groupon mein bant kiya gaya. Hathiyar aur saman ka nirikshan class dawara kiya gaya, Dhorai pichhle lesson se karaya gaya. Uddesh ko dohraya gaya. Sabak se sambandhit saman ko pointer ki madad se dikhaya gaya. Sabak tarteeb se chale aur class ko asani se samajh mein aaye is liye sabak ko do bhagon mein sikhaya gaya.

Bhag –I. Firing mechanism ki Chal.

Q1. Jab safety catch posn normal mein hota hai to trigger press kyon nahi hota?

Ans. Jab sefaty catch ki posn normal halat mein hoti hai toh sefaty catch ka pichla tatha nichla projection trigger ke katav mein fans jata hai. Jis se trigger press nahi hota hai.

Bhag – II. Safety mechanism ke bare mein jankari.

Q2. Safety catch ka arm kis prakar se safety pradan karta hai?

Ans. Safety catch ka arm barrel locking lever ke piche wale bhag par sawar ho jata hai.

LESSON-1

RIFLE 7.62MM AK-47

1. Shuru Shuru ka Kaam

(a) Class ki ginti groupon mein bant.

(b) Hathiyar aur saman ka nirikshan.

2. Dohrai

Pichle lesson se kiya jaye.

3. Pahunch

Rif AK-47 hamari sena main Inf sec mein Rifleman No 3 ko auth kiya gaya hain. Is hathiyar ke upar UBGL ka istemal karte hue fire power ko badhaya ja sakta hain. Zaruri hain ki sena ka har ek jawan is hathiyar ke bare main jankari rakhta ho taki zarurat parne per iska istemal kar saken.

4. Uddesh

Rif 7.62mm AK-47 se waqfiat, kholna, jorna aur safai karne ka tariqa sikhana hain.

5. Saman

Rif 7.62mm AK-47, magazine, Black board, chalk, duster, ground sheet.

6. Bhagon Mein Bant

Yeh sabaq teen bhagon mein chalaya jayega:-

(a) Bhag-I- Rif 7.62mm AK-47 ki visheshtayen aur tech data

(b) Bhag-II- Rif AK-47 ko kholna, hisse purjon ke naam, kaam aur jorne ka tariqa.

(a) Bhag-I - Rif 7.62mm AK-47 ki visheshtayen aur tech data.

Visheshtayen

(i) Yeh ek automatic hathiyar hain.

(ii) Mag capacity zaida hain.

(iii) Carry karne main assan hain.

(iv) Yeh hathiyar Russia desh ka bana hua hain.

(v) Is hathiyar ko lambe range ke sath sath CQB role main bhi istemal kar sakte hain.

(vi) UBGL ko iske sath fit karke donon ko ek sath fire kar sakte hain.

(vii) Maintenance kam hain aur roken kaam parti hain.

Tech Data

(a) Calibre - 7.62mm

(b) Khali Rif ka wazan - 3.15kg

(d) Bhari mag ka wazan - 827gms

(e) Bhari Rif ka wazan - 4.6kg

(f) Bayonet ka wazan - 450gms

(g) Sling ka wazan - 180gms

(h) Rif ki lambai - 874mm

(j) Butt fold lambai - 645mm

(k) Barrel ki lambai - 414mm

(l) Sight radius - 378mm

(m) Muzzle Velocity - 715mtr/sec

(n) Grooves - 06 (RH)

(o) Rifling pitch - 235mm

(p) Sidhant - Gas operated selective fire

(q) Gas Regulator - Fixed intaketype

(r) Throw off - 2 baje ki line

(s) Compensator - 7 baje ki line

(t) Rate of fire

(i) Single shot

(ii) Burst -

- 40rds/min

100rds/min

(u) Karger range - 300mtr

(b) Bhag-II –Rif AK-47 ko kholna, hisse purjon ke naam, kaam aur jorne ka tariqa

Kholna.

(i) Mag catch ko dabate hue mag ko utaren.

(ii) Agar Rif ke sath bayonet laga hua hain toh use utaren.

(iii) Sling ko kholen.

(iv) Rif ko cock karen aur chal wale purjon ko aage jane den.

(v) Retainer ko ander ki taraf push karte hue body cover ko alag karen.

(vi) Bolt carrier ko bahar nikalen.

(vii) Gas tube locking catch ko 90 degree ke angle par khara karen aur gas tube ko bahar nikalen.

(viii) Bolt carrier se rotating bolt ko alag karen.

(ix) Agar firing pin aur extractor ko kholna ho toh Insas Rif ki tarah hi kholen.

Hisse purjon ke naam.

Body Housing, Trigger, trigger guard, hammer, bolt, operating handle, Receiver cover, safety catch, Bolt carrier.

Jorna. Agar ek se Jaida hathiyar khule hain toh regd No check kar len. Firing pin ya extractor khola gaya ho toh sabse pahle use joren. Gas tube locking catch ko 90 degree main khara karen aur gas tube ko fit karen. Gas tube locking catch ko lock karen. Bolt carrier ko len aur bolt ko joren. Bolt carrier ko body housing main dakhil karen aur receiver cover ko lagayen. Rif le ko cock karen aur trigger press karen. Mag ko len aur mag way main fit karen. Bayonet aur sling ko lagayen.

Assy se jankari

(i) Bayonet (ii) Sling

(iii) Recoil Hardner (iv) Mag pouch

(v) Oil Bottle (vi) Pull Through

(vii) Cleaning Rod (viii) Cleaning Brush

(ix) Wrench case (x) Luminous sight adopter front & rear

Wrench Case ka saman

(i) Drift (ii) Scorer (iii) Punch (iv) Bore brush

(v) Tool adjusting foresight & rear sight

Safai ka saman Safai anya hathiyaron ki tarah ki jati hain. Safai karne ke liye nimnlikhit saman ki zarurat padti hain.

(i) Cleaning rod

(ii) Cleaning Brush Chindi ka size

(iii) Chindi (a) Sukha - 4”x 2”

(iv) Pull Through (b) Oil - 4”x 1.5”

(v) Oil with oil bottle

Safai karne ke stages aur lubrication anya hathiyaron ki tarah.

Zeroing karne ki tariqa

Tgt - 4’x 4’

Range - 100m

Sight Rg - 300m

Round - 05

MPI - 28cm upar POA se

Note:- Correction sirf firesight tip per hi diya jata hain aur donon correction par galti per galti kiya jata hain.

Ek chakar 100mtr per 20cm ka farak padta hain.

Ek scriber line 100mtr per 26cm ka farak padta hain.

9 MM PISTOL

LESSON-1

9 mm PISTOL KA AAM BAYAN VISHESHTAEN AUR TECH DATA

(Ref - Infantry Training Volume I – Infantry Platoon Weapons Pamphlet No 4 Carbine Machine Pistol and Close Quarter Battle 1982)

Aam Jankari

1. 9mm Pistol CQB ka bahut achha hathiyar hai, isse nazdik niklane wale dushman ke upar jaldi se fire karke barbad kiya ja sakta hai. Zaruri hai ki ek firer jaldi se jaldi pistol ko bharna, khali karna aur fire karne ka tariqa achhi tarah janta ho taki is ka pura faida uthaya ja sake aur samay ki bachat karte hue ek goli ek dushman ka mudda hasil kiya ja sake.

Visheshtaen

2. Iski visheshtaen is parkar hain:-

(a) CQB role main istemal kiya jata hai.

(b) Carry karne main assan hai.

(d) Nazdik dushman per fire karna asan hai.

(e) Wazan kamhai.

(f) last round fire hone ke bad slide piche hi ruk jata hain.

Tech Data

3. Iska tech data is parkar sehai:-

(a) Caliber - 9mm

(b) Khali pistol ka wazan - 900gms

(d) Bhari mag ka wazan - 200gms

(e) Bhari pistol ka wazan - 1.1kg

(f) Mag capacity - 13 Rds, 12 Rds bhare jate hain

(g) Pistol ki lambai - 7.8 inch

(h) Barrel ki lambai - 4.75 inch

(i) Sight radius - 6.25 inch

(j) Muzzle velocity - 305mtr/sec

(k) Rate of fire - 06 rds/06 sec

(l) Sidhant - Short Recoil

(m) Grooves - 06 (RH)

(n) Firing Pin - Slotted type

(o) Applied safety - Safety catch

(p) Mech safety - Mag ka na laga hona, Half Vent,

Barrel aur slide ki 5mm ek sath Lock Halat mein aage aur pichhe ki harkat

(q) Trigger Pull - 5 se 8 lbs ya 2.270 se 3.630kg

(r) Fore sight - Blade type

(s) Rear sight - U type

(t) Battle crouch range - 10mtr

(u) Support ke sath range - 25mtr

(v) Fore sight blade type - 0.125”, 0.135”, 0.145”, 0.155”, 0.165”

Note:- Jab pistol aata hai toh 0.145” wala blade laga hota hai.

1 blade ki badly karne per 10mtr per ½ inch ka farak parta hai.

LESSON-2

9MM PISTOL KO KHOLNA, JORNA AUR SAFAI

(Ref - Infantry Training Volume I – Infantry Platoon Weapons Pamphlet No 4 Carbine Machine Pistol and Close Quarter Battle 1982)

Shuru Shuru ki Karwai

1. Shuru-shuru ke kaam mein nimnlikhit baton par gaur kiya jaye:-

(a) Bandobast ki karwai.

(b) Class ki ginti groupon mein bant.

Dohrai

2. Pichle lesson se liya jaye.

Pahunch

3. Pistol short recoil ke sidhant par kam karne wala ek semi automatic CQB ka hathiyar hai. Ek jawan ko iski achhi dekhbhal ke liye ise kholna, jorna aur safai karne ka tariqa ache tariqa se aana chahiye.

Uddesh

5. 9mm Pistol ko kholna, jorna aur safai karne ka tariqa sikhana hai.

Saman

6. 9mm Pistol, chindi, sutli, tel, cleaning rod aur ground sheet.

Bhagon Mein Bant

7. Yeh sabaq teen bhagon mein pura kiya jaega:-

8. (a) Bhag-I - Pistol firer ki acchi aadaten

(b) Bhag-II - Pistol ko kholna hisse purjon ke naam, Kaam aur jorna

(a) Bhag-I : Pistol firer ki acchi aadaten

(i) Pistol ko hamesha bhara hua samajna chahiye.

(ii) Pistol ko lete samay ya dete samay nirikshan karna chahiye.

(iii) Pistol ko jab tak istemal na karna ho tab tak pistol case se bahar na nikalein.

(iv) Chahe pistol khali ho ya drill carts ka istemal ho raha ho, majak mein bhi pistol ka rukh kisi admi ki taraf nahi karna chahiye.

(v) Dushman ko kabi bhi pistol ke nazdik nahi aane dena chahiye.

(b) Bhag-II : Pistol ko kholna aur jorna

(i) Kholna. Yakin karen ki pistol khali hai. Mag catch ko dabate hueye mag ko utaren. Slide ko pichhe karen aur safety catch ko slide ke aage wali jhiri mein lagayen. Dayen hath se slide locking lever ko dayen se bayen push karte huye bahar nikalen. Slide ke upar kabu rakhte huye safety catch ko jhiri se alag karen aur slide aur frame ko alag karen. Main guide spring age ki taraf push karte huye bahar nikalen. Barrel ko bahar nikalen. Is prakar se pistol char (04) bade bhagon mein khulta hai. Slide, Frame, Barrel aur Mag.

Khula hua pistol

(ii) Hisse Purjon ke Naam. Fore sight blade, slide locking thread, feed piece, firing pin, extractor, sighted for positional lug, slide locking lever, main guide spring, guide, sear connecting lever, barrel,positional lug, bullet guide, frame, pistol grip, mag way, tripping lever head, tripping lever tail, ejector, sear, sear arm,hammer,full vent, half vent.

(iii) Jorna. Barrel ko slide mein dakhil karen aur main guide spring ko joren. Slide aur frame ko milate hue joren aur safety catch ko slide ko aage wali jhiri mein fansa de, slide locking lever ko lagayen safety catch ko slide ke age wali jhiri se alag kare Slide ko aage jane den. Mag ko chadhayen aur trigger ko press karen.

(i) Cleaning rod.

(ii) Chindi.

(iii) Cleaning brush.

(iv) Sutli.

(v) Pull through.

(vi) Oil.

9mm Pistol : Safai ke liye taiyar

8. Safai ke parkar

(a) Aam Safai.

(b) Firing ke lihaj se safai.

9. Lubrication - Anya hathiron ki tarah

10. Chindi ka size

Dry - 4” x 3”

Oil - 4” x 2”

Sankshep

11. Ustad sabaq se sambandhit sawal jawab karke sankshep kare.

LESSON-3

9MM PISTOL KO BHARNA, KHALI KARNA, FIRING POSITION AUR FIRE KARNA KA TARIQA

(Ref - Infantry Training Volume I – Infantry Platoon Weapons Pamphlet No 4 Carbine Machine Pistol and Close Quarter Battle 1982)

Shuru Shuru kaKaam

1. Class ki ginti groupon mein bant karein. Hathiyar aur saman ka nirikshan karein aur bandobast ki karwai class se karwaein.

Dohrai

2. Pichle lessonse liya jaye.

Pahunch

3. Pistol CQB ka hathiyar hai. Is ko achanak aur najdik range par nikalne wale dushman par istemal kiya jata hai. Jawan ko is kabil hona chahiye ki woh pistol ko bharna, khali karna aur firing posn ikhtiyar karne mein samay zaya na kare aur dushman ko aasani se barbad kar sake.

Uddesh

4. 9mm Pistol ko bharna, Ready, makesafe aur fire karne ka tariqa sikhana hai.

Saman

5. Pistol, mag, line yard, drill carts, ground sheet aur fig 11 tgt.

Bhagon Mein Bant

6. Yeh sabaq teen bhagon mein chalaya jaega:-

(a) Bhag-I- Pistol ki mag ko bharna aur khali karna

(b) Bhag-II- Pistol ko bharna, ready, make safe aur khali karna

Bhag-I : Pistol ki Mag ka Bharna aur Khali Karna

7. Mag ko Bharna. Cartoon se amn ko nikalen aur ek ek rd ki safai karen. Agar samay kam hai toh kai sare roundon ko ek sath bhi saaf kar sakte hain. Dhyan rahe roundon ka aapas mein ragad nahi honi chahiye. Mag ko len aur nirikshan karen. Agar mag dabi ho ya tuti ho to use alag rakhen. Agar mag thik ho to saaf kiye hue rd ko len aur

ek ek karke mag mein bharen. Agar koi rd niche gir jata hai to use aakhir mein saaf karke bharen. Is prakar mag mein 13 rd aate hai aur 12 rd bhare jate hain.

8. Khali karna. Khali karne ke liye mag ko is prakar pakren ki bullet wala hissa niche ki taraf ho. Dayen hath ke anguthe ki madad se ek ek karke bahar nikalen. Rd ko saaf karen aur cartoon mein band karen.

Bhag-II : Pistol ka Bharna, Ready, Makesafe aur Khali Karna

9. Pistol ko Bharna. Agar firer ko tgt dikhai de ya trg ke dauran addesh mile ‘BHAR’ to pistol ko case se bahar nikalen, barrel ko surakshit disha mein rakhte huye mag catch ko dabayen aur khali mag ko utaren. Pouch se bhari hui mag ko len aur mulahija karte hue mag way mein dakhil karen. Yakin karen ki mag thik lag gaya hai. Pistol ko wapis case mein rakhen.

10. Ready. Agar firer fire ka irada rakhta ho ya trg ke dauran addesh mile ‘READY’ to pistol ko case se bahar nikalen, brl ko surakshit disha mein rakhtehue cock karen aur agle hukum ka intezar karen

11. Make Safe. Agar pistol ko bhari hui halat mein ek jagah se dusri jagah par le jana ho to makesafe ki karwai ko amal mein laya jata hai. Make safe karne ke liye mag catch ko dabate hue mag ko utaren, dayen turn karte hue do baar clear karen, pouch se bhari hui mag ko len aur mulahija karte huye mag way mein dakhil karen, yakin karen ki mag thik lag gaya hai, trigger ko dabayen pistol ko case mein band karen, kneeling posn ikhtiyar karen, eject hue rd ko len aur saaf karke dusre mag mein bharen.

12. Khali Karna. Hukam mile khali kar to karwai is tarah karein. Pistol ko case se nikalen, bhara hua mag utaren aur slide se pakrate huye pistol ko do baar cock karen, khali mag lagaen aur trigger ko dabaen. Pistol ko wapas pistol case mein band karein.

Bhag-III : Firing Posn aur Fire Karna ka tariqa

13. 9mm Pistol se do positions se fire kiya jata hai

(a) Battle crouch posn.

(b) Standing posn.

(a) Battle Crouch Position. Is posn ko us waqt ikhtiyar kartehain jab dushman 10m se kam duri par nikalta hai. Is posn mein bayen paon ko tgt ki sidhai mein karein, bayen ghutane mein khamb dale, dayen paon ko pura pichhe sidha karen aur body ko hip se age ki aur jhukayen. Dayen kohni ko belt ki line mein kamar ke sath lagayen aur sir ko age jhukayen. Posn aram-deh hona chahiye. Pistol wala haath zamin se samantar ho Pistol nabhi ki sidh mein hona chahiye. Yakin karein firer ki nabhi, Pistol aur dushman ek sidh mein ho. Yadi aapki goliyan tgt par upar lag rahi hon to bayen paon ke khamb ko thoda adhik karen. Yadi niche lag rahi hon toh bayen paon ke khamb ko kam karen. Agar bayen lag rahi hon toh dayen paon ko bayen karen. Yadi dayen lag rahi hon toh dayen paon ko thoda dayen karen. Agar dushman acahnak aap ke bayen ya dayen se nikal jata hai to apne aage wale paon ko pivot banakar bayen ya dayen ghum jayen. Agar dushman piche se surprise karta

hai toh pistol ko bayen kandhe se lagate hue bayen paon ka pivot banate hue pura piche ghum jayen.

Battle Crouch Position

(b) Standing Position. Yeh position tab ikhtiyar karte hain jab dushman 10m se 25m tak ki duri par ho. Jis hath se fire karna ho usi payon ko aage le jaen aur badan ko tircha karein. Baju ko sidha karein aur dusre baju ko sharir ke pichhe, kamar pe ja hath ko pocket main le jayen.

Standing position

Fire Karne ka tariqa Munasib posn ikhtiyar karen, pistol ko kalme wali ungali aur angute ke beech wale bhag se mazbooti se pakren. Shist lete hue pahla khichav ko hasil karen. Durust shist mil jane par saans par control rakhte hue dusre khichav ko bhi hasil karen. Is parkar trigger per 2.270 se 3.630 kg (5 se 8 lbs) ka dabav aane per trigger press ho jatahai aur round fire ho jatahai . Is parkar ek firer 6 rds per 6 sec main fire kar sakta hai . Agar firing ke dauran tgt area mein koi jandar chiz nikal aaye ya adesh mile ‘STOP’ to pistol ko

neeche layen aur safety catch ko lagayen aur pistol ko case mein band karen. Agar tgt area se jandar chiz hat jaye ya trg ke dauran addesh mile ‘GO ON’ pistol ko bahar nikalen, safety catch ki posn ki badly karen aur durust shisht lete hue fire ko jari karen. Yeh tha fire karne ka tariqa.

Sankshep

14. Sankshep sabaq se sambhandit sawal jawab se kiya jaye.

LESSON-4

9MM PISTOL KI CHAL AUR ROKEIN

(Ref - Infantry Training Volume I – Infantry Platoon Weapons Pamphlet No 4 Carbine Machine Pistol and Close Quarter Battle 1982)

Shuru Shuru ka Kaam

1. Class ki ginti groupon mein bant karein. Hathiyar aur saman ka nirikshan karein aur bandobast ki karwai class se karwaein.

Dohrai

2. Pichle lesson se liya jaye.

Pahunch

3. 9mm Pistol CQB ka hathiyar hai. Ek firer ko ismein puri nipunata hasil kar leni chahiye taki, larai ke dauran parne wali rokon ko asani se pehchan kar jaldi se jaldi dur kar sake aur pistol ko fire mein shamil kar sake.

Uddesh

4. 9mm Pistol ki chal, parne wali roken aur unhen door karne ka tariqa sikhana hai.

Saman

5. 9mm Pistol, magazine, drill cartridges, ground sheet, pistol case, fig 11 tgt, Black board, chalk, duster.

Bhagon Mein Bant

6. Yeh sabaq do bhagon mein chalaya jayega:-

(a) Bhag-I - 9mm Pistol ki chal.

(b) Bhag-II - Parne wali roken aur unhein dur karne ka tariqa.

Bhag-I : 9mm Pistol ki Chal.

7. Short recoil Rd fire hone se ek dhakka lagta hai jise short recoil ke naam se jante hain. Is dhakke ki madad se brl aur slide piche ki harkat karte hain. Short recoil hathiyaron mein brl aur slide kuch deri ke baad unlock ho jate hai aur piche ki harkat mein hi extract aur eject ki karwai hoti hai.

8. Pistol ki chal 2 bhago mein puri hoti hai isse samjayen aap board per bane hue chal ke diagram ki madad se.

9. Pistol ki chal mein kaam aane wale hisse purjon ke naam is prakar hain:-

Mag, tripping lever head, tripping lever tail, sear connecting lever, sear arm, hammer, hammer vent, firing pin, barrel, locking thread, slide locking races, extractor, ejector, feed piece, positional lug, sited for positional lug, Unclined surface, limiter.

Fire. Jab firer mag ko chadhata hai to mag ka agla kinara tripping lever head ke upar dabav dalta hai, jisse tripping lever tail sear connecting lever ki sidh mein aa jata hai. Jab trigger ko dabaya jata hai to tripping lever tail sear connecting lever ke agle hisse par dabav dalta hai, jisse sear connecting lever ka pichhle hissa sear arm ke upar dabav dalta hai aur hammer azad hokar firing pin retainer par chot marta hai, firing pin apne hole se nikalkar chamber wale rd ke primer par chot marta hai aur rd fire ho jata hai , Ise fire ki karwai kahte hain.

Unlock Rd fire hone se ek dhakka lagta hai jise short recoil ke naam se jante hain. Is dhakke ki madad se brl aur slide piche ki harkat karte hain. Jab brl aur slide donon ek sath lock halat mein kuchh deri ke karan peeche ki harkat karte hain to unclained surface limiter se takra kar neeche ki taraf dab jata hai aur brl locking thread tatha slide locking races ka milap tut jata hai , karwai unlock ki hoti hai.

Extract Yahan par brl ke peechhe ki harkat samapat ho jati hai lekin slide ke peeche ki harkat jari rahti hai. Is peeche ki harkat ke dauran extractor fire case ko pakar kar peeche lata hai, karwai extract ki hoti hai.

Cock Slide hammer ke pura upar se gujar jata hai aur forward lug se takrane ke karan peeche jane se ruk jata hai. Is dauran hammer vent ka milap sear ke sath ho jata hai, karwai cock ki hoti hai.

Eject Fired case ejector se takrakar ejection slot ke raste dahine aur neeche gir jata hai, karwai eject ki hoti hai.

Feed Main guide spring sikur jata hai. Jab spring apne tanav ko pura karta hai to slide ko aage dhakelta hai. Is aage ki harkat ke dauran feed piece mag ke upar wale rd ko chamber mein dakhil karta hai, karwai feed ki hoti hai.

Load Extractor round ke pende par sawar ho jata hai, karwai load ki hoti hai.

Lock Positional lug, sited for positional lug ke upar dabav dalta hai jisse brl upar ki taraf uthta hai, is dauran brl locking thread aur slide locking races ka milap ho jata hai, karwai lock ki hoti hai. Lock hone ke baad bhi brl aur slide lock halat mein kuch der tak aage ki harkat karta hai. Is dauran sear connecting lever ka agla kinara tripping lever tail ki sidh mein aa jata hai aur pistol dubara fire karne ke liye taiyar ho jata hai.

Bhag-II : Parne wali roken aur unhen door karne ka tariqa:- Bhar, ready, samne tgt, fire ke addesh per pistol fire karte karte ruk jaye toh rok ko pahchane. Pehchanne ka tariqa, kalme wali ungli ko trigger se bahar nikalen. Pistol ko bhar posn mein layen. Pistol ko bayen turn karen aur ejection slot ke raste dekhen. Dekhne se pata chala hammer pura aage slide pura aage to Misfire ki rok samajh kar dur karen. Pistol ko dayen turn karte huye cock karen, slide ko aage jane den aur fire mein shamil karen. Is prakar pistol fire karte karte ruk jaye toh kalme wali ungli ko trigger se bahar nikale pistol ko bhar posn main layen, pistol ko bayen turn karen dekhne mein aaya hammer pura peeche slide aage se thora peeche to Unfit round ki rok samajh kar dur karen. Bayen hath ki hatheli se slide par thapki lagayen, unfit rd fit ho jayega, pistol ko fire mein shamil karen. Is prakar pistol fire karte karte ruk jaye toh kalme wali ungli ko trigger se bahar nikalen pistol ko bhar posn main layen, pistol ko bayen turm karen, dekhne mein aaya hammer pura peeche slide peeche se thora aage to Body mein atke hua round ya Fire case ki rok samajh kar dur karen. Slide ko pakarte huye pistol ko cock karen, pistol ko dayen turn karte huye hilayen, body mein atka hua round neeche gir jayega, yadi nahi girta hai tab safety catch ko slide ke age wali jihiri mein lagayen lagayen aur Mag ko utarein round ya fire case niche gir jayega. Pouch se bhara hua mag lein aur nirikshan karte hue mag way mein dakhil karein aur yakin karein ki mag fit hai aur slide ko aage jane den. Pistol ko fire mein shamil karen. Is prakar pistol fire karte karte ruk jaye toh rok ko pechane. pahchane ka tariqa kalme wali ungli ko trigger se bahar nikalen pistol ko bhar posn main layen, pistol ko bayen turn karen, dekhne mein aaya hammer pura peeche slide pura peeche to Khali mag samajh kar karwai karen. Mag catch ko dabate huye khali mag ko utaren, pouch se bhari hui mag ko len, mag ka mulahija karte huye mag way mein dakhil karen, yakin karen ki mag thik lag gaya hai, slide ko aage jane den aur pistol ko fire mein shamil karen.

Abhyas

9. Abhyas ke liye addesh is parkar se honge, pistol thik fire karta ruktake adesh par aap pistol ko bhar posn mein lane tak ,ki karwai Karenge. Hammer pura aage slide pura aage toh misfire ki rok samajh kar dur karen, hammer pura peeche slide aage se thora peeche, toh unfit round ki rok samajh kar dur karen, hammer pura peeche slide peeche thora aage toh aap body mein atka hua round ya fire case ki rok samajh kar dur karen, hammer pura peeche aur slide pura peeche toh aap khali mag ki rok samajh kar karwai karenge .

Sankshep

10. Class se sabak se sambhandhit sawal aur jawab karein.

SUB MACHINE GUN MP 9

LESSON-1

SUB MACHINE GUN MP 9 KA AAM

BAYAN AUR VISHESHTAEN

Aam Jankari.

1. SMG MP-9 ek halka aur auto hathiyar hai. Is hathiyar se ek jawan kam samay mein bhari tadad mein single shot aur auto fire kar sakta hai. Yeh hathiyar CQB ki ladai, jaise ki gali gucho ki larai, personal defence, patrolling, jungle ki larai aur jahan dushman se achanak samna hone ki sambhawna ho aisi larai ke liye bahut hi upyogi mana gaya hain. Is hathiyar ki mukhya batein is prakar se hain:-

(a) Sidhant. Yeh hathiyar short recoil ke sidhant par kaam karta hai.

(b) Suraksha. Jab safety catch ko “Safed Bindu” par laga diya jata hai to woh trigger ko lock kar deta hain. Safety catch ko “Ek Lal Bindu” par karne se single shot aur “Char Lal Bindu” par karne se auto fire karta hain. Sath hi ismein teen parkar ki drop safety pradan ki gayi hai jiski wajah se is hathiyar mein accidental fire hone ka kam khatra rehta hain. MP-9 mein drop safety is parkar se hain:-

(i) Trigger safety.

(ii) Hammer safety.

(iii) Firing pin safety.

Fig No 1: MP-9 Safety catch

(c) Bharosemand. MP-9 ke sath 15, 20, 25 aur 30 round ki magazine di gayi hai jo high-strength, pardarshi aur polymer plastic ki banai gai hai taki bina rukawat ke fire kar saken aur firer magazine mein bache amn ko dekh sake. MP-9 ki barrel ko lock aur unlock system mein banaya gaya hai taki fire ke dauran suraksha mil sake.

(d) Sighton ki suvidha. Is hathiyar par fully adjustable picatinny rail diya gaya hai jis par alag-alag prakar ki sighton ko lagaya ja sakta hai.

(e) Visheshtaen. Is hathiyar ki visheshtaen is parkar hain:-

(i) Hathiyar chhota, halka aur akarshak design kiya gaya hai.

(ii) Iski body aur purje plastic ke bane huye hain.

(iii) Akhiri round fire hone ke baad bolt pichhe ruk jata hai.

(iv) Closed aur locked bolt diya gaya hai.

(v) Donon side tactical sight chadhane ki suvidha di gayi hai.

(vi) Magazine pistol grip par fit hoti hai.

(vii) Ek hath se asani se istemal kar sakte hain.

(viii) Drop safety system diya gaya hai.

Technical Data

2. MP-9 ka technical data is prakar hai.

(a) Made in : Switzerland

(b) Calibre (Qutar) : 9 mm.

(d) Grooves : 06.

(e) Sight Radius : 190 mm (Open sight).

(f) Wazan.

(i) MP-9 ka khali wazan : 1.4 kg (Bina magazine).

: 1.84 kg (30 round se bhari magazine ke sath)

(ii) Bhari magazine : 240 g (15 rounds)

: 300 g (20 rounds)

: 370 g (25 rounds)

: 440 g (30 rounds)

(g) Lambai.

(i) Folded butt ke sath : 303 mm.

(ii) Khule butt ke sath : 523 mm.

(iii) Barrel ki lambai : 130 mm.

(iv) Butt ke prakar : Fixed, folding aur angular.

(h) Open Sight.

(i) Rear : Ghost ring aperture.

(ii) Foresight : Pole type.

Fig No 2: MP-9 Open Sight

(k) Unchai. : 166 mm (Bina magazine).

: 173 mm (15 round magazine ke sath).

: 246 mm (30 round magazine ke sath).

(l) Chaudai : 45 mm (Bina butt fold kiye).

: 56 mm (stock closed).

(m) Rate of Fire : 1100 rounds/min.

(n) MRBF (mean rd between failure) : 5000 rounds (Bina ruke).

(o) Muzzle Velocity : 370 m/sec.

(p) Kargar Range. : 50 m.

(q) Chalne ka sidhant : Short Recoil.

(r) Mech Safety. : Barrel lock, unlock aur sear locking plate.

(s) Drop safety: Trigger safety, hammer safety aur firing pin safety.

(t) Applied safety : Safety catch.(Donon taraf safety catch ki

suvidha).

(u) Firing modes : Semi-automatic aur fully automatic.

Accessories

3. MP-9 ke sath nimn accessories di gayi hain:-

(a) 15 rounds magazine.

(b) 30 rounds magazine.

(d) Cleaning kit.

(e) Sound Supressor (Muzzle flash aur dhamake ko kam karta hain).

(f) RSA-S (Reflex sight aiming system).

(g) TLR-2 (Tactical laser light).

Limitations (Hadbandhiyan)

5. Is hathiyar ki nimnlikhit hadbandiyan hain:-

(a) Muzzle velocity kam hai.

(b) Kargar range kam hai.

(d) CQB ki ladai ke liye hi prayog mein laya ja sakta hai.

LESSON- 2

MP-9 KO KHOLNA, JORNA AUR SAFAI

Shuru shuru ki karwai

1. Sabaq shuru karne se pehle ustad dwara class se hathiyar aur saman ka nirikshan karaya jaye, class ki ginti aur groupon mein bant ki jaye aur bandobast ki karwai karai jaye.

Dohrai

2. MP- 9 ke aam bayan aur visheshtaon se kam se kam do sawal puchhe jayen.

Pahunch

3. MP- 9 ek chhota, halka aur auto fire karne wala hathiyar hai. Har jawan ko is hathiyar se ladai ke maidan mein achha natija hasil karne ke liye ise samay-samay par safai aur maintenance karne ki jarurat padti hai. Isliye jaroori hai ki har jawan MP-9 ko kholna, jorna aur safai karne ke tariqe ke bare mein jankari rakhta ho.

Uddesh

4. MP- 9 ko kholna, jorna aur safai karne ka tariqa sikhana hai.

Saman

5. MP- 9, oil bottle, chindi, safai ka kit aur ground sheet.

Bhagon mein bant

6. Yeh sabaq do bhagon mein sikhaya jayega:-

(a) Bhag I. : MP-9 ko kholna, hisse purjon ke naam aur jorna.

(b) Bhag II. : Safai karne ka tariqa.

BHAG-I: KHOLNA, HISSE PURJON KE NAAM AUR JORNA

7. MP- 9 ko istemal karne se pehle suraksha sambandhit hidayatein is prakar se hain :-

(a) MP- 9 ko hamesha bhara hua samjhana chahiye.

(b) Barrel ko kabhi bhi apne sathi ke taraf nahi karna chahiye.

(d) Jab tak fire na karna ho tab tak safety catch ko ‘Safe’ par rakhna chahiye.

(e) Dusre jawan se lete ya dete samay hathiyar ka nirikshan karna chahiye.

8. MP- 9 ko kholne aur jorne ka tariqa is prakar se hai:-

(a) Kholna.

(i) Yakeen karen ki safety catch ki posn ‘Safe’ par ho.

(ii) Magazine catch ko dabate hue magazine ko utarein.

(iii) Charging handle ko khinchte huye chamber ka yakeen karen khali hai.

(iv) Purzon ko age jane den aur dono taraf se latch ko neeche dabayen.

(v) Wpn ko turn karen aur detent plate aur guide rod ko push karte huye top cover ko receiver se alag karen.

(vi) Barrel guide ko andar ki taraf push karte huye upar uthayen.

(vii) Top cover se spring ko alag karen.Yadi spring guide bahar nahi aa raha ho to use bhi pichhe se push karte huye nikalen.

(viii) Charging handle ko top cover se pichhe khiche aur 90 degree mein upar ki taraf khada karen aur top cover se alag karen.

(ix) Bolt ko barrel se alag karen.

(x) Detent plate ko andar ki taraf dabate huye barrel locking pin ko thoda upar uthayen, dhyan rahe pin ko pura bahar nahi nikalna chahiye.

(xi) Barrel ko front side se apne taraf khichen aur barrel ko barrel guide se alag karen.

(b) Hisse purjon ke naam

Fig No 3 : MP-9 ke hisse

(c) Jorna. Dhyan rahe jis purze ko sabse ant mein khola gaya tha us purze ko sabse pehle jora jaye. Jorne se pehle yadi hammer azad hain to hammer ko niche dabayein. sear Locking plate ko bahar ki taraf dabayein. Yadi ek sath jyada hathiyar khole huye hain to wpn ke registration No ko milayen. Yadi akela hathiyar khula hain to karwai is prakar karen:-

(i) Sabse pehle barrel ko len aur chamber ko apne taraf karte huwe barrel guide mein samne se dakhil karen. Dhyan rahe control cam barrel locking pin ke sidh mein ho aur Locking pin ko neeche ki taraf daba dein aur yakeen karen ki barrel aur barrel guide lock ho gaya hai.

(ii) Barrel ko bolt ke andar dakhil karen aur lock karen. Dhyan rahe ki locking pin ke seedh mein spring housing ho.

(iii) Top cover mein charging handle ko fit karen, guide aur spring ko laga dein.

(iv) Eject way se kalme wali unguli ko dakhil karte hue spring ko bolt ke spring housing mein dakhil karen aur purzon ko ander aur niche ki taraf dabayen aur barrel guide ko top cover ke sath fit karen.

(v) Barrel guide ko barrel guide holder se milate huwe aur guide rode ko under ki taraf dabate huwe top cover ko reciver ke sath parallel rakhte huye ek sath dabayen.

(vi) MP-9 ko jorne ke baad cock karen aur in baton ka yakeen karein:-

(aa) Dono latches uper ho. (ab) Purze sahi fit ho.

(ac) Guide rod pura pichhe ho.

(ad) Detent plate ka spring halka sa dikhai dena chahiye.

BHAG-II : MP- 9 KO SAFAI KARNE KA TARIQA

9. MP- 9 ki life badane ke liye iski achhi tarah se dekh rekh hona jaruri hain. MP- 9 ki thik tarah se dekh rekh karne ke liye samay samay par saaf safai aur tel lagane ki jarurat parti hain. Taki woh bina rukawat ke asani se chalai ja sake. MP-9 ki safai ke liye nimn saman sath mein diya gaya hai:-

(a) Handle for bore brush (rod).

(b) Safai ka brush.

(d) Chamber brush (copper brush).

(e) Oil brush.

(f) Multi-purpose tool.

Fig No 4 : MP-9 ka safai ka saman

10. MP 9 ki safai teen prakar se ki jaati hai:-

(a) Aam safai.

(b) Firing ke lihaz se safai.

11. Aam Safai. Aam safai bhi teen charanon mein ki jati hai.

(a) Daily Safai. Yadi MP-9 ko roz istemal ke liye nikala gaya ho to istemal ke baad dhul miti ki safai kar ke kote mein rakhna chahiye.

(b) Weekly Safai. Yadi hathiyar ko kote se bahar nikalne ki jarurat na pade to MP-9 ki hafte mein ek baar safai karni chahiye ho sake to tel ki badli karni chahiyein, taki mauqa parne par MP-9 asani se fire kar sake.

(c) Monthly Safai.Yadi hathiyar ko kafi din se istemal mein nahi kiya ja raha hain to mahine mein ek bar pakka tel ki badli karna chahiye, taki tel jam kar iski life mein asar na dale.

12. Firing ke lihaz se Safai. Firing ke lihaz se safai bhi teen stage mein ki jati hai.

(a) Firing se pahle ki Safai. Firing se pahle hathiyar ki tut fut ki janch karein sath hi hathiyar ke purzon ki saf safai karein aur barrel ko sukhane ki karwai ko firing se pahle ki safai kahte hain.

(b) Firing ke dauran Safai. Firing ke dauran yadi chamber aur gas vent jyada hi ganda hota hain to safai karke dobara fire kar sakte hain.

(c) Firing ke baad ki Safai. Firing ke baad hathiyar ki achhi tarah saf safai karne ki karwai ko firing ke baad ki safai kahate hain. Is ka tariqa is prakar hain.

(i) MP-9 ko seekhe hue tarike se kholen. Barrel ki achhi tarah se safai karen. Agar hathiyar mein adhik matra mein gas fouling ho to barrel ko ubalte huye pani mein dalen aur safai karen.

Fig No 5 : MP-9 ki barrel ko copper brush se saaf karne ka tariqa

(i) Barrel guide ko multi purpose tool ki madad se saaf karen.

(ii) Barrel, bolt aur barrel guide ke hisson kosaaf karne ke baad tel lagayen.

(iii) MP-9 ko firing ke baad teen din lagatar saaf karna chahiye.

13. Mausam ke lihaz se Safai. Hamare desh ke har ilaqe ka mausam ek jaisa nahi hain. Kisi ilaqe mein jyada thand hain to kisi ilaqe mein jyada garmi. Vibhin mausam ke lihaz se kiye jane wali safai ko mausam ke lihaz se safai kehte hain. Yadi ham MP-9 ko zyada sardi wale ilaqe mein istemal kar rahe hain to barrel ke ander nami ka asar ho sakta hai. Jisse hathiyar par jaldi jang par sakta hai. Is liye is se bachane ke liye is ko mauqa milte hi samay samay par safai kar lena chahiye. Taki hathiyar ki life barkarar rahein aur superior k/oil aur OX 13 ke misran ka tel ka istemal karna chahiyein. Dhyan rahe MP-9 se fire karne se pahle ek do bar cock kar lena chahiye. Yadi MP-9 ko retile ilaqe mein istemal kar rahe hain to hawa ke karan barrel mein ret ja sakta hain aur firing ke dauran barrel bulge ho sakta hai. Isse bachne ke liye retile ilaqe mein bhi mauqa milte hi samay samay par safai kar lena chahiye aur OX 52 Oil ka istemal kar lena chahiye.

14. Lubrication.

(a) 4oC aur isse adhik tapmaan - OX52.

(b) 4o C se -18O C tak tapmaan - OX13.

(d) -40oCse -50o C tak tapmaan - Oil OX13 + Superior K/Oil 2:3.

Sankshep

15. Ustad dwara poore sabaq ka tartib wise class se sawal aur jawab se sankshep karaya jaye.

LESSON - 3

MP- 9 KO BHARNA AUR FIRE KARNE KA TARIQA

Shuru shuru ki karwai

1. Sabak shuru karne se pehle ustad dwara class se hathiyar aur saman ka nirikshan karaya jaye, class ki ginti aur groupon mein bant ki jaye aur bandobasti karwai karai jaye.

Dohrai

2. Pichhle lesson se kam se kam do sawal puchhe jayen.

Pahunch

3. MP-9short recoil ke sidhant par kaam karne wala halka aur chhota hathiyar hai. Ek firer ko is hathiyar ko sahi tariqe se istemal karne ke liye hathiyar ko kholna, jorna aur safai ka tariqa sikh lena hi kafi nahi hain balki MP-9 ko jaldi se jaldi bharna aur fire karne ka tariqa sikhana jaruri hain.

Uddesh

4. MP-9 ke magazine ko bharna, khali karna, MP-9 ko bharna aur fire karne ka tariqa sikhana hai.

Saman

5. MP-9, magazine, drill carts, fig 11 tgt aur ground sheet.

Bhagon mein bant

6. Yeh sabaq teen bhagon mein sikhaya jayega.

(a) Bhag-I: MP-9 ki magazine ko bharna aur khali karna.

(b) Bhag-II: MP-9 ko bharna, ready, make safe aur khali karna.

BHAG-I : MP-9 KE MAGAZINE KO BHARNA AUR KHALI KARNA

7. CQB ki ladai mein samay bahut ahmiyat rakhta hain aur MP-9 CQB ka hathiyar hai, isliye har jawan ko iski handling aur magazine ko bharne aur khali karne mein mahir hona chahiye. MP-9 ki magazine ko bharne ka tariqa is prakar se hai:-

Fig No-6 : MP-9 ke Carts ka Carton

(a) MP-9 ke round carton mein aate hain, ek carton mein 50 round aate hain

(b) Sabse pehle round ko lein aur chindi ya saaf kapde ki madad se ek-ek karke saaf karen aur saaf jagah par rakhen.

(c) Munasib round saaf karne ke baad magazine ko lein aur magazine ka nirikshan karen. Yadi magazine kahin se toota hua ho ya spring loose ho to aise magazine ka istemal na karen.

(d) Magazine ka lamba mehrav bahar ki taraf aur chhota mehrav apne taraf karte huye pakden.

(e) Saaf kiye huye round ko lein aur ek-ek karke magazine mein bharen. Dhyan rahe round ka primer magazine ke lambe mehrav ke diwar ke sath laga huwa ho.

(f) Yadi is prakar magazine ko bharte samay koi round gir jata hain to aise round ko ant mein dobara saaf karke bhara jaye.

8. Magazine ko khali karne ka tariqa

(a) Magazine ko lein aur magazine ka chhote mehrav niche aur bada mehrav upar ki taraf karte huye pakden.

(b) Multi purpose tool ko lein aur uski madad se ander wale round ko ander ki taraf dabayen.

(d) Khali kiye hue round ko lein aur saaf karte hue carton mein bharen.

BHAG-II: MP-9 KO BHARNA, READY, MAKE SAFE AURKHALI KARNE KA TARIQA

MP-9 Ko Bharna, Ready, Make Safe Aur Khali Karna : Jab MP-9 per khali mag chadhi ho , chamber khali ho safety catch ki posn ‘S’ per ho to MP- 9 ko khali mana jata hai. Jab bhari hui mag chadhi ho, chamber khali ho aur safety catch ki posn ‘S’ho to MP-9 ko bhara huwa mana jata hai. Jab bhari hui mag chadhi ho, chamber mein round ho aur safety catch ki posn ‘R’ ya ‘A’ per ho aur kalmi wali ungli trigger per ho to MP-9 ko ready mana jata hai.

Bhar Posn: Bhar posn ke aadesh per baye paon ko tgt ke sidh mein aline kare dhani paon ko dahine aura age kare aur MP- 9 ko dahine hath se baye hath mein is prakar pakde ki barrel 45 degree angle mein zamin ki taraf point karta hob aye hath ki pakad ftront grip per dahine hath ki pakad pistol grip per aur but dahine bagal mein daba ho.body wt dono pair per barabar ho.

Bhar Ki Karwai: Jab firer ko tgt elaike mein tgt dikhai de ya trg ke dauran aadcesh mile bhar to karwai is prakar se kare safety catch ki posn ‘S’ per kare, mag catch ko dabate huwe mag ko utare pouch mein band Karen, pouch se bhara huwa mag lein mulahija karte huwe mag way mein fit Karen yaken kare mag thik tarah se laga hai aur aur baye hath ki pakad front grip per wapas le jaye.

Ready: Jab firer ko fire karne ki jarurat hai aadesh mile ready to karwai is prakar se Karen , safety catch ki posn ‘R’ ya ‘A’ per Karen aur MP- 9 ko charge karen, butt khande ka milap karen kalmi wali ungli ko trigger per le jaye aur agle hukum ka intzar karen.

Make Safe Ki Karwai: Jab MP- 9 ko bhari halat mein ek jagah se dusri jagah per le jana ho to make safe ki karwai ko amal mein laya jata hai. Karne ka tariqa kalmi wali ungli ko trigger se alag karen but khande ka milap tode MP- 9 ko bhar posn mein laye mag catch ko dabate huye mag ko utare pouch mein band karen MP– 9 ko dahina turn karte huye do bar charge karen, durust shist leker trigger ko press karen, safety catch ki posn ko ‘S’ per karen aur pouch se bhari huwe mag len mulahija karte huwe mag way mein fit karen yakin karen mag thik lag gaya hai. Kneeling posn ikhtiyar karen eject huwe round ko len aur safai karke dusre mag mein bharen.

Khali Kar Ki Karwai: Kali kar ke aadesh per karwai Make safe ki tarah hi ki jati hai dono mein antar itna hai ki make safe ki karwai ke ant mein bhara huwa mag chadhaya jata hai aur khali kar ki karwai ke ant mein khali mag ko chadhaya jata hai.

BHAG-III : MP-9 KE FIRING POSITION AUR FIRE KARNE KA TARIQA

13. Standing Position.Yeh posn us samay istemal ki jati hain, jab dushman thora dur ho, ya aimed fire ke liye samay ho, arh 4 se 4.5 ft ki ho ya fire trench se fire karne ki jarurat pade. Is posn mein dekhne wali baten :-

(a) Bayen paon tgt ki seedh mein ho.

(b) Dahina paon dahine aur piche kad ke mutabik khule hue ho.

(d) Dahine hath ki pakar pistol grip par.

(e) Dahine kohni zamin ke samanantar ho.

Fig No-7 : MP-9 Standing Position

14. Kneeling Position. Yeh posn us samay ikhtiyar ki jati hai jab samay ho aur 2 se

2.5 ft ki arh mil rahi ho ya neeche se upar ki taraf fire karne ki zarurat pade. Is posn mein dekhne wali baten:-

(a) Bayan paon tgt ki seedh mein ho.

(b) Dahina ghutna pura dahine, body ka weight dahine paon ki edi ke upar.

(d) Baki pakar aur posn standing position ki tarah.

Fig No-8 : MP-9 Kneeling Position

15. Sitting Position. Yeh position us samay ikhtyar ki jati hai jab samay ho aur upar se neeche ki taraf fire karna ho ya dhalwandar zamin se fire karna ho. Is posn mein dekhne wali baten:-

(a) Bayan paon tgt ki seedh mein ho.

(b) Dahina paon poora dahine, body wt seat ke upar.

(d) Dono kohniyan donon ghutne ke upar.

(e) Baki position aur pakar pahle ki tarah.

Fig No-9 MP-9 Sitting Position

16. Lying Position. Jab samay ho, arh 1 ft ya usse neechi ho ya khule ilaqe se fire karne ki zarurat pare to lying posn ikhtyar ki jati hain. Is posn mein dekhne wali baten :-

(a) Badan line of fire se tirchha ho.

(b) MP-9, dahina kandha aurdahini tang ek seedh mein ho.

(d) Baya paon baye taraf ho sake dono paon ki ediyan zamin ke sath lagi huwe ho.

(e) Baki pakar anya posn ki tarah.

Fig No-10 : MP-9 Lying Position

17. Hip Position. MP- 9 mein TLR-2 ki suvidha hone ke karan hum MP-9 se hip position se align fire bhi kar sakte hain.Iski zarurat us samay padti hain jab dushman nazdik ho ya achanak nikal aye. Yeh posn banate samay badan ka khaka chhote se chhota ho aur sidhai hasil karke fire kiya jaye.

Fig No-11 : MP-9 Hip Position

18. Bhar Position.Bhar posn ke aadesh per baye paon ko tgt ke sidh mein aline kare dhani paon ko dahine aura age kare aur MP- 9 ko dahine hath se baye hath mein is prakar pakde ki barrel 45 degree angle mein zamin ki taraf point karta hob aye hath ki pakad front grip per dahine hath ki pakad pistol grip per aur but dahine bagal mein daba ho.body wt dono pair per barabar ho.

19. MP-9 ko le jane ka tariqa. MP 9 ko 3 point sling ke sath istemal kiya jata hai.

Fig No-12 : MP-9 ka Three Point Sling ke sath istemal

20. MP-9 se fire karne ka tariqa. MP-9 ko alag-alag halaton mein nikalne wale tgt par fire dalne ki kabiliyat ke anusar banaya gaya hain. Sahi posn ikhtiyar karein. Kudrati sidhai check karein. Hathiyar ko bhar aur ready karein, durust shist lein. Mazboot pakad hasil karen aur chand second sans ko roken aur trigger ko press karein. Is prakar MP-9 ke trigger par munasib dabav ane par hammer azad ho jata hai aur round fire ho jata hai. Isse do qism ka fire kiya jata hain:-

(a) Single shot.

(b) Auto fire.

21. Stop. MP-9 se fire karte-karte tgt ilaqe mein koi jandar vastu aajaye ya training ke dauran adesh mile “Stop” to karwai is prakar karein. Sabse pehle kalme wali unguli ko trigger se bahar karein. Butt aur kandhe ka milap todein. MP - 9 ko bhar position mein layein. Safety catch ki position ko ‘Safe’ par karein aur agle hukum ka intezar karen.

22. Go On. Yadi target ilaqe se jandar vastu hat jaye ya trg ke dauran adesh mile “Go On” ya “Jari Kar” to karwai is prakar karen. Safety catch ki posn ‘Safe’ se pehle wali position mein karein. Butt kandhe ka milap karein aur durust shist lete huye MP–9 ko fire mein shamil ho karein.

Note : Poori class se abhyas karaya jaye.

Sankshep.

23. Class se sawal jawab se sankshep kiya jaye.

LESSON-4

MP- 9 KI CHAL AUR ROKEN

1. Sabaq shuru karne se pehle ustad dwara class se hathiyar aur saman ka nirikshan karaya jaye, class ki ginti aur groupon mein bant ki jaye aur bandobast ki karwai karai jaye.

Dohrai

2. Pichhle lesson se kam se kam do sawal puchhe jayen.

Pahunch

3. MP-9 ek halka aur auto hathiyar hai. Is hathiyar se single shot aur auto fire lambe samay tak lagatar kiya ja sakta hai. Agar ek firer is hathiyar ka sahi maintenance karta hai aur ammunition ko sahi tariqe se saaf karke magazine mein bharta hai to firing ke dauran ismein bahut kam roken padti hain. Parantu lagatar firing ke dauran agar rok pad jaye to ek firer ko is qabil hona chahiye ki woh rokon ko samajh sake aur jaldi se jaldi unhen door kar sake. Iske liye jaroori hai ki firer MP9 ki chal aur rokon ke baare mein achhi sikhlai paya ho.

Uddesh

4. MP-9 ki chal, padne wali roken aur unhen door karne ka tariqa sikhana hain.

Saman

5. MP-9, Magazine, drill carts, ground sheet, fig 11 tgt, board, easel aur chalk duster.

Bhagon mein bant

6. Yeh sabaq do bhagon mein sikhaya jayega:

(a) Bhag I : MP-9 ki chal.

(b) Bhag II : Roken aur unhe door karne ka tariqa.

BHAG I - MP-9 KI CHAL

7. MP-9 ki chal 8 actionon mein puri hoti hai. MP-9 ki chal mein kaam ane wale hisse purjon ke naam is prakar hain.

(a) Safety catch.

(b) Trigger.

(d) Hammer ka neeche wala projection.

(e) Sear locking plate.

(f) Sear locking plate ka upar aur neeche wala projection.

(g) Feeding ramp.

(h) Ejector.

(i) Trigger bar.

(j) Disconnector.

(k) Sear.

(l) Control lever complete.

(m) Firing pin leaver

(n) Barrel.

(o) Barrel locking lug

(p) Control cam.

(q) Chamber.

(r) Barrel locking pin.

(s) Detent plate.

(t) Bolt.

(u) Feed Piece.

(v) Bolt locking lug.

(w) Bottom surface.

(x) Extractor.

(y) Firing pin.

(z) Firing pin safety plunger.

(aa) Guide.

(bb) Spring Guide.

Fig No-13 : MP-9 ki chal mein kaam aane wale hisse purje

8. MP-9 ki chal.

Fig No-14 : MP-9 ki chal ke action

(a) Fire. Jab firer safety catch ki position ko ‘Safe’ se ‘Fire’ ya ‘Auto’ par karke trigger safety ko dabata hai to trigger unlock ho jata hai. Trigger par dabav aane se trigger bar pichhe harkat karta hai aur control lever coplet pura hammer ke raste se alag ho jata hai sath hi firing pin leaver apni jagah se thoda aage aur upar ki taraf harkat karta hai aur firing pin safety plunger par dabav dalta hai jisse firing pin unlock ho jata hai. Trigger per lagatar dabav hone ke karan sear aur disconnector khul jata hai, jisse hammer azad ho kar firing pin retainer par thokar marta hai aur firing pin apne hole se nikalkar chamber mein dakhil round ke primer per chot marta hai, jisse round fire ho jata hai. Action“fire” ka hota hai.

(b) Unlock. Round fire hone se ek dhakka lgta hai jisse short recoil ke naam se jante hai ,short recoil ke dhakke ke karan bolt aur barrel dono lock halat mein piche ki harkat karte hai isi douran barrel guide mein laga huwa barrel locking pin aur control cam ki madad se barrel bayen se dahine is prakar ghumta hai ki barrel ke locking lug aur bolt locking lug ka milap tut jata hai, Action “unlock” ka hota hai.

(c) Extract. Bolt peechhe ki harkat karta hai. Is dauran extractor fire case ko pichhe lata hain. Action “extract” ka hota hain.

(d) Cock. Bolt assembly ke peechhe ki harkat ka dauran bolt ka bottom surface hammer ko poora niche daba deta hai. Is dauran hammer ke neeche bana hua projection aur sear locking plate ke neeche wale projection ka milap ho jata hai. Action “cock” ka hota hai.

(e) Eject. Bolt assembly ke lagatar pichhe ki harkat ke dauran extractor dwara laya gya fire case ejector se takra kar ejection slot ke raste dahine aur neeche gir jata hai. Action “eject” ka hota hai.

(f) Feed. Spring guide apne housing mein sikud jata hai. Spring apne tanav ko kam karne ke liye bolt assembly ko aage dhakelta hai. Is dauran bolt ke feed piece magazine ke upar wale round ko feeding ramp ki madad se chamber mein dakhil kar deta hain. Action “feed” ka hota hai.

(g) Load. Extractor chamber mein dakhil round ke pende par sawar ho jata hai. Action “load” ka hota hai.

(h) Lock. Bolt ki age ki harkat ke dauran Barrel guide mein lagi hui barrel locking pin aur barrel mein bane huye control cam ki madad se barrel dahine se bayen itna ghumta hai ki bolt locking lug aur barrel guide locking lug ka milap ho jata hai. Action “lock” ka hota hai. Bolt ki akhari harkat ke dauran bolt ka bayan aur picche wala kinara sear locking plate ke upar wale projection par bahar ki taraf dabav dalta hai jisse hammer ke niche wale projection aur sear locking plate ke niche wale projection ka milap tut jata hain aur MP-9 dobara fire ke liye taiyar ho jati hai.

BHAG-II - ROKEN AUR UNHE DUR KARNE KA TARIQA

9. MP-9 main parne wali roken.MP-9 mein nimnlikhit roken par sakti hain:-

(a) Misfire.

(b) Body mein atka hua round, fired case ya double round feed.

10. Misfire. Is prakar trigger dabane se rd fire na ho to karwai is prakar Karen:-

(a) Sabse pehle kalme wali unguli ko trigger se bahar karein aur MP-9 ko bhar position mein layein.

(b) MP-9 ko bayen turn karte hue ejection slot ke raste body aur chamber ka nirikshan karen, Dekhne main aaya bolt pura aage toh misfire ki rok samajh kar dur karen, MP-9 ko dayen turn karen aur charge karen aur MP 9 ko fire mein shamil karen.

(c) Eject huye round ko lein aur primer ko check karein. Yadi primer par chot na ho to firing pin ki badli karein. Yadi primer par chot ho toh misfire ki rok samjh kar dubara fire mein shamil karen.

11. Body mein atka hua round, fired case ya double round feed. Yadi trigger press karne se trigger press na ho toh sabse pahle rok ko pehchane:-

Fig No-15 : MP-9 ki body mein Fig No-15 : MP-9 mein

atka round ya fired case double round feed

(a) Kalme wali unguli ko trigger se bahar karein. MP-9 ko bhar position mein layein. MP-9 ko bayen turn karte hua body ka nirikshan karein. Dhekhne mein aaya

bolt piche se thoda aage toh body mein atka hua round, fired case ya double round feed ki rok samjkar karwai karein.

(b) MP-9 ko cock karein aur bolt catch ko lagayein.

(d) Body mein atka hua round, fired case ya dubble feed round bahar gir jayega.

(e) Bhari magzine ko lein aur magzine way mein fit karein. Yakin karein ki magazine fit.

(f) Bolt catch ko dabayen aur bolt ko age jane dein aur MP-9 ko fire mein shamil karein.

12. Khali Magzine. Iss prakar trigger press karne se trigger press na ho ya fire karte karte yadi bolt assembly pichhe hi ruk jaye to khali magazine ko samajhte huye karwahi karen, karne ka tariqa.

(a) Sabse pahle kalme wali unguli ko trigger se bahar nikalen aur MP- 9 ko bhar position mein layein.

(b) MP-9 ko bayen turn karte huye ejection slot ke raste body aur chamber ka nirikshan karen, Yadi dekhne mein aaya bolt pura pichhe aur chamber khali, mag khali too khali mag ko samjhte huye karwahi karen, magazine catch ko dabate huye khali magazine ko nikale aur pouch mein rakhen.

(c) Pouch se bhara hua magazine len aur nirikshan karte hue magazine way mein dakhil karen yakin karen ki magazine fit hain.

(d) Bolt catch ko dabaate huye bolt ko aage jane den.

(e) butt aur kande ka milap kren aur MP-9 ko fire mein samil karen.

13. Abhyas. Abhyas ke liye adesh is prakar honge. MP-9 thik fire karta rukta ke aadesh per aap MP 9 ko bhar posn mein lane tak ki karwai karoge. Bolt pura piche ke aadesh per khali magazine samajkar mag ki badly karenge.Bolt pura aage ke aadesh per Misfire round ki rok samaj kar karwai karenge, Bolt piche se thoda aage ke aadesh per body mein atka hua round, fire case ya double round feed ki rak samaj kar karwai karenge.

Abhyas puri class se rokon ko door karne ke tariqe par abhyas ek ek karke liya jaye.

LESSON-5

MP-9 KE SIGHTING SYSTEM SE JANKARI AUR ZEROING KA TARIQA

Shuru-shuru ki karwai

1. Sabaq shuru karne se pehle ustad dwara class se hathiyar aur saman ka nirikshan karaya jaye, class ki ginti aur groupon mein bant ki jaye aur bandobasti ki karwai karai jaye.

Dohrai

2. Pichhle lesson se kam se kam do sawal puchhe jayen.

Pahunch

3. Koi bhi hathiyar kitna bhi achha kyon na ho parantu uska sighting system us hathiyar ko aur bhi accurate aur bharoshemand banata hai. MP-9 mein bhi alag-alag prakar ka sighting system diya gaya hai. Ek firer hone ke naate har ek firer ko ise acche aur accurate tariqe se istemal karne ke liye iske sighting system ke bare mein jankari hona jaroori hai.

Uddesh

4. MP-9 ki sighting system aur anya accessories ke bare mein jankari dena hai.

Saman

5. MP-9, RSA-S, TLR-2, sound supressor, board, easel aur Marker duster.

Bhagon mein bant

6. Yeh sabaq do bhagon mein sikhaya jayega:-

(a) Bhag I : MP-9 ke sighting system se jankari.

(b) Bhag II: Anya accessories se jankari.

BHAG-I - MP-9 KI SIGHTING SYSTEM SE JANKARI

7. MP-9 ki Sighting system se jankari. MP-9 ke sighting system is prakar se diya gaya hai:-

(a) Open sight.

(i) Foresight

(ii) Rearsight

Note : Ho sake to MP-9 ko RSA-S ke sath fire karna chahiye. Open sight emergency ke liye hai.

(b) RSA-S (Reflex Sight Aiming System) ka tech data.

(i) Total weight : 112 gm.

(ii) Height : 39mm (Picatinny rail ke upar).

(iii) Height : 45.5mm.

(iv) Lambai : 64mm.

(v) Max range : 100 Mtr.

(vi) Magnification : 1x

(vii) Power supply : Do prakar ka:-Solar power (surya ki roshni se urja).

3V Lithium - ion button battery (CR 2032).

(viii) Auto off function (Agar sight ko “on” karne ke baad lagatar 4 ghante tak istemal mein na liya jaye to yeh apne aap band ho jati hain).

(ix) Manual brightness control – Red dot brightness push button dwara kam ya jyada kiya ja sakta hain.

(Note. X= short press, O= Long press)

X = On

O = Off

XO = Brightness ko badana.

XXO = Brightness ko kam karna.

XXXO = Night vision mode mein jane ke liye.

Note. Kisi bhi stithi mein suraj athawa laser kiran ki taraf RSA-S dwara sidhe na dekhen anyatha aakhon ke liye nuqshan ho sakta hain.

Fig No-16 : MP-9 RSA-S Sight

8. RSA-S ko MP-9 par mount aur dismount karne ka tariqa

(a) Sabse pehle RSA-S ko lein. Iske upar jo ek bindu hain woh age aur do bindu ko peechhe karte hue rail ke katao se RSA-S ko milaye.

(b) Uske baad sight ke aage lock button ko aage ki taraf dabate huye aur sight ko poore dahine taraf dabayen.

Fig No-17 : RSA-S ko mount aur dismount karna

(d) Sight ko lagane ke baad dono ankhon ko khula rakh kar shist liya jata hain. Ek ankh se laser dot ko aur dusri aankh se target ko dekha jata hain.

(e) Dismount ke liye is ke vipreet karwai karen.

9. MP-9 ko zero karne ka tariqa. MP-9 jab nayi issue hoti hain to yeh pehle se hi accuracy ki sabhi shartein paas hoti hain. Is liye ismein khas parivartan karne ki zarurat nahin hoti hain. Lekin, agar zarurat pade to har jawan ko iske bare mein gyan hona chhaiye. Zeroing karne ka tariqa janane se pehle jaroori hai ki ek firer ko zeroing ke waqt jaroori baton ke bare mein jankari ho.

(a) Zeroing ke waqt jaroori batein.

(i) Tuning Up - Hathiyar ko tuning up kar liya jaye.

(ii) Mausam - Zeroing ke waqt mausam saaf ho.

(iii) Rg - MP-9 ko 25 mtr se zero kiya jata hai.

(iv) Posn - Laying elbow supported position se karna

chahiye.

(v) Amn - Amn ek hi lot ka hona chahiye.

(vi) Sight - Reflex sight ka istemal kiya jana chahiye.

10. Open sight par upar/niche ki galti door karna. Front open sight par correction dene ke liye top cover ko kholna jaroori hai. Fore sight tip ko upar ya niche ki galti door karne ke liye harkat di jati hai. Agar MPI upar ban rahi ho to foresight upar yani clock wise aur agar MPI niche ban rahi ho to foresight niche yani anti clock wise ghumaya jata hain

MP-9 KI OPEN SIGHT KA ALAG-ALAG RGPAR ZEROING TABLE

Distance (mtr) Elevation(one full turn)(mm) Windage(mm)

10 36 66

15 54 99

20 72 132

25 90 165

30 108 198

50 180 330

11. Open sight par dahine/bayen ki galti door karna. Agar MPI baen ban raha ho, to back sight screw ko clockwise aur agar dahine ban raha ho to anti clock wise correction diya jata hai.

Fig No-18 : MP-9 ki open sight

Fig No-19: MP-9 RSA-S Sight

12. MPI ki sahi jagah. MP-9 ki 25 mtr rg par MPI, POA par banta hai aur ise 25 mtr rg par zero kiya jata hai. Alag-alag rg par RSA-S ka correction is prakar se hota hai:-

(a) 100 mtr par 01 click 1cm ka farak dalta hai.

(b) 25 mtr par 01 click 0.25cm ka fark dalta hai.

13. RSA-S ko zeroing karne ka tariqa. RSA-S ko zeroing karne ke liye nimn saman ki jarurat parti hain.

(a) Saman.

(i) RSA-S.

(ii) MP-9.

(iii) Amn.

(iv) Zeroing tool.

(v) Tgt (Legal size white paper jis mein 4 x 4cm ka char aiming box hona chahiye.

Fig No-20 : MP-9 Zeroing tgt

(b) Tariqa.

(i) Sabse pahle 25mtr ke doori par target ko laga lein.

(ii) Firing ke liye lying elbow supported position ko amal mein laya jaye.

(iii) Kisi ek aiming box par 3 ya 5 rds ka gp fire karen aur gp ko check karein.

(iv) Yadi gp aiming box ke ander ban raha ho to MP-9 ko sahi zero mana jata hain.

(v) Yadi gp upar/ niche ya dahine/ bayen ban raha ho to karwai is prakar karein.

14. Upar/ niche ki galti door karna. Yadi golian POA se upar lag rahi ho to screw ko ‘T’ ki disha mein aur niche lag rahi ho to ‘H’ ki disha mein screw ko ghumayen.

15. Dahine/bayen ki galti door karna. Yadi golian POA se bayen lag rahi ho to screw ko ‘R’ ki disha mein aur dahine lage rahi ho to ‘L’ ki disha mein screw ko ghumayen.

BHAG-II - ANYA ACCESSORIES SE JANKARI

16. TLR-2 ka tech data

(a) Wazan :133.8 gm with cell.

(b) Lambai :8.28 cm.

(d) Unchai :4.64 cm.

(e) Raat ke samay laser ka max range :100m.

(f) Operating temp : (-) 30oC se (+)40oC.

(g) Power supply : 2 X 3 v Lithiumion battery (CR 123A).

Fig No-21 : TLR-2

17. Suraksha sambandhit niyam. - TLR-2 ko istemal karne se pahle suraksha sambandhit niyam ke bare mein jankari honi chahiye.

(a) TLR-2 mein us battery ka hi istemal kiya jaye jo company dwara auth ki gai ho.

(b) Battery ka istemal karte samay (+) aur (–) ke nishan ko dekhna na bhulein.

(d) TLR-2 ko aag se dur rakhein.

(e) Is ka istemal training prapt jawan hi karein.

(f) Iske lens ko nange hath se na chuyein.

(g) Lens ki safai naram kapade dwara karein.

(h) Battery ko dalne ke liye unlock plate ko upar ke taraf uthayein.

Fig No-22 : MP-9 TLR-2 ke istemal ka tariqa

18. TLR-2 mein On/Off switch ke kaam.

(a) Lagatar On (Clock wise).

(b) Off (Madhya main).

19. Mode.

(a) Laser mode.

(b) LED mode.

Fig No-23 : MP-9 TLR-2 mounting bracket

20. Mount.

(a) Sabse pahle rail clamp tension bolt ko dheela karein.

Fig No-24 : MP-9 with TLR-2

(b) Adjustable portion of rail clamp ko picatinny rail ke sath milayen.

(d) Yakeen karen TLR-2 theek se baith gaya ho.

21. Dismount.

(a) Sabse pahle rail clamp tension bolt ko dheela karein.

(b) TLR-2 ko dahine dabayein aur alag karein.

22. Sound supressor se Jankari. Sound supressor ko firing ke dauran MP-9 ke barrel guide mein fit kiya jata hain. Jis ke karan flash aur awaz kam hoti hai. Supressor ke niche ek picatinny rail di gayi hai. Jis par hum laser light ko laga kar bina shist lekar durust seedhai hasil kar sakte hai.

23. Supressor ko mount karne ka tariqa.

Fig No-25 : MP-9 supressor ke sath

(a) Sabse pehle supressor ko lein aur supressor locking nut ko dheela karein.

(b) MP-9 ko 90 degree mein khada karen, dhyan rahe finger guard apni taraf ho.

(c) Supressor ko lein aur barrel guide ke upar is prakar rakhe ki supressor ka picatinny rail finger guard ke dahine 45 degree mein ho. Sound suppressor ke locking nut ko harkat dekar picathanny rail ke sidhai mein milayen.

(d) Supressor ko clock wise ghumate huye tight karein.

(e) Yakin karein supressor lock ho gaya ho.

(e) TLR-2 ko supressor ke neeche bhi laga sakte hain.

Fig No-26 : MP-9 Supressor aur TLR-2 ke sath

24. Supressor ko dismount karne ka tariqa. Dismount ke liye mount ke viparit karwai karein.

Sankshep

25. Sabaq sambandhit sawal aur jawab karke pure class se abhyas karwaya jaye.

LESSON-6

MP 9 KO ISTEMAL KARNE KA TARIKA

Shuru shuru ki karwai

1. Sabak shuru karne se pehle ustad dwara class se hathiyar aur saman ka nirikshan karaya jaye, class ki ginti aur groupon mein bant ki jaye aur bandobast ki karwai karai jaye.

Dohrai

2. MP-9 ke sighting system se kam se kam do sawal puchhe jayen.

Pahunch

3. MP-9 ek chhota, halka aur auto fire karne wala hathiyar hai. Har jawan ko is hathiyar se ladai ke maidan mein achha natija hasil karne ke liye yeh nihayati jaroori hai ki har kisi ko ise istemal karne ke tariqon se achhi tarah se wakfiyat ho.

Uddesh

4. MP-9 ko istemal karne ka tariqa sikhana hai.

Saman

5. MP-9, magazine,sighting sys,safai kit aur ground sheet.

Bhagon mein bant

6. Yeh sabaq do bhagon mein sikhaya jayega:-

(a) Bhag I. : Hathiyar ki suraksha aur istemal.

(b) Bhag II. : Kholna,safai aur jorna.

BHAG-I HATHIYAR KI SURAKSHA AUR ISTEMAL

Hathiyar ko surakshit banana.

7. Manual safety ko lagaye.

8. Mag release ko dabate huye pistol grip se mag ko neeche ki taraf khinche.

10. Charging handle ko poora piche khinche aur nirikshan kare ki koi jinda round chamber mein maujood to nahi hain.

Hathiyar ka loaded hone ka satyapan karna

10. Charging handle ko itna picche khinche ki ejection port ke jariye loaded cartridge dekha ja saken.

Bolt release ka istemal

11. Bolt ko khuli halat mein rekhna

(a) Safety ko lagaye.

(b) Mag ko utarein.

(d) Bolt catch ko upar uthayein.

(e) Bolt slide ko aage ki taraf tab tak harkat dein jab tak bolt release lever ki madad se wo apni sahi jagah par na baith jayen.

(f) Charging handle ko apni sahi sthiti mein aane dein.

12. Bolt ko band karna Bolt release lever ko tab tak neeche ki taraf le jaye jab tak bolt aage ki harkat na kar le.

13. Hathiyar ko load karna Jab bolt band halat mein ho

(a) Manual safety ko lagaye.

(b) Bhari mag ko pistol grip mein dakhil kare jab tak click ki aawaz na aajaye.

(d) Charging handle ko teji se peeche khinch kar chhod dein taki wo apni hi taquat se aage chala jaye.

(e) Hathiyar ke loaded hone ka yakin karne ke liye charging handle ko itna picche khinche ki ejection port ke jariye loaded cartridge dekha ja sake.

14. Jab bolt khuli halat mein ho

(a) Manual safety ko lagaye.

(b) Bhari mag ko pistol grip mein dakhil kare jab tak click ki aawaz na aa jaye.

(d) Charging handle ko teji se peeche khinch kar chod dein taki wo apni hi taquat se aage chala jaye.

(e) Hathiyar ke loaded hone ka yakin karne ke liye Charging handle ko itna picche khinche ki ejection port ke jariye loaded cartridge dekha ja sake.

(f) Ab MP-9 loaded hain aur safety on kane par fire ke liye taiyar hain.

15. Hathiyar ko khali karna

(a) Manual safety ko lagaye.

(b) Dahine hath ke anguthe ki madad se mag release ko dabaye aur mag ko neeche ki taraf khinch kar hathiyar se alag kare.

(d) Nirikshan karke Yakin kare ki ab koi cartridge chamber mein nahi hai.

(e) Charging handle ko chod dein taki bolt aage chala jaye.

(f) Alag huwe cartridge ko utha lein.

(g) Hathiyar ko surakshit disha mein rakhte huwe manual safety ko disengage kare aur trigger ko dabaye taki hammer aawaz ke sath chot kare ab safety ko dobara laga dein.

(h) Ab MP-9 khali hai aur cock halat mein nahi hai sath hi safety bhi lagi hai.

16. Mag ki badli karna

(a) Mag ki badli tab ki jati hain jab hathiyar bhara huwa ho aur barrel mein cartridge maujood ho.

(b) Mag release button ko dabate huwe mag ko pistol grip se neeche ki taraf khinchte huwe utarein.

(c) Ab bhare huwe mag ko pistol grip mein dakhil kare jab tak ki magazine release ke lagne se hone wali click ki aawaz na aa jaye.

(d) Mag ko thora neeche khinch kar yakin kare ki mag thik prakar se chad gaya hai.

17. Hathiyar ko reload karna

(a) Manual safety ko lagaye.

(b) Reloading ki karwahi tab ki jati hai jab hathiyar khali hone tak fire kar chukha ho aur bolt ,bolt release ki madad se khula reh jaye.

(d) Bhare huwe mag ko pistol grip mein dakhil kare jab tak ki magazine release ke lagne se hone wali click ki aawaz na aa jaye.

(e) Mag ko thora neeche khinch kar yakin kare ki mag thik prakar se chad gayi hai.

(f) Charging handle ko teji se peeche khinch kar chod dein taki wo apni hi taquat se aage chala jaye.

18. Fire ka chunao

(a) Fire selector dono taraf se harkat karne wala lever hain jiski teen position hain, unmein se ek safe halat hain ( safed bindu hathiyar ki surakshit hone ki pahchan hain).

(b) Firer fire selector ki madad se dono mein se kisi ek ka chunao karta hai

(i) Lal bindu single shot fire ke liye.

(ii) 4 lal bindu poori tarah se swachalit fire ke liye.

19. Folding stock ko istemaal karna

(a) Folding stock ko kholna

(i) Fire karne wale hath se hathiyar ko pistol grip se pakde.

(ii) Khali hath ki madad de folding stock ko lock halat se kholne ke liye khinche.

(iii) Folding stock ko tab tak lahraye jab tal wo khuli halat mein lock na ho jaye.

(iv) Yakin kare ki stock lock halat mein poori tarah na baith jaye.

(b) Folding stock ko band karna

(i) Fire karne wale hath se hathiyar ko pistol grip se pakde.

(ii) Khali hath ki madad se folding stock ko pakde aur receiver ke ant mein lage stock release knob ko majbooti se upar ki taraf uthaye.

(iii) Folding stock ko tab tak ghumaye jab tak wo poori tarah front position mein lock na ho jaye.

(iv) Yakin kare ki stock hathiyar par thik baith gaya hain.

BHAG-II KHOLNA, SAFAI AUR JORNA

20. Kholna

(a) Hathiyar par khali kar ki karwahi kare ab hathiyar khali , surakshit aur cock halat mein hai.

(b) Folding stock ko khole.

(d) Guide rod ko dabate huwe upari housing ko dheere se upar uthayein.

(e) Detent plate ko ko dabate huwe upari housing aur barrel assembly ko sedhe upar ki taraf uthaye.

(f) Halke dhakke se bolt aur barrel assembly ko top cover ke peche ki taraf le jaye aur upar uthayein.

(g) Barrel assembly ko pakde aur bolt aur barrel ko do hisso mein alag kare.

21. Safai

(a) Barrel ko saaf karne ke liye copper brush ka istemal kare.

(b) Yadi barrel guide mein atyadhik carbon jama ho jaye to use poori tarah khol kar saaf kare.

(d) Recoil spring ko guie rod se alag kare aur use bhi tel ki chindi se saaf kare.

(e) Feeding ramp ko tel ki chindi se saaf kare taki uspar koi dhool garda na rah jaye.

(f) Nylon brush ki madad se sabhi khule hisso ki safai kare aur yakin kare ki unpar koi dhool garda na bacha ho.

22. Jorna

(a) Top cover par recoil spring aur guide rod ko jorein.

(b) Barrel ko bolt mein dakhil kare.

(c) Bolt ko recoil spring ke sath rakhe aur top cover ke pichle hisse mein dakhil karein, yakin kare ki detent plate apni sahi jagah par aa jaye.

(d) Jore gaye top cover ko receiver ke uppar rakhte huwe jore aur guide rod ko andar dhakele, agar ye karwahi na ho rahi ho to check kare ki hammer cock hai (dhyan de ki hammer cock halat mein ho aur locking sear poori tarh bayein baitha ho).

(e) Charging handle ki madad se bolt ko thoda peeche khinche taki plate upar ki taraf harkat kare.

23. Poori tarah kholna

(a) Hathiyar par khali kar ki karwahi kare ab hathiyar khali, surakshit aur cock halat mein hai.

(b) Folding stock ko khole.

(d) Guide rod ko dabate huwe upari housing ko dheere se upar uthayein.

(e) Detent plate ko ko dabate huwe upari housing aur barrel assembly ko sedhe upar ki taraf uthaye.

(f) Halke dhakke se bolt aur barrel assembly ko top cover ke peche ki taraf le jaye aur upar uthayein.

(g) Barrel assembly ko pakde aur bolt aur barrel ko do hisso mein alag kare.

(h) Multi purpose tool ki madad se detent plate ko dabaye aur barrel guide se locking pin ko upar ki tarf khinch kar alag kare.

(j) Barrel guide se barrel ko aage karte huwe alag kare.

(k) Top cover se recoil spring aur guide rod ko alag kare.

(l) Charging handle ko picche ki taraf kare aur use top cover se alag kare.

24. Poora rakh rakhav

(a) Barrel ko acchi tarah saaf kare.

(b) Multi purpose tool ki madad se Barrel guide se carbon ko acchi tarah saaf kare, jin sthano par carbon ki moti parat jami ho us par oil ox-52 lagaye aur safai kare.

(d) Truti ya darar ko check karne ke liye hathiyar ko acchi tarah se nirikshan kare aur nylon brush ki madad se saaf kare. Maintenance kit mein diye gaye multipurpose tool aur copper brush ki madad se barrel guide ki safai kare , carbon ki adhik fouling ko saaf karne ke liye uspar oil OX-52 lagakar safai kare. Poori body ko tel ki chindi se pooch le.

(e) Harkat karne wale bhago par oil OX-52 ki ek ek boond dale.

25. Poori tarah se jorna

(a) Barrel ko barrel guide mein is tarah se dakhil kare taki locking pin cam control ko pakar sake.

(b) Multi purpose tool ki madad se detent plate ko dabaye aur locking pin ka chapta bhag upar ki taraf karte huwe laga de.Khali hath se barrel ko is tarah fit kare ki locking pin control cam mein aasani se dakhil ho jaye.

(b) Charging handle ko lage dein.

26. Karyakram ki janch

(a) Janch kare ki folding stock acchi tarah band hain.

(b) Janch kare ki folding stock surakshit tariqe se khul aur band ho raha hai.

(d) Khali mag ko hathiyar par laga rahne de aur charging handle ko poora picche khinch kar chod dein, yakin kare ki bolt release lever bolt ko pakad kar rakh sakta hai.

(e) Bayein wale mag release button ko dabaye, ab mag dhila ho jana chahiye.

(f) Mag ko wapas chada dein aur ab dahine wale mag release button ko dabaye, ab mag dhila ho jana chahiye.

(g) Mag ko utare aur bolt release ko dabaye ab bolt ko aage ki harkat karni chahiye.

(h) Selector ko surakshit halat par karte huwe trigger ko dabaye, hammer azad nahi hona cahiye.

(j) Fire selector ko single shot par karte huwe trigger ko dabaye , hammer ke takrane ki aawaz aayegi.

(k) Trigger par dabav kayam rakhte huwe charging handle ko poora picche khinche aur chhod de , trigger ko chhode aur dobara dabaye , hammer ke takrane ki aawaz aani chahiye.

(l) Fire selector ko poori tarah swachalit halat par kare. Charging handle ko picche ki taraf khinche aur kabu paate huwe aage jane de, ab trigger ko dabaye, hammer ke chot ki aawaz aani chahiye.

(m) Trigger par dabav kayam rakhte huwe charging handle ko picche ki taraf khinche aur chhod de, jaise hi bolt poora aage baith jata hai usi samay hammer ke chot marne ki aawaz bhi aani chahiye.

(n) Sisht lene wale purjo ka nirikshan kare.

(o) Agar in kiriyao mein se kisi ka satyapan nahi hota to hathiyar ko dobara khole aur sahi tarique se nirikshan karke jorne ki karwahi kare, koi kami milne par uski purti kare.

27. Truti 1- Hammer ke chot marne par fire na hona : upay

(a) Sahara dene wale hath ki hatheli se mag ke nichle hisse par thapki mare.

(b) Charging handle ko poora peeche khinche aur teji se aage jane dein.

28. Truti 2- Trigger dabane par bhi Hammer dawara chot na karna : upay

(a) Mag ko utare aur baad mein nirikshan kare.

(b) Charging handle ko piche khinche aur chamber ka nirikshan karke check kare ki usmein koi cartridge ya case to maujood nahi hai.

(d) Mag ko neeche ki taraf khinch kar yakin kar ke ki mag thik prakar se baith gaya hain.

(e) Charging handle ko picche kinche aur bolt ko apni hi taquat se aage jakar lagne de dhyan dein : carbon ke atyadhik jama hone se bolt jam ho sakta hain , chote gol ched mein koi catridge ya case rakhkar bolt ko dhakka dekar khola ja sakta hain.

Sankshep

29. Class se sabaq sambandhit sawal aur jawab karke kiya jaye.

No 36 HAND GRENADE AUR TRIP FLARE

LESSON-1

No 36 HAND GRENADE KI PEHCHAN, CHAL, VISHESHTAEN AUR ISTEMAL

(Ref - Infantry Training Volume-I Infantry Platoon Weapons Pamphlet No 7 Grenade All Arms 2006)

1. Prakar. No 36 Hand Grenade istemal ke lihaj se teen prakar ke hote hain:-

(a) Drill Grenade.

(b) Instructional Grenade.

2. Pehchan aur Istemal.

(a) Drill Grenade. Yeh grenade sikhlai ke dauran istemal kiya jata hai. Is ki body par safed rang ki line aur 5 surakh hote hai. Wajan ko pura karne ke liye is ke andar ret bhari hoti hain.

(b) Instructional Grenade. Yeh grenade ke purjon ki jankari dene ke kam ata hai. Is ki body par jinda grenade ki tarah rang kiya hota hai lekin is par lal nishan nahi hote aur body ka ¼ hissa kata hota hain.

(c) Live Grenade. Yeh jaan se maar dalne wala grenade hai. Iske body ka rang gahra bhura hota hai. Is ke upar hare rang ki dhari aur lal rang ke cross hote hai. Rat ke samay grenade ko is ki body par bani jhirion ki madad se pehchana ja sakta hain.

(3) Vishestayein. Yeh grenade jaan se maar dalne wala grenade hai. Yeh phatne ki jagah se 8 mtr charon taraf maar dalne ki shamta rakhta hai. Is grenade ko us jagah istemal kiya jata hai jahan par chapti trajectory wale hathiyar kargar nahi hote jaise:-

(d) Morchon, makanon ke andar, tutifuti zamin, raat ke samay, hamle ke akhir mein dushman ke khilaf, agar tank turret khula ho to us mein phenk kar crew ko kafi nuksan pahunchaya ja sakta hai. Is ke alawa booby traps ke lie bhi istemal kiya jata hai. Yad rahe agar ilaqa maidani hai to grenade phenkne se pahle yakin kar lena chahiye ki apne jawan aarh ke piche ya lying posn mein hain.

(e) Grenade ki body dhale lohe ki bani hoti hai. Is ki body par jhiriyan kati hoti hai jo grenade ko puri tarah tukre hone mein madad deti hai. Grenade mein HE barud bhara hota hain. Is ke andar do nalian hoti hain. Beech wali striker aur spring ke liye aur dusri detonator ke liye. Striker aur spring ko lever ke jariye apni jagah kayam rakha jata hai jo ki striker ki kati hui jhiri mein laga hota hain.

(f) Lever ko kabu mein rakhne ke liye ek safety pin hota hai jise lever ke upar se aur grenade ke kandho mein bane hue surakhon mein se nikalkar lagaya jata hai.

2. Technical Data.

(a) Wt - 700gms

(b) Explosive - 100 gms

(d) Danger Area - 274.3 mtr

(e) Ignitor set - 4 sec delay

5. Prime se pahle ki taiyari. Grenade ko istemal karne se pehle mulahija, safai aur achhi tarah striker spring ka test kar lena chahiye taki is baat ka yakin ho jaye ki yeh mauke par thik kam karega.

(a) Mulahija. Grenade ko hath mein lein. Is baat ka yakin karein ki lever striker ki jhiri mein acchi tarah laga huwa hai aur body se jyada bahar ki taraf to nahi nikla hai. Agar nikla hai toh daba diya jai. Is baat ka bhi yakin karein ki grenade ke body aur kandhe tute hue to nahi hai aur safety pin aur ring thik laga hai.

(b) Kholna. ‘Amn Key 19 B’ ki madad se base plug ko kholen, lever ko unglion ke niche kabu mein rakhte hue safety pin ko nikalo. Grenade ke khule hisson ko boot ke toe par rakhte hue lever ko ahista se azad kar do aur striker aur spring ko bahar nikalo.

(c) Safai.Grenade mein aam taur par grease lagi hoti hai, istemal se pahle ise achhi tarah se saaf kar lena chahiye. Striker sleave ko kapre se achi tarah saaf kar lena chahiye. Isse yeh faida hoga ki striker aur spring apni sleeve mein thik kaam karenge.

(d) Striker test se pehle jorna. Striker aur spring ko beech wali sleeve mein is prakar rakho ki striker ki jhiri grenade ke kandho ki taraf ho. Striker ko kisi nokdar cheez ki madad se upar ki taraf dhakelein aur lever striker ki jhiri mein lagakar jor se niche dabate hue kabu mein rakho.

(e) Striker test.Grenade ke khule sire ko boot par rakhte hue lever ko azad kar do. Yakin karo ki striker pure jor se niche aata hai. Agar aisa na ho, to jahir hai ki safai achhi tarah nahi ki gai hai. Dobara safai karo aur striker test karo agar phir bhi kam na kare to koi nuks ho sakta hai. Aise grenade ka istemal na karein.

(f) Purjon ko antim bar jorna. Striker test ki karwai tak Grened ko joren. Ab lever ko unglion ke niche kabu mein rakhte hue sath hi filling screw ko apni taraf rakhte hue safety pin ko is tarah lagaen ki jo jawan grenade ko dahine hath se fekne wala ho who safety pin ko dayen se bayen aur bayen hath se fekne wala hai woh bayen se dayen lagaega. Uske bad safety pin ki nokon ko thora sa khol do. Jyada kholne sesafety pin ko nikalna kathin hoga. Akhir mein base plug ko jor do.

6. Ignitor Set. Ignitor set grenade ko phatane ke liye istemal kiya jata hai. Is ke hisse purje, cap chamber jis ke uper .22 cap lagi hai, fuze aur detonator ko bari sawdhani se pakarna chahiye. Ise hamesha fuze aur cap chamber se pakro. Ise kisi kism ki chot mat lagne do aur na hi hath mein pakar kar masalna chahiye. Ise garmi aur nami se bachana chahiye. Iske hisse purzon ko alag kasne ki koshish na karen.

(a) Pehchan. Ignitor set do prakar ke hote hain:-

(i) 4 sec Fuze. 4 sec wale detonator ka safed colour aur iske upar hisse par 4ring hote hai.

(ii) 7 sec Fuze. 7 sec wala detonator plain (sada) hota hai.

(b) Nirikshan. Dekho ki .22 cap ke bich wala surakh upar se thik tarah band hai ya nahi. Jaruri hai ki cap chamber mein kisi kism ka nuks nahi hona chahiye.Yeh bhi dekho ki cap chamber aur detonator fuze ek sath thik majbooti se lage hue hain.

7. Prime aur Unprime

(a) Prime. Grenade ko prime karne ke lie base plug ko kholo. Detonator sleeve ka mulahija karo ki usme koi rukawat to nahi hai. Is ke bad ignitor set ko anguthe aur ungli se cap chamber se pakarte hue detonator ko detonator sleeve mein aur cap chamber ko centre sleeve men asani se dakhil karen. Agar detonator sleeve main dakhil na ho raha ho toh jabardasti na karen. Is kism ke ignitor set ko istemal na kiya jae. Is ke bad base plug ko ‘Amn key 19 B’ ki madad se tight karen.

(b) Unprime. Unprime karne ke liye base plug ko kholen, ignitor set ko savdhani se nikalen aur box mein band karen. Base plug laga den.

8. Chal. Jab pin ko nikal kar grenade ko hawa main phenk diya jata hai toh lever azad ho jata hain, lever ke azad hone se striker spring ki madad se kafi jor se niche dabta hai jisse striker ka lug .22 cap par chot marta hai jismein aag paida hoti hai. Yeh aag chamber mein bane hue surakh se hokar fuze mein dakhil hoti hai fuze apne samay mein jalkar detonator ko aag deta hai aur detonator dhamake se phat jata hai. Detonator sleeve tut jati hai jisse grenade main bhare high explosive barud main aag lag jati hain aur grenade puri takat se phat jata hain aur 8 mtr charon taraf aane wale target ko barbad kar deta hain aur

274.3 mtr area tak nukshan paunch sakta hain.

9. Packing. Ek container mein 4 H2A box hote hain. Ek box mein 10 grenade aur 10 ignitor sets ka dibba hota hai aur ek base plug key hoti hai. Baki Rif gren bhi ek H2A box main 10 grenade aur 10 ignitor sets,10 arming ring, 10 tube launching aur 12 HD cartridge hote hain aur ek base plug key hoti hai.

LESSON-2

NO 36 HAND GRENADE KO THROWING AUR LOBBYING

(Ref - Infantry Training Volume-I Infantry Platoon Weapons Pamphlet No 7 Grenade All Arms 2006)

1. Ready aur Throw Karna

(a) Ready. Ustad bayan wale line mein aur aage ho. Ustad apne liye aur sqd ke liye tgt bataye. Ready ke hukam par grenade ko uthao ya pouch se nikalo aur dayen hath mein is tarah pakro ke lever hatheli ki taraf dabaya hua rahe. Bayen hath ki pahli ya dusri ungli safety pin ke ring mein dalo aur grenade ko badan ke saman rakhte hue badan ke dayen taraf itne turn karo ki bayan paon tgt ki sidh mein aae jae. Agar koi jawan bayen hath se grenade fekne wala ho toh is ke ulta karwai karen.

(b) Throwing. Grenade ko badan ke samne rakhte hue pin ko nikalen aur pouch main rakhen. Bayen hath ko aage ki taraf aur dayen hath ko piche kitaraf rakhte hue bajuo ko swing den. Dhyan rahe ki grenade ko us waqt fekna chahiye jab dayen kandhe ka mans kaan ke sath touch ho aur badan ko aage ke taraf karte hue gren ko golai dekar faken.Dekhe ki grenade kahan par gir raha hain aur sath hi lying posn ikhtiyar karen.

2. High wire ka istemal

(a) Grenade ko golai dekar phekne ka abhyas dene ke liye high wire ka istemal kiya jata hai. Yeh zamin se 18 feet unchi honi chahiye. Ismen 3 feet tak ki chaurai (jali) shamil hai. Jali ka niche wala hissa zamin se 15 feet hota hain. High wire ke age 10 mtr par ek gaddha hota hain jiska chaurai 3 feet charon taraf aur 21/2 feet gahrai hoti hain.Highwire ke pichhe 15 mtr aur 25 mtr par throwing line banana chahiye. Ek jawan grenade ko 25 mtr se 35 mtr tak fenk sakta hain.

HIGH WIRE

(b) Namuna. Ustad ek bar high wire ke upar se grenade phenkne ka namuna de aur class dekhe.

(c) Abhyas. Ustad ke niche high wire par grenade phankne ka groupon mein abhyas kare. Ek gp high wire ka istemal karen aur dusra bagair high wire ke abhyas karen.

3. Lobbying karna.

(a) Bayan. Gali kuchon ya jangal ki ilaqe men yeh jaruri hoga ki teji se grenade ko makan, khirki ya darwaje se dala jae ya ghani jharidar jagah men chhora jae.

(b) Namuna. Jawanon ko alag alag kai halaton men grenade fenk ne ka namuna de.

LESSON PLAN

1. Shuru Shuru Ka Kaam. Class ki ginti groupon mein bant, Hathiyar saman ka nirikshan bandobast ki karwai.

2. Dohrai. Pichle sabaq se.

3. Pahunch. Pahunch chhota saf aur sabak se sambandhit ho.

4. Uddesh. No 36 Hand grenade ko throwing aur lobbying karne ka tarika sikhana hai (Dohraya jaega).

5. Saman. No 36 hand grenade, fig 11 tgt, sand bag, tar ki jali aur do pole 18’ ke.

6. Bhagon Mein Bant

(a) Bhag I. Ready aur Throw karna.

(b) Bhag II. High Wire ka Istemal.

7. Bhag I : Ready aur Throw Karna. Namuna bayan ke sath diya jaega aur class sath nakal karegi. Class ka abhyas karaya jaega.

8. Bhag II : High Wire ka istemal. Namuna bayan ke sath diya jaega aur class sath nakal karegi. Class ka abhyas karaya jaega.

9. Bhag III : Lobbying Karna. Lobbying karne ke tarike ka namuna bayan ke sath diya jayega aur class sath nakal karegi. Class ka abhyas karaya jayega.

10. Sankshep. Sawal aur jawab se kiya jaye.

LESSON-3

RIF GRENADE KI PEHCHAN, VISHESHTAEN AUR ISTEMAL

(Ref- Infantry Training Volume-I Infantry Platoon Weapons Pamphlet No 7 Grenade All Arms 2006)

1. Pehchan. Rif grenade ka body ka rang gahra bhura hota hai aur iske gird hare rang ki dhari aur lal rang ke cross hote hai. Raat ke samay grenade ko iski body par bani hui dhariyon ki sahayta se pehchana ja sakta hai.

2. Visheshtayen.

(a) Yeh grenade janse mar dalne wala grenade hai. Phatne ki jagah se 8 mtr charon taraf mar dalta hai aur 274.3 mtr charo taraf jakhmi kar dene ki shakti rakta hai. Is grenade ko us jagah istemal kiya jata hai jahan chapti trajectory wale hathiyar kargar nahi hote hai, jaise morchon, makan aur tuti futi zamin mein.

(b) Is ki body cost Iron ki bani hai aur iski body par jhiriyan kati hoti hai, joki grenade ko puri tarah tukre-tukre hone mein madad deti hai. Grenade mein HE yani dhamake se phatne wala barud bhara hota hai. Is ke andar do naliyan hoti hai. Bich wali striker aur spring ke lie, aur dusri detonators ke lie hoti hai. Striker aur spring ko lever apni jagah kayam rakhta hai, jo ki striker ki kati hui jhiri mein laga hota hai.

(i) Grenade - 700gms

(ii) Arming Ring - 33gms

(iii) Tube Launching Mk-I ka wazan - 127gms

(iv) Tube Launching Mk-I ki lambai - 15 cm

(d) INSAS Rif grenade ke fire karne ke lie tube launching Mk-I ki jarurat parti hai. Grenade fire karne ke lie HD cartridge ki zarurat hoti hai.

3. Tube Launching Mk-I se waqfiat. Tube launching Mk-I ek khokhli nali ki shakal ka hai jo ek taraf se khula aur dusri taraf se band hain. Band wale sire par stud lagaya gaya hai, jismen churiyan bani hain. Stud ke jariye yeh tube grenade ke base plug ke surakh mein kas di jati hain. Khule sire ke jariye tube ko flash eliminator ke upar charaya jata hain.Is tube launching ka rang OG aur iski lambai 15 cm aur wazan 127 gm hain.Tube par do surakh diye gye hain jismen range control pin lagaye gaye hain. Rif grenade ko fire karne ke liye grenade mein ek arming ring charaya jata hain jo lever ko apni jagah par rok kar rokhta hain, airming ring ka wajan 33 gm hota hai.

4. Tube Launching Mk-I ki visheshtayen. Is tube se ham Rif grenade ko 50, 100 aur 150 mtr tak fire kar sakte hain. Jab donon control pin lage hue grenade fire karen to range 50 mtr milta hain. Yeh kam se kam range hain. 100 mtr ka range hasil karne ke liye niche wali pin ko nikalna jaruri hain. 150 mtr ka range hasil karne ke liye donon pinon ka nikalna jaruri hain.

5. Grenade ko fire ke liye taiyar karna.Grenade ko taiyar karne ke hukam par sikhe huye tariqe se grenade ko saaf karen. Grenade ko saaf karne ke baad grenade ko bayen hath mein pakden arming ring ko grenade ke niche wale sire se lever ke upar hath rakhte hue grenade par dakhil karen. Donon hath ki madad se arming ring ko itna upar khiche ki ring grenade ke bich wale katav mein baith jaye. Dekhne ki bat arming ring ka katav lever ke vipreet disha mein ho. Ab grenade mein 7 sec wala fuze lagakar prime karen aur base plug ko kas den. Akhir mein tube ko lagaen.Ab grenade fire ke liye taiyar hai.

6. Rif ko fire ke liye taiyar karna. Rif ka nirikshan karen. Mag ko utaren, grenade sight ko 90 degree par khara karen. Rif ko cock karen, HOD lagayen, HD cartridge chamber mein dakhil karen. Chal wale purje age jane den aur safety catch ki posn ‘S’ par karen.

7. Grenade bharne ka hukam. Taiyar kiye huye grenade ka nirikshan karen. Tube launching ko flash eliminator par dakhil karen, yakin karen ki tube launching sahi tariqe se lag gaya hai. Range milne par sikhe hue tariqe se range lagayen aur Safety pin ko nikalen aur firing posn ikhtiyar karen. Safety catch ko ‘R‘ par karen aur trigger ko press karen. Agar cartridge misfire ho jaye to sikhe huye tariqe se cartridge ki badli karen.

8. Chal Trigger ko dabane se cartridge fire hota hain jisse gas paida hoti hai jo ki tube launching ko flash eliminator se alag kar deti hai. Udan ke dauran chand second baad arming ring set back ke dhakke se gir jata hain aur lever azad ho jata hain. Baki chal hand grenade ki tarah hain.

9. Bina Fire Khali karna. Agar grenade ko fire karne ki zarurat na ho to karwai is prakar ki jati hain :-

(a) Safety catch ‘S‘ par.

(b) Safty Pin lagayen.

(d) Range control pin ko lagayen.

(e) Rif ko khali karen aur HD cartridge ko saaf karke cartoon mei band karen.

10. Unprime Karna. Jis prakar se hand grenade ko unprime kiya jata hai usi tarah Rif grenade ko bhi unprime kiya jata hai.

Note.

(a) Base plug aur tube launching thik se kasa hona chahiye.

(b) Arming ring lagaya huwa ho.

LESSON-4

NO 77, 80, 83, 90 GRENADE AUR BICAT STRIP

(Ref- Infantry Training Volume-I Infantry Platoon Weapons Pamphlet No 7 Grenade All Arms 2006)

1. Aam Bayan.Sabhi prakar ke grenade ka istemal larai ke maidan mein hone wale shor-gul ke anukaran karne tatha dhuna paida karne ke liye kiya jata hai. Aam taur par ise sikhlai ke dauran istemal karte hain. Parantu jarurat parne par larai ke maidan me bhi iska prayog kar sakte hain. Sabhi prakar ke grenade ki visheshtaen tatha istemal karne ka tarika niche diya gaya hai.

Grenade No 77

2. Visheshtayen. Yeh grenade dhuwen ka parda banane ke alawa aag lagane ke kam men prayog hota hai. Is ke andar safed phosphorus bhara hota hai. Kisi bhi chiz se takrane par yeh phatta hai aur 30 sec tak dhuwan deta hai. Is ka rang hara aur wajan ¾ pound hota hai. Ismein No 62 detonator hota hai. Ek box mein 34 grenade pack hokar ate hai.

3. Prime Karna.

(a) Dhakkan ko kholein (dhyan rahe safety cap alag na ho).

(b) Detonator ka khali bhag upar ki taraf karke, detonator sleeve mein dalein.

4. Unprime Karna. Prime ke ulat rup mein karwai karo.

5. Chal.Safety cap ko nikal kar grenade ko phenk diya jata hai to wajan ke karan feeta khul jata hai. Safety bolt striker ke chhed se nikal jata hai. Striker .22 cap par thokar marta hain jisse shola paida hota hain jo detonator ko aag laga deta hain. Ab detonator phat kar grenade ki body ko faad deta hai aur ismen bhara phosphorus hawa ke sath mil kar dhuwan paida karta hai.

6. Istemal (Phekna).Safety cap ko nikalte samay feeta na niklane paye. Khud position lekar grenade ko golai mein phenkein. Dhyan rahe ki grenade ko najdik na phenkein. Iska khatarnak ilaqa fatne ki jagah se 15 mtr charon taraf hai.

Grenade No 80

7. Visheshtayen.Yeh grenade bhi dhuwa aur aag paida karta hai. Iske andar safed phosphorus bhara hota hai. Wajan 1¼ pound aur khatarnak ilaka 15 gaz charon aur hai. Iska dhuwan dene ka samay 30 se 40 sec hai. Ek box mein 24 band hokar ate hain.

8. Prime karna.

(a) Grenade ka mulahija karo.

(b) Mechanism holder ko kholo.

(d) Mechanism holder ko band karo.

9. Unprime karna. Prime ke ulat karwai karo.

10. Chal. Safety pin ko nikal kar grenade ko chhod diya jata hai to mechanism holder ajad ho jata hai. Spring ki madad se lever upar uth jata hai aur striker .22 cap par thokar marta hai. Jisse aag ki chingari paida hoti hai jo fuze ko jala deti hai. Detonator phat jata hai aur iska safed phosphorus hawa ke sath milkar dhuan dena shuru karta hai.

11. Fenkna. Lever par kabu pate hue safety pin nikalo. Posn lekar grenade ko golai mein phenko. Is ka khatarnak ilaka 15 gaz charon taraf hai.

Grenade No 83

12. Visheshtayen. Yeh dhuan dene ke alawa signal dene ke kam mein laya jata hai kyonki yeh char alag-alag rangon ka dhuan deta hai (lal, hara, peela aur neela). Iska wajan 1 pound aur yeh 25 se 45 sec tak dhuwa deta hai. Iski body par dhuwen ka rang likha rahta hai. Ek box mein 24 pack hokar ate hain.

13. Chal. Jab pin ko nikal kar ise phenk diya jata hai to lever alag ho jata hai. Striker spring ki takat se .22 cap par chot marta hai. Jisse chingari paida hoti hai jo fuze ko jala kar malmal ki plate ko jala deta hai aur grenade dhuan dena shuru karta hai.

14. Phekna. Phekne ke liye karwai No 36 grenade ya No 80 grenade ki tarah hai.

Grenade No 90

15. Visheshtayen. Larai mein hone wale shor-gul ka anukaran karne ke liye is grenade ka istemal hota hai. Is ki awaj No 36 hand grenade ya 2” mor HE Bomb ke jaisi hoti hai. Is ka diameter 1¾”, lambai 8” aur ismen fuze No 11 istemal hota hai. Fuze ka ek sira sling compound se band hota hai dusra sira ignitor assembly mein hota hai jiske andar 12 gm cracker mixture barud bhar kar kagaj ki thaili mein band rahta hai aur ise sut ya tar se lapeta hota hai. Ek box men 16 grenade ate hain. Fuze ke jalne ke 9 se 15 sec bad fatta hai.

16. Phekna

(a) Tej chaku ya blade se fuze ko compound (sealing) ke pas se tirchhe rukh kato.

(b) Kate hue kinare mein aag lagao aur fuze ke jalne ka shak hone par phenko.

17. Suraksha

(a) Safety fuze ko body se jitna ho sake door karo.

(b) Mitti ke tel ki bati ka prayog na karo.

(d) Kharab fuze wale grenade ka istemal na karo.

(e) Grenade agar thik kam na kare aur fuze asli halat mein ho (jalne ke bad) to 5 min ke bad phir jalaya ja sakta hai.

Bicat Strip

18. Visheshtayen

(a) Training ke dauran small arms fire ki awaz ko Jahir karne ke liye bicat strip ka istemal kiya jata hai.

(b) Cracker. Cracker mixture aur sukhi mitti ko ek kagaj ki thaili mein dalkar banaya jata hain. Ismen 4 se 6 sec wala fuze fit hota hain. Cracker fuze ka dusra kinara safety fuze ke bich surakh banakar dala jata hain aur tar ya dhage se bandh diya jata hain. Fuze ke kinaro ko sealing compound dwara band kar diya jata hain. Cracker ko chipakne wale feete se lapet diya jata hai, ek cracker ke andar 10 gm barud hota hai.

19. Istemal

(a) Tej chakoo se cracker ko tirche rukh kato.

(b) Kinare par safety match se jalao, jalne par turant phenko.

20. Hifajat. Bache huye strip ko box men band karo aur chipakne wala feete se seal kar den.

LESSON-5

TRIP FLARE SE WAQFIAT AUR ISTEMAL KAREN KA TARIQA

(Ref - Infantry Training Volume-I Infantry Platoon Weapons Pamphlet No 7 Grenade All Arms 2006)

Shuru Shuru ka Kaam

1. Class ki ginti aur groupon mein bant.

2. Hathiyar aur saman ka nirikshan.

3. Bandobast ki karwai.

Dohrai

4. Pichle lesson se kiya jaye.

Pahunch

3. Dushman raat ke waqt andhere ka faida uthakar hamare nazdik se nazdik aakar hamari khabar hasil kar sakta hain. Isliye raat ke waqt dushman ke aane ki khabar malum karna aur uske upar aimed firekarne ke liye trip flaresabse accha sadhan hain jo ki dushman ke dwara chalwaya jata hai aur dushman ko iske bare mei andesha na ho.

Uddesh

4. Trip flare se waqfiyat aur istemal karne ka tariqa sikhana hai.

Saman

5. Flare pot, picket, wire spool, spring arm, ground sheet, Black board, chalk, duster.

6. Bhagon Mein Bant

Yeh sabaq char bhagon mein sikhaya jayega:-

(a) Bhag-I- Trip flare ki vishestayen aur tech data.

(b) Bhag-II- Hissonke naam,kaam, chal aur misfire per karwai.

(a) Bhag-I - Trip flare ki vishestayen aur tech data

Visheshtayen

(i) Yeh ek silence sentry ka kaam karta hai.

(ii) Ek jawan isko assani se laga sakta hai.

(iii) Fatne ki jagah se 3 mtr ke ilaqe ko roshan karta hai.

(iv) Isko dushman ke dwara chalaya jata hai.

Tech Data

(a) Wazan - 255.1gm

(b) Roshni dene ka samay - 30 sec se 40 sec

(d) Roshni dene ki power - 9000 candla

(e) Explosive - 100gm (WP Commercial)

(f) Wire spool ke wire ki lambai - 60 feet

(b) Bhag-II - Hisson ke naam, kaam ,chal aur misfire per karwai

Hisson ke naam

(i) Picket - Flare ke sath do picket ka hona zaruri hai. Picket ke hisse ke naam main post, side arm, side prong.

(ii) Spring Arm - Flare ko laganeke liye ek spring arm ki zarurat padti hai. Hisson ke naam arm, link spring, link safety pin, clamping nut, links.

(iii) Wire Spool - Wire spool main 60 feet lamba wire aata hai, iske purjon ke naam trip wire, anchor ya hook, split pin.

(iv) Flare Pot - Iske hisson ke naam- Pot, wing nut, jaw, safety pin, control plate, way for side arm, way for main post.

Chal Yeh ek ignate hone wala flare hai jo ki spring ki takat se kaam karta hai.Jab trip wire per dabav ya khinchav padta hai to control plate hil jata hai. Jis se striker azad ho jata hai aur Striker spring ki taqat se uper ki taraf uth jata hai aur primer cap per thokar marta hai, Jisse chingari paida hoti hai jo ki flare pot mei bhare white phosphorus main aag lga deta hai aur flare 30 se 40 sec tak 3 mtr redius ilaqe ko roshan kar deta hai.

Misfire per karwai. Yadi flare mis fire ho jaye to muh ko niche ki taraf rakhte huye flare pot ko picket se alag karen aur blind ki tarah barbad karen.

(d) Bhag-III - Trip flare ko lagana, arm, disarm aur udanae ka tariqa.

Trip flare ko lagana. Flare ko lagane ke liye do picket ko dushman ke aane wale jagah ya approach par is parkar se lagayen ki donon picket ki side prong ander ki taraf ho aur side prong zamin ke sath mile hon taki picket ghum na sake. Iske baad wire spool ko len, split pin ko nikalen, anchor ya hook ko us picket ke main post par lagayen jis par flare pot na lagana ho, ab spool ke wire ko kholte huye dusre picket tak len jayen. Dusre picket ke main post par spring arm ko is parkar se lagayen ki picket ke upar side arm spring apni taraf ho aur arm ghum na paye. Flare pot ke main post aur side arm ke upar fit karen. Ab wire ko itna kinche ki spring ke upar pura tanav ho aur link pura khulen ho, wire ko clamping nut par lagakar nut ko kas den. Wing nut ko dhila karen aur wire ko jaw ke beech mei lagayen aur wing nut ko tight karen. Trip flare ko camoflague kar den.

Trip flare ko arm, disarm aur udana. Arm karne ke liye savdhani se link safety pin ko pahle link se nikalen aur phir safety pin ko flare pot se nikalen. Dhyan rahe safety pin ko nikalte waqt muh flare pot ke upar nahi hona chahiye aur pin ko nikalne ki tartib nahin bhulna chahiye.

Disarm karna. Agar flare ko istemal na karna ho to pahle flare pot ki safety pin ko lagayen aur uske baad link safety pin ko lagayen. Flare ko picket se alag karen aur wire ko spool ke sath lapate den.

Udane ka tariqa. Trip flare ko hum do tariqe se udayajata hai

(i) Taar ko katkar.

(ii) Taar ko khinch kar.

7. Sankshep.Sawal aur jawab se.

LESSON - 10 IMPROVISED EXPLOSIVE DEVICES(IED)

1. LAGANE KI SAMBHAVIT JAGAH

(a) Kachche roads / Tuta futa road.

(b) Bridges / culverts.

(d) Fauj dwara niyamit taur par istemal ki jaane wali roads.

(e) Khari charai ya road bend.

(f) Naala / Badi pipeline / Khali drums / Thela.

(g) Convoy rukne ki jagah.

(h) Road crossing / junctions.

(j) Rest karne waali jagah.

(k) Kritrim rukawaten jaise ki gire hue ped.

2. IED KO KHOJNE / FATNE PAR / NISHKRIYA KARNE KI KARWAI

(a) IED hone ki sambhavit jagah ko pehchane.

(b) Sthaniya abadi ki madad lein.

(d) Tell tale signs ko khojne ke liye ilake ki jaanch karein.

(e) Khoj wale ilake ko fanning out ke tariqe ko apna kar cordon karein.

(f) Lawaris vastu ko sambhaavit IED samjhein.

(g) IED ko nishkriya karte samay road ke charon taraf 50m ke ilaaken ko dusri IED ya anya khatron se bachaav ke liye jaanchein.

(h) IED ko nishkriya karne ki karwai hamesha Engrs ya prashikshit jawanon ke dwara karwai ki jaye.

3. IED : KARNE WAALI BAATEIN

(a) IED aur booby trap ke khilaf satark rahein.

(b) Accha intelligence network banayein.

(d) Taaza khudi hui zamin, gobar aur road par gire hui cheejon ki jaanchkarein.

(e) Saavdhan aur satark rahein.

(f) IED hone ki sambhaavit jagah par counter IED teams ka istemaal kiya jaye.

(g) Tafseel mein jaanch ki jaaye.

(h) Routine mein badlaav.

(j) Akarshak cheejein jo lawaris aur alag thalag pari ho unhe IED samjhein.

(k) Khuli dikhne waali wire ka saavdhani se jaanch karein, woh trap ho sakta hai.

(l) IED milne par ilake ko mark karein aur report dein.

(m) IED milne par Engrs ko bulayen.

4. IED : NA KARNE WAALI BAATEIN

(a) Yeh kabhi na soche ki ek hi IED lagayi gayi hai.

(b) IED milne par ghabraye nahi.

(d) Faaltu ka jokhim na uthaye.

(e) IED ke paas bheed na lagaye, khali ek aadmi IED ko handle karein aur baaki cover lekar baithe.

(f) IED ke saath chherkhani na karein.

(g) IED milne par koi taar na kaatein, koi tape na nikale aur packing na khole.

(h) Short cut ke taur par kacche raston ka istemaal na karein.

5. IED HANDLING KE BUNIYAADI USOOL

(a) IED jahan milne wahin par barbaad kiya jaaye.

(b) Timer device / ALD ke liye IED ko jaanchon.

(d) Koi raasta na bachne par hand entry technique ka istemaal kiya jaaye.

6. HAMESHA YAAD RAKHEIN

(a) Aapko doosra mauka nahi milega.

(b) Shaheed hone mein koi bahaduri nahi hai.

(d) Jab aap sochenge tabhi aap kar paayenge.

(e) The tragedy of ignorance is its complacency.

(f) Samajhdaar aadmi doosron ki galtiyon se sikhta hai.

(a) Nischit jaankari ke abhaav mein apne vivek ka istemaal karein.

INTEGRATED WEAPON TRAINING

LESSON NO 1

FIRE CONTROL ORDERS AUR TARGET KO KHOJNA

Saman

1. Jhande, Fig 11 targets, Blank Rounds, Demo Troops, Rifle aur Magazine.

Shuru Shuru ka kaam

2. Shuru–shuru ke kaam mein nimn karwai ki jaati :-

(a) Ginti, groupon mein bant.

(b) Hathiyar ka nirikshan.

(c) Ladai ki halat ko madhya nazar rakhte huye demo troops camouflage kiye huye aur chupaye gaye hon.Fig 11 target ya ‘Pop up target’ rassi ya taar dwara khade kiye jayen.

Uddeshya

3. Fire control orders aur target ko khojne mein aur bhi abhyas dena hai.

Bhag

4. Yeh sabak panch bhagon mein sikhaya jayega :-

(a) Bhag l - Hidayatein.

(b) Bhag II - Zor deine wali batein.

(d) Bhag IV - Yaad dilao.

(e) Bhag V - Abhyas.

Bhag I - Hidayatein

5. Sabak ke anusar zaruri hidayatein do.

Bhag II - Zor Dene Wali Batein

6. Zarur Jaanta ho.

(a) Dushman ko khojna.

(b) Khojne ki tartib.

(d) Fire control orders ki durust tartib.

7. Jaanna Chahiye.

(a) Chizen kyon nazar aati hain.

(b) Camouflage aur concealment mein farq.

Bhag III - Ladai Ke Haalaat

8. Zarur Jaanta ho. Dushman attack ki taiyari kar ke badh raha hai aur hum defence mein hain. Hamara task aur platoon ka task.

9. Jaanna Chahiye. Sath Wali unit ya sub unit ki zimmewari.

Bhag IV - Yaad Dilao

10. Zarur Jaanta ho.

(a) Fire units kya hoti hain.

(b) Fire control orders aur fire direction orders mein farq.

(d) Fire control orders dene ki tartib.

(e) Aam rukh, dahine baen had aur arc of fire.

11. Jaanna Chahiye.

(a) Chizein kyon nazar aati hain.

(b) Target khojne ki tartib.

Bhag V - Abhyas

12. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Target ko aiming rest par lagi rifle dwara dikha kar fire control order deina.

(b) Isse pehle usi target ko khojna hai aur phir dekh kar aiming rest par lage rifle se dikhana.

(d) Chhupe huye demo troops ishara milne par blank round bhi fire karein jisse fasle ka anuman laga kar alag alag fire control orders diye jayen.

13. Jaanna Chahiye.

(a) Jhande chuni huyi ranges par rakh kar fasle ka anuman lagao.

(b) Camouflage aur concealment ke namune diye jayen aur ilaque ke anusar kis tarah badli karte hain bataya jaye.

14. Jaan Sakta Hai.

(a) Students section commander ki duties bari bari karein jisse sabhi fire control orders de sakein.

(b) Test ke taur par bhi yeh karwai ki jaye.

Sankshep

15. Fire control abhyas se hi aa sakta hai isliye ladai ki haalaat ko dhyan mein rakhte huye sabhi ko iski tartib aur qism aani chahiye.

Nirikshan

16. Hathiyar aur eqpt ka nirikshan karo.

LESSON NO 2

5.56 MM INSAS RIFLE KI HANDLING

Saman

1. 5.56 mm INSAS Rifle, Magazine, Targets, Blank Rounds aur Demo Troops.

Shuru Shuru ka Kaam

2. Shuru–shuru ke kaam mein nimn karwai ki jaati :-

(a) Ginti, groupon mein baant.

(b) Hathiyar ka nirikshan (students se karwaya jaye).

(d) Bandobast. Training area taqriban 400m lamba aur kafi chaura hona chahiye taki jawan asani se harkat kar saken. Training area mein alag alag kism ke Adh maujud hone chahiye. Har ek 50 x ke fasle par demo troops ya figure 11 targets laga lena chahiye.

Uddeshya

3. 5.56 mm INSAS Rifle ki handling mein aur bhi abhyas dena hai.

Bhag

4. Sabak panch bhagon mein sikhaya jayega :-

(a) Bhag I. Hidayatein.

(b) Bhag II. Zor deine wali batein.

(d) Bhag IV. Yaad dilao.

(e) Bhag V. Abhyas.

Bhag I – Hidayatein

5. Sabak ke anusar zaruri hidayatein batayein.

Bhag II - Zor Dene Wali Batein

6. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Rokon ko dur karna.

(b) Dushman ko engage karna.

(d) Sighton mein tabdili karna.

7. Jaanna Chahiye.

(a) Adh ka durust istemal.

(b) Fasle ka sahi anuman lagana aur target ka sahi bayan.

Bhag III - Ladai ki haalaat

8. Ek ladai ki halatmaujuda halat ke mutabik batao.

9. Zarur Jaanta Ho. Dushman aur apni faujon ki khabar aur apne sec ka task.

10. Jaanna Chahiye.

Bhag IV - Yaad Dilao Baki sub units ke task.

11. Zarur Jaanta Ho. Hathiyar par sambandhit sawal.

12. Jaanna Chahiye. Field craft.

13. Jaan Sakta Hai.

Bhag V - Abhyas Minor tactics.

14. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

tabdili karna. Rifle ki handling aur rokon ko dur karna aur sighton mein

15. Janna Chahiye. Adh ka istemal.

Sankshep

16. Class ki achhi aur kharab batein batayein. Niche diye huye baton par zor dein :-

(a) Adh ka sahi istemal.

(b) Durust dekhbhal aur handling.

(d) Zamini nishan ka bayan karna.

Nirikshan

16. Hathiyar aur saman.

LESSON NO 3

ASSAULT MEIN 5.56 MM INSAS RIFLE KI HANDLING

Saman

1. Rifle, Magazine, Blank Rounds, Bicart Strip, No 90 Grenade, Targets, Tube Launching, Drill Cartridges, Clearing Plug aur Cleaning Kit Box.

Shuru Shuru ka Kaam

2. Shuru–shuru ke kaam mein nimn karwai ki jaati :-

(a) Ginti, groupon mein bant.

(b) Hathiyar ka nirikshan (students se karwaya jaye).

(d) Bandobast. Training area taqriban 400m lamba aur kafi chaura hona chahiye. Har ek kism ki Adh aur cover maujud hona chahiye Dushman ko jahir karne ke liye targets, blank rounds aur No 90 grenade istemal kiya jaye.

Uddeshya

3. Assault ke dauran 5.56 mm INSAS Rifle ki handling mein aur bhi abhyas dena hai.

Bhag

4. Sabaq panch bhagon mein sikhaya jayega :-

(a) Bhag I. Hidayatein.

(b) Bhag II. Zor dene wali batein.

(d) Bhag IV. Yaad dilao.

(e) Bhag V. Abhyas.

Bhag I – Hidayatein

5. Sabak ke anusar hidayatein batayein.

Bhag II - Zor Dene Wali Batein

6. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Ladai ke halat.

(b) Hathiyar ki handling.

(d) Sighton mein tabdili karna.

(e) Adh ka istemal aur field craft.

7. Jaanna Chahiye.

(a) Harkat karna.

(b) Fire control orders.

Bhag III - Ladai Ki Haalaat

8. Ek ladai ki halat maujuda halat ke mutabik batao.

9. Zarur Jaanta Ho. Dushman aur apni faujon ki khabar aur apne sec ka task.

10. Jaanna Chahiye. Baki sub units ke task.

Bhag IV - Yaad Dilao

11. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Hathiyar par sambandhit sawal.

(b) Field craft.

12. Janna Chahiye. Minor tactics.

Bhag V - Abhyas

13. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Fire position ka chunao.

(b) Target ka bayan aur fire control orders.

(d) Three round control burst ka istemal.

(e) Sighton mein tabdili karna.

14. Jaanna Chahiye.

(a) Sniper / dushman ke ikka dukka nafri ke barkhilaf karwai.

(b) Hamle ke dauran formation mein hamla aur bayonet fighting.

Sankshep

15. Class ki achchhi aur kharab batein batayein. Niche diye huye baton par zor dein :-

(a) Durust fire position ka chunao.

(b) Tgt ko khoj nikalna.

Nirikshan

16. Hathiyar aur saman.

LESSON NO 4

5.56 MM INSAS RIFLE KI DEFENCE MEIN HANDLING

Saman

1. Rifle, Magazine, INSAS UBGL, Blank Rounds, Bicart Strip, No 90 Grenade, , Sand Bags, Targets, Drill Cartridges, Clearing Plug aur Cleaning Kit Box.

Shuru Shuru ka Kaam

2. Shuru–shuru ke kaam mein nimn karwai ki jaati :-

(a) Ginti, groupon mein bant.

(b) Hathiyar ka nirikshan (students se karwaya jaye).

(d) Bandobast. Training area taqriban 400m lamba aur kafi chaura hona chahiye. Dushman ko zahir karne ke liye targets, blank rounds, bicat strip aur No

90 grenade istemal karna chahiye.

Uddeshya

3. Defence ke dauran 5.56 mm INSAS Rifle ki handling mein aur bhi abhyas dena hai.

Bhag

4. Sabaq panch bhagon mein sikhaya jayega :-

(a) Bhag I. Hidayatein.

(b) Bhag II. Zor dene wali batein.

(d) Bhag IV. Yaad dilao.

(e) Bhag V. Abhyas.

Bhag I – Hidayatein

5. Sabaq ke anusar hidayatein batayein.

Bhag II - Zor Dene Wali Batein

6. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Ladai ki halat.

(b) Hathiyar ki handling.

(d) Three round control burst ka istemal. (e) Sighton mein tabdili karna.

7. Janna Chahiye.

(a) Tgt ko khojna.

(b) Aad ka istemal.

Bhag III - Ladai Ke Haalaat

8. Ek ladai ke haalat maujuda haalat ke mutabik batao.

9. Zarur Jaanta Ho. Dushman aur apni faujon ki khabar aur apne sec ka task.

10. Jaanna Chahiye. Baki sub units ke task.

Bhag IV - Yad Dilao

11. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Hatyhiyar par sambandhit sawal.

12. Janna Chahiye. Field craft.

13. Jaan Sakta Hai. Minor tactics.

Bhag V - Abhyas

14. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Target ka bayan aur fire control orders.

(b) Rokon ko dur karna.

(d) Sighton mein tabdili karna.

15. Jaanna Chahiye.

(a) Fire position ka chunao karna.

(b) Dushman 150m par ane par rifle grenade fire karne ki karwai.

Sankshep

16. Class ki achchhi aur kharab batein batayein. Niche diye huye baton par zor dein :-

(a) Durust dekhbhal karna.

(b) Tgt ki khoj karna.

(d) Durust fire position ka chunao.

Nirikshan

17. Hathiyar aur saman.

LESSON NO 5

PRACTICAL ROKEIN 5.56 MM INSAS RIFLE

Saman

1. Rifle, Magazine, Figure11 Targets, Genti, Belcha, Camouflage karne wala saman, Blank Rounds, Jhanda 4’X4’ (2).

Shuru Shuru ka Kaam

2. Shuru–shuru ke kaam mein nimn karwai ki jaati :-

(a) Ginti, groupon mein bant.

(b) Hathiyar ka nirikshan (students se karwaya jaye).

(d) Bandobast. Training area aisa hona chahiye jahan alag alag qism ki zamin aur adh maujud ho. 300x aur 400x par fig 11 tgt ya demo troops hone chahiye aur inke liye koi bhi karwai karne ke liye ishara muqarrar hona chahiye.

Uddeshya

3. Ladai ke dauran rifle ki rokon ka sabak malum karna , unhein dur karna aur unke bachao ke bare mein aur bhi abhyas dena hai.

Bhag

4. Sabak panch bhagon mein sikhaya jayega :-

(a) Bhag I. Hidayatein.

(b) Bhag II. Zor dene wali batein.

(d) Bhag IV. Yaad dilao.

(e) Bhag V. Abhyas.

Bhag I – Hidayatein

5. Sabak ke anusar hidayatein batayein.

Bhag II - Zor Dene Wali Batein

6. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Ladai ke haalat.

(b) Rokon ko dur karna aur hathiyar ki handling.

7. Jaanna Chahiye. Fire position ka chunao.

Bhag III - Ladai Ke Haalaat

8. Ek ladai ki haalat maujuda haalat ke mutabik batao.

9. Zarur Jaanta Ho. Dushman aur apni faujon ki khabar aur apne sec ka task.

10. Jaanna Chahiye. Baki sub units ke task.

Bhag IV - Yaad Dilao

11. Zarur Jaanta Ho. Hathiyar par sambandhit sawal.

12. Jaanna Chahiye. Field craft.

13. Jaan Sakta Hai. Minor tactics.

Bhag V - Abhyas

14. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Tactical haalaat ko madhya nazar rakhte huye advance karna.

(b) Dushman ka bhari tadad mein fire aane par karwai aur fire position ko ikhtiar karna.

(d) Chhote purzon ki badli.

15. Jaanna Chahiye.

(a) Fire orders.

(b) Dushman advance karne par karwai.

Sankshep

16. Class ki achchhi aur kharab batein batayein. Niche diye huye baton par zor dein:-

(a) Rokon ko pehchanna aur dur karna.

(b) Durust fire position ka chunao.

Nirikshan

17. Hathiyar aur saman.

LESSON NO 6

RIFLE KE SATH FIRE AND MOVE

Saman

1. Rifle, Magazine, Blank Ammunition, Binoculars, Jhande (alag alag rangon ke).

Shuru Shuru ka Kaam

2. Shuru–shuru ke kaam mein nimn karwai ki jaati :-

(a) Ginti, groupon mein bant.

(b) Hathiyar ka nirikshan (students se karwaya jaye).

(d) Bandobast. Training area mein tuti-phuti zamin aur jharian hon. Suraksha ke liye jhande aur sentries ka istemal kiya jaye.

Uddeshya

3. Rifle ke sath fire aur move mein aur bhi abhyas dena hai.

Bhag

4. Sabaq panch bhagon mein sikhaya jayega :-

(a) Bhag I. Hidayatein.

(b) Bhag II. Zor dene wali batein.

(d) Bhag IV. Yaad dilao.

(e) Bhag V. Abhyas.

Bhag I – Hidayatein

5. Sabak ke anusar hidayatein batayein.

Bhag II - Zor Deine Wali Batein

6. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Adh pakarne ka durust tariqa.

(b) Rifle ke sath harkat.

7. Jaanna Chahiye. Dushman ko engage karna.

Bhag III - Ladai Ki Haalaat

8. Ek ladai ki haalat maujuda haalat ke mutabik batao.

9. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Fire and move ke buniyadi usul.

(b) Steady advance aur advance by bound .

(d) Target ko khojna aur barbad karna.

(e) Fire position ka durust chunao.

10. Jaanna Chahiye.

Bhag IV - Yaad Dilao Baki sub units ke task.

11. Zarur Jaanta Ho. Hathiyar par sambandhit sawal.

12. Jaanna Chahiye. Field craft.

13. Jaan Sakta Hai. Minor tactics.

Bhag V - Abhyas

14. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Ek bound se dusre bound ko advance karna.

(b) Fire position ka chunao.

Sankshep

15. Class ki achchhi aur kharab batein batayein. Niche diye huye baton par zor dein :-

(a) Adh ka durust istemal.

(b) Hathiyar ki handling.

Nirikshan

16. Hathiyar aur saman.

LESSON NO 7

5.56 MM INSAS RIFLE SE ANYA POSITIONON SE FIRE

Saman

1. 5.56 mm INSAS Rifle, Magazine, Targets, Blank Rounds, Demo Troops, Jhande aur Radio Set.

Shuru Shuru ka Kaam

2. Shuru–shuru ke kaam mein nimn karwai ki jaati :-

(a) Ginti, groupon mein bant.

(b) Hathiyar ka nirikshan (students se karwaya jaye).

(d) Bandobast. Training area mein alag alag adh maujud ho. Ilaqa takriban 400x lamba ho. Jawanon ko camouflage kar lena chahiye. Targets aur demo alag alag ranges par pahle hi lagaye jayein.

Uddeshya

3. 5.56 mm INSAS Rifle ke sath bhinn bhinn prakar ki firing position se alag alag ranges par targets ko engage karne ke tariqon mein aur bhi abhyas dena hai.

Bhag

4. Sabak panch bhagon mein sikhaya jayega :-

(a) Bhag I. Hidayatein.

(b) Bhag II. Zor dene wali batein.

(d) Bhag IV. Yaad dilao.

(e) Bhag V. Abhyas.

Bhag I – Hidayatein

5. Sabak ke anusar hidayatein batayein.

Bhag II - Zor Dene Wali Batein

6. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Ladai ke haalat.

(b) Adh aur cover ka durust istemal.

7. Jaanna Chahiye. Dushman ko engage karna.

Bhag III - Ladai Ki Haalaat

8. Ek ladai ki halat maujuda haalat ke mutabik batao.

9. Zarur Jaanta Ho. Dushman aur apni faujon ki khabar aur apne sec ka task.

10. Jaanna Chahiye.

Bhag IV - Yaad Dilao Baqi sub units ke task.

11. Zarur Jaanta Ho. Hatyhiyar se sambandhit sawal.

12. Jaanna Chahiye. Alag alag fire position se rokon ko dur karna.

13. Jaan Sakta Hai.

Bhag V - Abhyas Minor tactics.

14. Zarur Jaanta Ho. Tactical advance karna aur jab dushman aye toh durust

cover lekar aur fire position banate huye use engage karna. Alag alag fire position mein sthirta hasil karte huye fire karna.

Sankshep

15. Class ki achchhi aur kharab batein batayein. Niche diye huye baton par zor dein:-

(a) Cover ka durust istemal.

(b) Durust firing position chunna.

Nirikshan

16. Hathiyar aur saman.

LESSON NO 8

CQB ROLE MEIN 5.56 MM INSAS RIFLE KI HANDLING

Saman

1. 5.56 mm INSAS Rifle, Magazine, Bayonet, Fig 11Target aur Blank Ammunition.

Shuru Shuru ka Kaam

2. Shuru–shuru ke kaam mein nimn karwai ki jaati :-

(a) Ginti, groupon mein bant.

(b) Hathiyar ka nirikshan (students se karwaya jaye).

(d) Bandobast. Training area mein alag qism ke adh maujod ho. Fig 11 targets aur demo troops hone chahiye. Training area takriban 300x lamba aur kafi chauda ho.

Uddeshya

3. Muthbhed ki ladai mein 5.56 mm INSAS Rifle ki handling mein aur bhi abhyas dena hai.

Bhag

4. Sabak panch bhagon mein sikhaya jayega :-

(a) Bhag I. Hidayatein.

(b) Bhag II. Zor deine wali batein.

(d) Bhag IV. Yaad dilao.

(e) Bhag V. Abhyas.

Bhag I – Hidayatein

5. Sabak ke anusar hidayatein batayein.

Bhag II- Zor Deine Wali Batein

6. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Ladai ki halat.

(b) Hathiyar ki handling, muthbhed ki ladai mein.

7. Jaanna Chahiye.

(a) Zamin ka durust istemal aur field craft.

(b) Ilaqe ki durust dekhbhal.

Bhag III - Ladai Ki Haalaat

8. Ek ladai ki haalat maujuda haalat ke mutabik batao.

9. Zarur Jaanta Ho. Dushman aur apni faujon ki khabar aur apne gp ka task.

10. Jaanna Chahiye.

Bhag IV - Yaad Dilao Baki sub units ke task.

11. Zarur Jaanta Ho. Hathiyar se sambandhit sawal.

12. Jaanna Chahiye. Field craft.

13. Jaan Sakta Hai. Minor tactics.

Bhag V - Abhyas

14. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Dushman ka awaz se pata lagana aur kudrati sidhai hasil karte huye fire karna.

(b) Muthbhed ki ladai mein awaz aur harkat se dushman ka pata lagana aur kudrati sidhai hasil karte huye fire karna.

15. Jaanna Chahiye. Adh ka istemal aur sahi firing position apnana.

Sankshep

16. Class ki achchhi aur kharab batein batayein. Niche diye huye baton par zor dein :-

(a) Hathiyar ki durust handling.

(b) Adh ka durust istemal.

Nirikshan

17. Hathiyar aur saman.

LESSON NO 9

CQB ROLE MEIN SMG MP 9

Saman

1. SMG MP 9, Magazine, Slings, 5.56 mm INSAS Rifle, Blank Rounds, Fig 11 Targets, No 90 Grenade aur Bi-cart strips.

Shuru Shuru ka Kaam

2. Shuru–shuru ke kaam mein nimn karwai ki jaati :-

(a) Ginti, groupon mein bant.

(b) Hathiyar ka nirikshan (students se karwaya jaye).

(d) Bandobast. Ilaqa aisa ho jahan 100 se 200 metre tak asani se harkat ki ja sake. Jungle ya jhadi kafi matra mein hon. Jawan ilaqe ke mutabik camouflage

karein. Class ko do bhagon mein banta jaye, ek group dushman ka kaam karne ke liye jo ki chhupao mein ho, aur dusra group patrol ka kaam karne ke liye.

Uddeshya

3. CQB ki ladai mein SMG MP 9 ki handling mein aur bhi abhyas dena hai.

Bhag

4. Sabaq panch bhagon mein sikhaya jayega :-

(a) Bhag I. Hidayatein.

(b) Bhag II. Zor dene wali batein.

(d) Bhag IV. Yaad dilao.

(e) Bhag V. Abhyas.

Bhag I – Hidayatein

5. Sabak ke anusar hidayatein batayein.

Bhag II - Zor Dene Wali Batein

6. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Ladai ki halat.

(b) Hathiyar ki handling.

7. Jaanna Chahiye.

(a) Field craft.

(b) Target ko khoj nikalna.

Bhag III - Ladai ki haalaat

8. Ek ladai ki haalat maujuda haalat ke mutabik batao.

9. Zarur Jaanta Ho. Dushman aur apni faujon ki khabar aur apne sec ka task.

10. Jaanna Chahiye. Bhag IV - Yaad Dilao Baki sub units ke task.

11. Zarur Jaanta Ho. Hathiyar par sambandhit sawal.

12. Jaanna Chahiye. Field craft.

13. Jaan Sakta Hai. Minor tactics.

Bhag V - Abhyas

14. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Nazdik dushman nikalne par achanak fire kholna. (b) Fire karte karte rok parne par karwai.

15. Jaanna Chahiye.

(a) Bhari huyi MP 9 ke sath harkat karna.

Sankshep

16. Class ki achchhi aur kharab batein batayein. Niche diye huye baton par zor dein:-

(a) Adh ka durust istemal.

(b) Hathiyar ke sath durust harkat.

Nirikshan

17. Hathiyar aur saaman.

LESSON NO 10

CQB ROLE MEIN PISTOL

Saman

1. 9 mm Pistol, Magazine, Targets, Bicart strip, No 90 Grenade, Demo Troops.

Shuru Shuru ka Kaam

2. Shuru–shuru ke kaam mein nimn karwai ki jaati :-

(a) Ginti, groupon mein bant.

(b) Hathiyar ka nirikshan (students se karwaya jaye).

(d) Bandobast. SabaK us jagah achhi tarah chalaya ja sakta hai, jahan tute makan aur barracks hon. Iske alawa jhadidar ilaqe ko bhi istemal kiya ja sakta hai.

Uddeshya

3. CQB ki ladai mein 9 mm Pistol ki handling mein aur bhi abhyas dena hai.

Bhag

4. Sabak panch bhagon mein sikhaya jayega :-

(a) Bhag I. Hidayatein.

(b) Bhag II. Zor dene wali batein.

(d) Bhag IV. Yaad dilao.

(e) Bhag V. Abhyas.

Bhag I – Hidayatein

5. Sabak ke anusar hidayatein batayein.

Bhag II - Zor Dene Wali Batein

6. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Ladai ki haalat.

(b) Hathiyar ki handling, muthbhed ki ladai mein.

7. Jaanna Chahiye.

(a) Adh ka istemal.

(b) Ladai ke lie taiyari.

Bhag III - Ladai Ki Haalaat

8. Ek ladai ki haalat maujuda haalat ke mutabik batao.

9. Zarur Jaanta Ho. Dushman aur apni faujon ki khabar aur apne det ka task.

10. Jaanna Chahiye.

Bhag IV - Yaad Dilao Baki sub units ke task.

11. Zarur Jaanta Ho. Hathiyar par sambandhit sawal.

12. Jaanna Chahiye. Field craft.

13. Jaan Sakta Hai. Minor tactics.

Bhag V - Abhyas

14. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Dushman ko CQB mein engage karna.

(b) Rokon ko dur karna.

15. Jaanna Chahiye. Adh ka istemal.

Sankshep

16. Class ki achchhi aur kharab batein batayein. Niche diye huye baton par zor dena chahiye :-

(a) Hathiyar ki handling.

(b) Durust fire position ka chunao aur istemal.

Nirikshan

17. Hathiyar aur saman.

LESSON NO 11

ADVANCE AUR ATTACK MEIN LMG KI HANDLING

Saman

1. LMGs, Magazines, Spare Part Wallets, Holdalls, Utility Pouches, Demo Troops, Blank Ammunition, Bicart Strip, No 90 Grenade aur Sand Bags.

Shuru Shuru ka Kaam

2. Shuru–shuru ke kaam mein nimn karwai ki jaati :-

(a) Ginti, groupon mein bant.

(b) Hathiyar ka nirikshan (students se karwaya jaye).

(d) Bandobast. Demo troops dushman ka kaam karne ke liye maujod hone chahiye. Fire ko zahir karne ke liye demo troops ko 90 No grenade aur bicart strip ka istemal karna chahiye.

Uddeshya

3. Advance aur attack mein LMG ki handling mein aur bhi abhyas dena hai.

Bhag

4. Sabak panch bhagon mein sikhaya jayega :-

(a) Bhag I. Hidayatein.

(b) Bhag II. Zor deine wali batein.

(d) Bhag IV. Yaad dilao.

(e) Bhag V. Abhyas.

Bhag I – Hidayatein

5. Sabak ke anusar hidayatein batayein.

Bhag II - Zor Dene Wali Batein

6. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Ladai ki haalat.

(b) Zamini nishan ka bayan.

7. Jaanna Chahiye.

(a) Fire control orders.

(b) Ilaqe ki dekhbhal aur fire position ka chunao.

Bhag III - Ladai ki haalaat

8. Ek ladai ki haalat maujuda haalat ke mutabik batao.

9. Zarur Jaanta Ho. Dushman aur apni faujon ki khabar aur apne gp ka task.

10. Jaanna Chahiye. Baki sub units ke task.

Bhag IV - Yaad Dilao

11. Zarur Jaanta Ho. Hatyhiyar par sambandhit sawal.

12. Jaanna Chahiye. Field craft.

13. Jaan Sakta Hai. Minor tactics.

Bhag V - Abhyas

14. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Tactical haalaat mein advance karna.

(b) Durust battle drill.

15. Jaanna Chahiye.

(a) Fire control orders.

(b) LMG ke sath harkat karna.

16. Jaan sakta hai. LMG det aur Rifle group ko verbal orders dena.

Sankshep

17. Class ki achchhi aur kharab batein batayein. Niche diye huye baton par zor dein

(a) LMG ke sath harkat karna.

(b) Battle drill.

Nirikshan

18. Hathiyar aur saman.

LESSON NO 12

DEFENCE MEIN LMG

Saman

1. LMGs, Magazines, Spare Part Wallets, Holdalls, Utility Pouches, Demo Troops, Blank Ammunition, Bicart Strip, No 90 Grenade aur Sand Bags.

Shuru Shuru ka Kaam

2. Shuru–shuru ke kaam mein nimn karwai ki jaati :-

(a) Ginti, groupon mein bant.

(b) Hathiyar ka nirikshan (students se karwaya jaye).

(d) Bandobast. Yakin kiya jaye ki alag alag tarah ki Adh maujod ho aur dekhbhal ke liye kafi ilaqa khula ho.

Uddeshya

3. Defence mein LMG ki handling mein aur bhi abhyas dena hai.

Bhag

4. Sabak panch bhagon mein sikhaya jayega :-

(a) Bhag I. Hidayatein.

(b) Bhag II. Zor dene wali batein.

(d) Bhag IV. Yaad dilao.

(e) Bhag V. Abhyas.

Bhag I – Hidayatein

5. Sabak ke anusar hidayatein batayein.

Bhag II - Zor Dene Wali Batein

6. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Ladai ki haalat.

(b) Zamini nishan aur fire control orders.

7. Jaanna Chahiye.

(a) Cover ka istemal.

(b) Camouflage aur concealment.

Bhag III - Ladai Ki Haalaat

8. Ek ladai ki haalat maujuda haalat ke mutabik batao.

9. Zarur Jaanta Ho. Dushman aur apni faujon ki khabar aur apne gp ka task.

10. Jaanna Chahiye. Baki sub units ke task.

Bhag IV - Yaad Dilao

11. Zarur Jaanta Ho. Hatyhiyar se sambandhit sawal.

12. Jaanna Chahiye. Field craft.

13. Jaan Sakta Hai. Minor tactics.

Bhag V - Abhyas

14. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Defence mein ilaqe ki zimmewari ke liye bant aur fixed line.

(b) Target ka bayan.

(d) LMG se enfilade fire karne ka tariqa.

(e) Rokon ko pehchanna aur dur karna.

15. Janna Chahiye.

(a) Camouflage aur concealment.

(b) Alternative position mein badli karna.

Sankshep

16. Class ki achchhi aur kharab batein batayein. Niche diye huye baton par zor do:-

(a) Cover ka durust istemal.

(b) Fasle ka anuman lagana.

Nirikshan

17. Hathiyar aur saman.

LESSON NO 13

ANTI-AIRCRAFT ROLE MEIN LMG KA ISTEMAL

Saman

1. LMGs, Magazines, Spare Part Wallets, Holdalls, Utility Pouches, Drill Carts, Hydrogen Toy Balloons, 3 ton ya 1 ton AA Mounting ke sath, Hawai Zahaj ki pehchan ke Charts.

Shuru Shuru ka Kaam

2. Shuru–shuru ke kaam mein nimn karwai ki jaati :-

(a) Ginti, groupon mein bant.

(b) Hathiyar ka nirikshan (students se karwaya jaye).

(d) Camouflage aur concealment ilaqe ke mutabik.

Uddeshya

3. Defence ke dauran Anti-Aircraft role mein LMG ke istemal mein aur bhi abhyas dena hai.

Bhag

4. Sabak panch bhagon mein sikhaya jayega :-

(a) Bhag I. Hidayatein.

(b) Bhag II. Zor deine wali batein.

(d) Bhag IV. Yaad dilao.

(e) Bhag V. Abhyas.

Bhag I – Hidayatein

5. Sabaq ke anusar zaruri hidayatein batao.

Bhag II - Zor Dene Wali Batein

6. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Tezi aur durusti se target pehchanna.

(b) Fasle ka sahi anuman lagana.

(d) Fire Control.

(e) Hathiyar ko Anti-Aircraft role ke liye taiyar karna.

7. Jaanna Chahiye.

(a) Dushman ke jahazon ki gati.

(b) Chart dwara jahazon ko pehchanna.

Bhag III- Ladai Ki Haalaat

8. Zarur Jaanta ho. Apne platoon, company ke ilaqe mein dushman ki hawai karwai se sambandhit ladai ki haalaat.

9. Jaanna Chahiye. Apne neighbouring ya flanking units.

Bhag IV - Yaad Dilao

10. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) LMG ko Anti-Aircraft role mein istemal ka tariqa.

(b) Tracer bharne ka tariqa.

11. Jaanna Chahiye.

(a) Apne jahazon ki pehchan aur gati.

(b) Gadion par mount lagana.

12. Jaan Sakta Hai.

(a) Dushman ke jahazon ki pehchan.

(b) Anti-Aircraft role mein LMG ke alawa hathiyar.

Bhag V - Abhyas

13. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Anti-Aircraft role mein camouflage aur concealment ko barkarar rakhte huye LMG ka istemal.

(b) Tracer bharne ka tariqa.

(d) Rokon ko dur karna.

14. Jaanna Chahiye.

(a) Mount ko gadion ke sath istemal karna.

(b) Lead lagana.

15. Jaan Sakta Hai. Model dwara jahazon ki pehchan.

Sankshep

16. Galtion ko batao mote taur par, aur durust handling dekhbhal aur fire control par zor do.

Nirikshan

17. Hathiyar ka nirikshan aur ammunition ka hisab.

LESSON NO 14

5.56 mm INSAS LMG KI YANTRIK (MECHANICAL) ROKEIN

Saman

1. LMGs, Magazines, Spare Part Wallets, Holdalls, Utility Pouches, Demo Troops ya pop up Targets, Blank Ammunition, No 90 Grenade, Bicart Strips.

Shuru Shuru ka Kaam

2. Shuru–shuru ke kaam mein nimn karwai ki jaati :-

(a) Ginti, groupon mein bant.

(b) Hathiyar ka nirikshan.

(d) 300 se 500x tak alag alag ranges par pop up target ya demo troops hone chahiye.

Uddeshya

3. LMG ki rokon ko dur karne mein aur bhi abhyas dena.

Bhag

4. Sabak panch bhagon mein sikhaya jayega :-

(a) Bhag I. Hidayatein.

(b) Bhag II. Zor dene wali batein.

(d) Bhag IV. Yaad dilao.

(e) Bhag V. Abhyas.

Bhag I – Hidayatein

5. Sabak ke anusar zaruri hidayatein batao.

Bhag II - Zor Dene Wali Batein

6. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Adh ka sahi istemal karna.

(b) Fire posn ka durust chunao karna aur hathiyar ka sahi istemal.

7. Jaanna Chahiye. Alag alag adh tak pahunchhe se pahle LMG ke sath sikhai hui crawling / chal.

Bhag III - Ladai Ki Haalaat

8. Ek choti si ladai ki haalaat, jis bhi ops of war ke andar abhyas karna hai batao.

Bhag IV - Yaad Dilao

9. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) LMG mein aam roken kaun si hai.

(b) Fauri ilaj se dur hone wali roken.

10. Jaanna Chahiye.

(a) Alag alag aar tak pahunchne ke tariqe.

(b) Action mein ane par handling.

Bhag V - Abhyas

11. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Zahir kiye dushman ka bayan karte huye LMG ki handling.

(b) Sabhi kism ki rokon ko dur karne ka abhyas.

(d) Body aur chamber ki rokon ko dur karna.

(e) Chhote purzon ki badli.

12. Jaanna Chahiye.

(a) Cover ka istemal karte huye rokon ko dur karna. (b) Cover tak jane ke liye handling .

(b) Chupe huye dushman ko khoj kar barbad karna.

Sankshep

16. Mote taur par galtion ko batao, ladai mein kis tarah tezi se rok dur karni chahiye, is par zor dein.

Nirikshan

17. Hathiyar aur saman ka nirikshan karo.

LESSON NO 15

DEFENCE MEIN 84 MM ROCKET LAUNCHER KI HANDLING

Saman

1. 84 mm Rocket Launcher, 84 mm Drill Rounds, 5.56 mm INSAS Rifle, Camo Nets, Range Cards, Tank Targets, 5.56 mm Blank Rounds.

Shuru Shuru ka Kaam

2. Shuru–shuru ke kaam mein nimn karwai ki jaati :-

(a) Ginti, deton mein bant.

(b) Students dwara hathiyar ka nirikshan.

Uddeshya

3. Defence mein 84 mm RL ki handling mein aur bhi abhyas dena hai.

Bhag

4. Sabak panch bhagon mein sikhaya jayega :-

(a) Bhag I. Hidayatein.

(b) Bhag II. Zor dene wali batein.

(d) Bhag IV. Yaad dilao.

(e) Bhag V. Abhyas.

Bhag I – Hidayatein

5. Sabak ke anusar zaruri hidayatein, ilaqe ke liye aur hathiyar ke liye batao.

Bhag II - Zor Dene Wali Batein

6. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Fire position ka durust chunao.

(b) Fasle ka sahi anuman lagana.

(d) Rokon ko tezi se dur karna.

(e) Fire control orders.

7. Jaanna Chahiye.

(a) 84 mm RL ko site karne ke sidhant.

(b) 84 mm RL ke pit ka nap.

8. Jaan Sakta Hai. Tank runs ka chunao.

Bhag III - Ladai Ki Haalaat

9. Zarur Jaanta Ho. Apni coy aur pl ki ladai ki haalaat.

10. Jaanna Chahiye. Apne Battalion ki anti tank tazveez aur flanking units ya company.

11. Jaan Sakta Hai. Upar wale cdrs ka anti tank plan, tanks aur dusre anti tank hathiyar.

Bhag IV - Yaad Dilao

12. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) 84 mm RL site karne ke usul.

(b) Harkati target barbad karne ke kaide.

(d) Raat ko rok dur karne ka tariqa.

13. Jaanna Chahiye.

(a) Cam aur concealment 84 mm RL ke back blast ke liye.

(b) Alternative posn ka chunao.

Bhag V - Abhyas

14. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Cam aur concealment.

(b) Target ko engage karna,harkati aur stationary.

(d) Targets ko bayan karne ka tariqa aur fire control.

(e) Rokon ko dur karna.

15. Jaanna Chahiye.

(a) Ill round ka istemal, pendulum sight ka istemal.

(b) Dushman ki shelling ka asar aur alternativ posn par jana.

16. Jaan Sakta Hai. Air Defence role mein helicopter ke khilaf HE ka istemal.

Sankshep

17. Aam galtion ko batao aur zor do ki kis tarah 84 mm RL ki alag alag khasusiaton ka istemal kiya ja sakta hai.

Nirikshan

18. Hathiyar aur saman ka nirikshan karein.

LESSON NO 16

AMBUSH MEIN 84 MM ROCKET LAUNCHER KA ISTEMAL

Saman

1. 84 mm Rocket Launcher, 84 mm Drill Rounds, 5.56 mm INSAS Rifle, Camouflage ka Saman, Tank Targets ya Gadian, 5.56 mm Blank Rounds.

Shuru Shuru ka Kaam

2. Shuru–shuru ke kaam mein nimn karwai ki jaati :-

(a) Ginti, deton mein bant.

(b) Hathiyar ka nirikshan.

(c) Bandobast mein actual ya asli ambush site ka ilaqa ho jismein gadian harkat kar saken ya tank target harkat kar saken.

Uddeshya

3. Ambush mein 84 mm RL ki handling mein aur bhi abhyas dena hai.

Bhag

4. Sabak panch bhagon mein sikhaya jayega :-

(a) Bhag I. Hidayatein.

(b) Bhag II. Zor dene wali batein.

(d) Bhag IV. Yaad dilao.

(e) Bhag V. Abhyas.

Bhag I – Hidayatein

5. Sabak ke anusar zaruri hidayatein batao.

Bhag II - Zor Dene Wali Batein

6. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Ambush site ka durust chunao.

(b) Hathiyar ki durust handling.

(d) 84 mm RL ka khas istemal.

7. Jaanna Chahiye.

(a) Cam aur concealment.

(b) Alag alag amn ka istemal ambush mein.

8. Jaan Sakta Hai. Ambush site mein aate aur jate waqt harkat.

Bhag III - Ladai Ki Haalaat

9. Ek ambush se sambandh rakhne wali ladai ki haalaat.

10. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Dushman ke tank hain ya gadian.

(b) Dushman kihabits aur counter ambush drill.

11. Jaanna Chahiye.

(a) Kya apni koi patrol us ilaqe mein harkat kar rahi hai. (b) Ishare aur fire kholne ka tariqa.

Bhag IV - Yaad Dilao

12. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Ambush site mein dhyan rakhne wali batein.

(b) Ambush ki parties mein 84 mm RL ki jagah.

13. Jaanna Chahiye.

(a) Ambush site pakarne aur chorne ka tariqa.

(b) Ishare aur RV.

Bhag V - Abhyas

14. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Ambush site pakarna.

(b) Ambush mein tanks ya gadion ka intezar.

(d) Ambush site chodna.

15. Jaanna Chahiye. Alternative ambush site pakarna. RV ke liye main site chorna.

Sankshep

16. Surprise ambush ka sabse bada bhag hai. Is par zor deina aur kaise 84 mm RL ko site karte samay ise hasil karna Chahiye.

Nirikshan

17. Hathiyar aur saman ka nirikshan karein.

LESSON NO 17

ADVANCE ATTACK AUR DEFENCE MEIN 51 mm MORTAR KA ISTEMAL

Saman

1. 51 mm Mortar, Zati Equipment, Sand Filled aur Smoke Bombs, Fig 11 Tgts, Exercise Area ka Sketch.

Shuru Shuru ka Kaam

2. Shuru–shuru ke kaam mein nimn karwai ki jaati :-

(a) Ginti, deton mein bant.

(b) Hathiyar ka nirikshan.

(d) Agar ho sake to bandobast mein 51 mm Mortar sling ka bhi istemal kiya jaye.

Uddeshya

3. Aadvance, attack aur defence ke dauran 51 mm Mortar ke istemal mein aur bhi abhyas dena hai.

Bhag

4. Sabak 6 bhagon mein sikhaya jayega :-

(a) Bhag I. Hidayatein.

(b) Bhag II. Zor dene wali batein.

(d) Bhag IV. Yaad dilao.

(e) Bhag V. Advance aur attack mein abhyas.

(f) Bhag VI. Defence mein abhyas.

Bhag I – Hidayatein

5. Sabak ke anusar zaruri hidayatein batao.

Bhag II - Zor dene wali batein

6. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Fasle ka sahi anuman lagana.

(b) Fire posn ka sahi chunao.

(d) Target ko durust tariqe se engage karna.

(e) Raat ke waqt firing aids ka istemal.

(f) Dial sight ka istemal.

7. Jaanna Chahiye.

(a) Dhuyen ka parda banana.

(b) Fire control orders.

Bhag III - Ladai Ki halat.

8. Advance aur attack ke pahle ladai ki haalaat batao aur baad mein defence ki ladai ki haalaat.

9. Zarur Jaanta Ho. Apna task aur baqi imdadi daste.

10. Jaanna Chahiye. Neighbouring units aur 81 mm Mortar ke task jo ilaqe mein hon.

Bhag IV - Yaad Dilao

11. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Advance aur attack mein 51 mm Mortar ka task.

(b) Defence mein 51 mm Mortar ka task.

(d) HE bomb ka maar dalne ka ilaqa aur khatarnak ilaqa.

12. Jaanna Chahiye.

(a) Dhuyen ka parda banane ka tariqa, HE bombs ke sath sath.

(b) 51 mm Mortar posn ka chunao alag alag ilaqon mein.

13. Jaan Sakta Hai. Raat ke samay aiming mark lagana.

Bhag V - Advance aur Attack Mein Abhyas

14. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Axis of advance mein kahan kahan 51 mm Mortar istemal karna hai aur kaise pl mein madad di jayegi.

(b) Attack ke dauran safety limit ka dhyan.

(d) Direct aur indirect fire.

(e) Dial sight ka istemal.

(f) Auxilliary aur subsidiary aiming mark.

15. Jaanna Chahiye.

(a) Success signal milne par action.

(b) Amn ke khatam hone par action.

Bhag VI - Defence Mein Abhyas

16. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) 51 mm Mortar posn ka chunao.

(b) DF task chunna.

(e) Illuminating plan mein shamil hokar fire karna.

(f) Dial sight ka istemal.

17. Jaanna Chahiye.

(a) 51 mm Mortar ke HE bomb ke ranges aur khatarnak ilaqa. (b) Alternative posn par harkat.

Sankshep

18. Is baat par zor dein ki 51 mm Mortar Pl cdr ka topkhana hai , iska pura faida uthane ke liye achchhi siting aur fire control zaruri hai.

Nirikshan

19. Hathiyar aur saman ka nirikshan karein.

LESSON NO 18

LADAI KI TAMAM HAALAATON MEIN 51 MM MORTAR SE SMOKE AUR ILLUMINATING BOMB KA ISTEMAL

Saman

1. 51 mm Mortar Smoke, Para ill bombs, sand bags, digging tools, laal jhande.

Shuru Shuru ka Kaam

2. Shuru–shuru ke kaam mein nimn karwai ki jaati :-

(a) Ginti, deton mein bant.

(b) Hathiyar ka nirikshan.

(d) Defence ke liye pit khode jayen.

(e) Laal jhandon dwara danger zone jahir karo.

Uddeshya

3. Ladai ki alag alag halaton mein 51 mm Mortar se smoke aur ill bombs fire karne mein aur bhi abhyas dena hai.

Bhag

4. Sabak panch bhagon mein sikhaya jayega :-

(a) Bhag I. Hidayatein.

(b) Bhag II. Zor dene wali batein.

(d) Bhag IV. Yaad dilao.

(e) Bhag V. Abhyas.

Bhag I – Hidayatein

5. Suraksha sambandhi hidayatein batao, control ke jariye aur lal jhandon dwara zahir hadon ke bare mein batao.

Bhag II - Zor Dene Wali Batein

6. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Fire posn ka durust chunao.

(b) Cam aur concealment aur field craft ka durust istemal.

7. Jaanna Chahiye.

(a) Raat ke samay pehchan.

(b) Dhuyen ka parda banana alag alag ilaqon mein.

Bhag III - Ladai Ki haalat

8. Zarur Jaanta Ho. Apna task aur smoke ya ill plan.

9. Jaanna Chahiye. Padosi pl ya coy ka task.

10. Jaan Sakta Hai. 81 mm Mortar aur 84 mm RL ke ill plan.

Bhag IV - Yaad Dilao

11. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) 51 mm Mortar se dhuyen ka parda banate samay dhyan mein rakhane ki batein.

(b) Hawa ka asar rakhte huye point of burst chunna.

(d) Ill bombon par range lagana.

12. Jaanna Chahiye.

(a) Alag alag ops of war mein ill aur smoke bombs ki zarurat.

(b) Scale of ammunition.

Bhag V - Abhyas

13. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Advance karte samay quick attack ke liye smoke bomb ka istemal.

(b) Defence mein ill bomb ka istemal aur ill plan mein kaise shamil hona, chahiye.

14. Jaanna Chahiye. Alag alag zamini haalaat aur adh ka istemal aur rokon ko dur karna.

15. Jaan Sakta Hai. Fasle ka sahi anuman lagana.

Sankshep

16. Class ko jaldi se, durust zamin aur adh ka istemal karte huye dhuyen ka parda banane par zor do aur galtian batao.

Nirikshan

17. Hathiyar aur saman ka nirikshan karo.

LESSON NO 19

ADVANCE ATTACK AUR DEFENCE MEINNO 36 HAND GRENADE KA ISTEMAL

Saman

1. Briefing Board, Drill Hand Grenades, Zati Hathiyar, Fig 12 Tgts aur Jhande.

Shuru Shuru ka Kaam

2. Shuru–shuru ke kaam mein nimn karwai ki jaati :-

(a) Ginti, groupon mein bant.

(b) Hathiyar ka nirikshan.

(d) Student ilaqe ke mutabik cam karein.

(e) Students ke beech 30 sec se 1 min ka waqfa rahe.

(f) Fire trenches par fig 12 tgt khara kiya jaye, ya pull up type ‘pop up’ tgts bhi ho sakte hain.

Uddeshya

3. Aadvance, Attack aur Defence mein NO 36 hand grenade ke istemal mein aur bhi abhyas dena hai.

Bhag

4. Sabak panch bhagon mein sikhaya jayega :-

(a) Bhag I. Hidayatein.

(b) Bhag II. Zor dene wali batein.

(d) Bhag IV. Yaad dilao.

(e) Bhag V. Abhyas.

Bhag I – Hidayatein

5. Sabak ke anusar zaruri hidayatein batao.

Bhag II - Zor Dene Wali Batein

6. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Zamin ki banawat dekhte huye zati camouflage.

(b) Sahi lobbying ka tariqa.

(d) Achchhi dekhbhal aur harkat.

7. Jaanna Chahiye. Priming ka tariqa aur grenade rakhne ka tariqa.

Bhag III - Ladai Ki Haalaat

8. Ladai ki chhoti si haalat batao, jo ki grenade golf course ke liye bhi lagu ho.

Bhag IV - Yaad Dilao

9. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) No 36 hand grenade ka wazan.

(b) Aam jawan kitni dur phaink sakta hai.

(d) No 36 hand grenade ke ignitor set ki pehchan.

10. Jaanna Chahiye.

(a) Advance, Attack aur Defence mein kab kab hand grenade istemal hoga.

(b) Tanks/ICV mein agar ja rahen hon to kaise istemal hoga.

(d) Special mission mein istemal.

Bhag V - Abhyas

11. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Stalking aur adh ka istemal karna aur grenade phainkna.

(b) Trenches mein lage fig 12 tgts barbad karna.

(d) Raat ke samay grenade ka ignitor pehchanna aur prime karna.

(e) Students ko har trench ya tgt par grenade ka asar batao.

Sankshep

12. Class ko galtian batao aur No. 36 hand grenade ke khas asar batar aur ambush aur raid par bhi zor do.

Nirikshan

13 . Hathiyar aur saman ka nirikshan karein.

LESSON NO 20

ADVANCE, ATTACK AUR DEFENCE MEIN INSAS UBGL KA ISTEMAL

Saman

1. Rifle, Magzine, INSAS UBGL, Drill Grenades, Fig 12 & Fig 11 Tgts, Jhande aur Drill Carts.

Shuru Shuru ka Kaam

2. Shuru–shuru ke kaam mein nimn karwai ki jaati :-

(a) Ginti, groupon mein bant.

(b) Hathiyar ka nirikshan.

(d) DF task bataye jayenge.

(e) Section ke adhe jawan Rfn No 3 ka kaam kareinge aur baki coach ka.

Uddeshya

3. Advance, Attack aur Defence mein INSAS UBGL ke istemal mein aur bhi abhyas dena hai.

Bhag

4. Sabak panch bhagon mein sikhaya jayega :-

(a) Bhag I. Hidayatein.

(b) Bhag II. Zor dene wali batein.

(d) Bhag IV. Yaad dilao.

(e) Bhag V. Abhyas.

Bhag I – Hidayatein

5. Sabak ke anusar zaruri hidayatein batao.

Bhag II - Zor dene wali batein

6. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Fire posn ka durust chunao.

(b) Fasle ka sahi anuman lagana.

7. Jaanna Chahiye.

(a) INSAS UBGL ka istemnal.

(b) Rokon ko dur karna.

Bhag III - Ladai ki haalat

8. Ladai ki haalat batao jinmen, apna task saaf saaf batao.

Bhag IV - Yaad Dilao

9. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) INSAS UBGL grenade ka nap tol.

(b) INSAS UBGL grenade ka maar dalne ka ilaqa.

(d) Direct aur Indirect fire karne ka tariqa.

10. Jaanna Chahiye. 5.56 mm INSAS Rif ki rokon ko dur karna.

Bhag V - Abhyas

11. Zarur Jaanta Ho.

(a) Sec Cdr ke niche sec advance karta hai.

(b) 400 m par sec cdr sakth fire ka hukam deta hai.

(d) Sec ke Nos ko apas mein badli karte hain.

12. Jaanna Chahiye. Success signal milne par reorg ki karwai.

13. Jaan Sakta Hai. Special mission mein abhyas.

Sankshep

14. Class ko galtian batao aur chhote rgs ke liye INSAS UBGL ke istemal par zor do.

Nirikshan

15. Hathiyar aur saman ka nirikshan karein.

LESSON -1

MULTI MODE HAND GRENADE SE WAQFIYAT

(Ref – User handbook / operator’s manual Multi Mode Hand Grenade MK-1) Parichay.

1. Indian Army pichhle kai daskon se No 36 Hand Gren ko istemal kar rahi hai. Badlate samay ke sath sath hamari sena mein istemal hone wale hathiyaron mein kai badhlav kiye ja rahe hain. Iss hi ke phal swaroop haal hi mein hamari sena mein Multi Mode Hand Gren (MMHG) ko shamil kiya gaya hai. Iss gren ko Economic Explosive Limited, Nagpur (India) dawara banaya gaya hai. MMHG mein bharosa aur safety kelihaj se kai sudhar kiye gaye hai. Is grenade mein ek choti si tabdali karke ham ise jarurat ke anushar killing ya stun mode mein istemal kar sakte hain. Isliye isse Multi Mode Hand Gren kaha jata hai.

Vishestayein.

2. MMHG ki nimnlikhit vishestayein hai:-

(a) Yeh Gren No 36 Hand Grenki banspat wazan mein halka hai.

(b) Is Gren ko multi mode role mein istemal kiyajasakta hain:-

(i) Stun Mode.

(ii) Fragmentation Mode.

(d) Ek saman fragmentation pattern.

(e) Adverse condition mein istemal karna assan hai.

(f) Atisard ilaqa mein bhi Prime aur Un-prime karna asan hain, kyon ki fuse aur main body asani se assemble kiye ja sakte hain.

(g) Un-primed halatmein grenade 100% safe hain.

(h) Arming safety mechanism kiwajah se thrower ko safety pradan hoti hain.

(j) 15 years Shelf life.

(k) Maintenance free.

(l) Is gren ko para jumping ke dauran prime aur unprime halat mein carry kiya ja sakta hai.

Tech data

3. Fuse

(a) Lambai - 70 mm.

(b) Diameter - 38.54 mm.

(d) Material - Plastic aur Metal

4. Main Body. Iske mukhya 02 hisse hain Blast Cup aur Fragmentation Sleeve:-

(a) Main Body.

(i) Lambai - 83 mm.

(ii) Diameter - 63 mm.

(iii) Weight - 355 gm (approx).

(iv) Material - Plastic & Metal.

(b) Blast Cup.

(i) Weight - 125 gm.

(ii) Weight (Expl) - 92 gm.

(iii) Length - 74 mm.

(i) Weight - 230 gm (approx).

(ii) Lambai - 77 mm.

(iii) Number of fragments - 3800 (approx).

5. Stun Mode.

(a) Weight - 265 gm.

(b) Lambai - 130 mm.

6. Fragmentation Mode.

(a) Weight - 495 gm.

(b) Lambai - 139 mm.

7. Pehchan.

(a) Live grenke blast cup ke upar red colour ka circle rehta hain.

(b) Dummy grenke blast cup ke upar white colour ka circle rehta hain.

8. Stun Mode aur Fragmentation Mode Gren ki maarak shamta:-

No Dist in mtrs 2 4 6 8 10 15 20

Target Posn

(a) Standing 100% 75% 60% 50% 45% 30% 20%

(b) Kneeling 100% 50% 30% 20% 20% 15% 10%

9. Multi Mode Hand Gren (MMHG) ki Packing. Multi Mode hand gren ke fuze aur main body alag alag 6A carrier mein aate hain:-

(a) Fuse.

(i) Multi Mode Hand Grenade ka fuse ek H2A Boxmein pack hokar ata hain.

(ii) Ek box mein kul 12 fuse packhokaraatehain.Ek box me 03 layers hota hain aur ek layer mein 4 fuse hote hain.

(iii) Ek 6A carrier mein 4 x H2A box aur total 48 fuses aatahain.

(b) Main Body.

(i) Multi Mode Hand Grenade (MMHG) kimain body ek H2A Box mein pack hokar aati hain.

(ii) Ek H2A box meintotal 12 main body aatehain. Ek box me 2 layer aur ek layer mein 6 main body hotehain.

(iii) Ek 6A carrier mein 4 x H2A box aur total 48 Main Body aati hain.

6A CARRIER H2A BOX (FUSE)

H2A BOX (MAIN BODY)

LESSON -2

MULTI MODE HAND GRENADE KO PRIME ,UNPRIME KARNE KA TARIKA AUR GREN KI CHAAL

(Ref – User handbook / operator’s manual Multi Mode Hand Grenade MK-1)

1. MMHG keHissePurjonkeNaam. MMHG ke do modules hote hain:-

(a) Fuse Module.

(i) Cap. (ii) Safety Pin Assy.

(iii) Clapper pin Assy. (iv) Conical Spring Assy.

(v) Det No -48. (vi) Pull Ring aur Quarter

(vii) Pyrotechnic Delay. (viii) Shutter.

(ix) Det No 56.

(b) Main Body.

(i) Blast cup with booster pallet.

(ii) Fragmenting sleeve fragment jacket ke sath.

(iii) RDX/TNT Pellet.

MAIN BODY

2. Prime aur Unprime karne ka tariqa.

(a) Inspection. MMHG ek ready to use hand grenade hain, lekin istemal se pehle nimn baaton ko dhyan mein rakhna chahiyen:-

(i) Grenke body ke upar kisi prakar ka grease aur oil na lagaho, jis se gren ka hath se phisalne ka khatra rehta hain.

(ii) Pull Ring ke upar kisi prakar ka cut nahi hona chahiye.

(iii) Fuse aur main body thread ke sath jude hote hain, is liye thread ke upar kisi prakar ka dhul ya mitti nahi hona chahiye. Thread ke safai ko check karen.

(iv) Quarter Pin(split pin) bendya rusted nahi hona chahiye.

(v) Gren ka body crack nahi hona chahiye.

(b) Prime karne kaTarika.

(i) Stun Mode

(aa) Fragmenting sleeve ko blast cup se alag karen. Alag kar ne keli ye ek hath se upar ki taraf se daba te hue anti clock wise ghumaye.

(ab) Fragmenting Sleeve ko nikal neke baad red mark kiya hua blast cup ko fuze ke sath clock wise ghumayen.

(ii) Fragmentation Mode mein.

(aa) Fuse ko ek hath mein aur main body ko dusre hath mein pakde. (ab) Fuse ki thread part ke upar main body ke threaded part ko clock wise ghumate hue fuse ko main body mein kas de.

(c) Un-Prime karne ka tarkia. Un-primed karne keliye gren Fragmentation Mode mein hoya offensive mode mein, hand lever ko bayen hath elike beech mein rakhte hue majbuti se pakare aur dahine hath se Main body ko pakarte hue anti clock wise ghumaye aur fuse ko main body se alag karen.

Note.

(a) Yadi MMHG ko istemal na karna ho toh unprime halat mein storage karen.

(b) Fuse aur main body ko alag alag se apne package mein rakhna chahiye. Yadi grenade ko dubara istemal mein lana ho toh prime karen. MMHG ko kaibaar prime aur un-prime karsakta hain, jisse MMHG ki reliability aur performance mein koi farak nahi padega.

(c) Priming aur un-priming keliye kisi special skill ki jarurat nahi hoti hain, ye hasani se andhere mein bhi karsaktahain.

3. MMHG ki chaal.

(a) Gren ko throw karne se pehle pull ring ki madad se split pin ko gren se nikal de.

(b) Gren ko throw karne se safety pin mein attached conical spring ki taqat se hand lever hawa mein aajad ho jata hai.

(c) Conical Spring ki taqat se safety pin bahar nikal ta hain sath hi clapper spring supreme Det No 48 par thokar marta hai aur ek dhamaka paida hota hai.

(d) Detonator ke dhamake se arming delay 4.0 sec+ 0.5 sec delay ke baad initiate hojata hain.

(e) Minimum 0.5- 1cm einarming delay ka barud pura jal jata hai aur plunger apni spring ke takat se upar ki taraf harkat karta hain.

(f) Plunger ke upar uthane se shutter ko harkat karneki jagah mil jati hai aur shutter apne spring ke takat se itna harkat karta hai ki shutter mein bana hole Det No 56 ki sidhai mein aajata hain.

(g) Pyrotechnic delay 4 sec +0.5 sec meinDet no 48 dawara paida hue dhamake ko shutter mech mein bane hole se hote hue Det No 56 ko dhamaka pradan karta hain.

(h) Is dhamake se main body mein lage hue booster pellet dhamake ko main charge ko pass karta hai jis se gren Stun Mode aur Framentation mode mein blast ho jata hai aur tgt ko neutralize karta hai.

MMHG KI CHAAL

LESSON -3

FIRING POSN AUR FIRE KARNE KA TARIKA

(Ref – User handbook / operator’s manual Multi Mode Hand Grenade MK-1)

1. Fire karne ka tariqa. Gren ko zarurat/aad ke anusar kisi bhi posn se throw kiya ja sakta hai.

(a) Standing posn.

(b) Kneeling posn.

2. MMHG ko hum 02 modes mein fire karsak te hain:-

(a) Stun Mode. Is mode mein gren ka istemaal tab kiya jata hai jab thrower dushman ko gren se barbaad karne ka irada rakhta ho. Iss mode mein firer ko gren throw karne ke baad cover/ aad lene ki jarurat padti hai. Iss mode mein fragmenting effect Point of Burst (POB) se 8 mtr radius mein killing area aur 20 mtr radius mein danger area banata hai.

(i) Fuze aur main body ko assemble karen, yakin kare inki fuze aur main body tight ho.

(ii) Hand Lever ko hatheli ke Madhya bhag se dabhate hue mazbooti se pakare.

(iii) Pull Ring ko Quarter Pin (Split Pin) se nikale.

(iv) Quarter Pin ko Pull Ring ki madad se nikalde.

(v) Gren ko tgt ki taraf throw karen aur aad/cover leyen.

(vi) Fragmenting sleeve phat jata hai aur tgt ko barbad karta hai.

(b) Frangmentation Mode. Iss mode ka istemal hum tab karte hai jab hume dushman ko stun effect se neutralise karna ho aur small arms ke fire se barbaad karna ho. Iss mode mein fragments nahi hote hain kyuki thrower fragmentation sleeve ko gren throw karne se pehle nikal deta hai. Iss mode mein gren 3 se 5 mtr lethal area mein stunning effect deta hai. Iss mode mein firer ko gren throw karne ke baad cover lene ki jarurat nahi hoti.

(i) Gren ko hath mein rakhen.

(ii) Fragmenting Sleeve ko Gren se alag karen.

(iii) Baaki karwai Stun Mode gren ki tarah hi karen.

(iv) Grenke blast hone se stun effect paida hota hain.

3. Maintenance.

(a) MMHG ek maint free hand gren hain.

(b) Samay samay par eski bahari body ko kisi kapde ya chindi ki madad se saaf karen.

(d) Fuze aur main body ke threads ko safai aur tightness ke lihaaj se dekha jaye.

(e) Blast cup par red mark live gren ko zahir karta hai. Iska dhyan purwak istemal kiya jaye.

4. Suraksha Sambhandit Batein.

(a) Ready posn mein lever ke upar pakar ko bana ye rakhen.

(b) Yadi gren ko throw nahi karna ho toh quarter pin ko dubara laga kar rakhen. Dhyan rahe ek baar lever dis engage ya alag hojane ke baad gren ko dubara store mein na rakha jaye.

(c) Gren ke safai/maint ke daruan gren ke fuse mein lage pull ring, quarter pin aur lever ke sath kisi bhi parkar ki chhed-chhad na karen.

(d) Gren throw karne se pehle field of fire ko check karein, grenade ki udaan mein koi badha nahi honi chahiye jaise ki Ped, Deewar, Pole etc.

5. Blind ko Destroy karne ka tariqa.

(a) Yadi gren blind ho jata hain toh 30 min tak intezaar karen.

(b) Kisi expert /authorised perske dwara pure suraksha ke sath gren ko destroy karein.

6. Sankshep. MMHG ko istemal karke hum Stun Mode aur fragmentation mode role mein tgt ko badi asani se neutralise karsakte hain. Yeh ek bahut hi achha hathiyar hai.

CHAPTER-1

INTRODUCTION : NEGEV LMG 7.62 X 51 MM

1. General Description.

(a) NEGEV LMG 7.62mm ek belt feed Light Machine Gun hai, isse automatic aur semi-automatic mode par fire kar sakte hai.

(b) Yeh Light Machine Gun gas operated hai aur isme gas regulator ki suvidha bhi hai joki jarurat ke anusar estimal mein laya ja sakta hai.

(c) Yeh Light Machine Gun open breech hathiyar hai; jis ke karan lambe samay tak bina cook-off ke bina, fire kar sakte hain.

(d) Is Light Machine Gun mein diye huyesafety mechanism ki wajah se haadsa ki sambhavna kam hoti hai.

(e) Iss Light Machine Gun ko maintenance ke liye asani se khola ja sakta hai.

(f) Isme Foldable bipod ki suvidha di gayi hai aur yeh machine rest se bhi attach ho sakta hai jo kisi AFV par mounted ho.

(g) NEGEV LMG 7.62mm mein detachable rear iron sight hai, Jis par 300-100m tak ki rg hasil kar sakte hai aur Front sight par zeroing ke liye correction dene ki suvidha di gayi hai.

(h) Raat ke samay ya kam light mein firing karne ke liye beta-lights ki suvidha bhi di gayi hai.

(j) Optical sights ko mount karne ke liye Mil Std 1913 Picatinny Rails uppar, dahine aur baiyen diya hai.

CHAPTER-2

TECH DATA AND FEEDING: NEGEV LMG 7.62 X 51 MM

1. Tech Data.

(a) Caliber - 7.62 x 51 mm

(b) Wazan

(i) LMG - 8.2 kg (Wpn Only)

(ii) Assault Drum - 473 Gm

(iii) Assault drum with 120 rds - 3.9 Kg

(i) Stock Open - 1100 mm.

(ii) Stock Close - 1030 mm.

(d) Barrel Length - 508 mm (20”).

(e) Muzzle Velocity - 850 m/s.

(f) Sight Radius - 440 mm.

(g) Rifling - 4 RH Grooves, 1:12” (305 mm).

(h) Sidhant - Open Breech, Gas oprated (Impact on piston Head) with Rotating Bolt Locking.

(j) Fg Mode - Safe, Semi-Automatic and Automatic.

(k) Feeding - Belt/ Aslt drum and Ammunition drum.

(l) Aslt drum Capacity - 120Rds.

(m) Rate of Fire - 600-800 Rds/ Min.

(n) Sights

(i) Rear Iron Sight - Aperture Type detachable & adjustable for ,

300-1000 mtr (100 mtr ke antaral mein).

(ii) Backup Rear Sight - Post Type (Built in Picatinny Rail-300mtr).

(iii) Beta Light - Kam roshni ya kharab mausam ke liye.

(iv) Front Iron Sight - Post Type (Upar, niche, dahine aur bayen

correction keliye).

(o) Eff Range - 800mtr.

(p) Bipod - Telescopic Bipod.

(i) Bipod ( Low posn) - 241 mm

(ii) Bipod ( High posn) - 297 mm

(q) Stock - Telescopic, 5 Step adjustable.

(r) Cheek Rest - 5 step adjustable.

(s) Amn - 7.62 x 51 mm M-80 Ball, 7.62 x 51 mm M-62 Tracer with disintegrating link M-13.

(t) Trigger pull - 4-6 Kg

(u) Barrel - Cold Hammered, Hard Chromium plated.

(v) Mech safety - Lock, Unlock, receiver cover aur ratchet mechanism.

(w) Chamber - Tapered

(x) Gas Regulator - Exhaust Type.

(y) Penetration - 3.5mm Mild Steel Plate at 800mtr.

(z) Wt spare brl - Only Brl -1.86 kg, Carrier - 249 gm (aa) Belt lifting capability - 85 rds.

(ab) Life

(i) Brl - 20000 Rds.

(ii) Extractor - 8000 Rds.

(iii) Firing Pin - 25000 Rds.

2. Feeding Types.

(a) Belt. Belt jis mein rds aur links (Disintegrating Link M-13)shamil hai. Links aapas mein jura huwa nahi hai, rds do links ke beech mein connector ka kaam karta hai.Chamber ka sidha wala rd jab chamber mein dakhil hota hai to corresponding link release hojata hai.

(b) Assault Drum. Yeh ek soft drum hai jis mein 120 round ka belt bhara jate hai. Yeh drum Negev LMG 7.62 ke sath connect hota hai.

NEGEV LMG 7.62 WITH A DRUM/ BELT

CHAPTER-3

WEAPON DESCRIPTION AND PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION : NEGEV LMG

7.62 X 51 MM

1. Weapon Description aur Principles of Operation.

Yeh machine gun gas impact on a piston head and rotating bolt locking ke sidhant par design kiya gaya hai. Firing ke dauran paida hue gas ko barrel mein bane ek aperture dwara piston ko milti hai, aur piston ko ek return spring ke khilaf pichhe dhakelta hai. Is NEGEV LMG 7.62 mein gas regulator ki 2 position hai.Yeh regulator tai arta hai ki kintni gas piston head tak pahuchani chahiye, jisse rate of fire control hota hai (Yani bolt carrier kitni gas absorb karta hai). Ek hydraulic buffer, hone ke wajah se is machine gun mein same rate of fire maintain hota hai gas regulator ki dono position mein.Aam taur par, regulator ki position "1" par hi fire karna chahiye. Position "2" ka estimal extreme environmental conditions mein hi karna chahiye, jab is light machine gun ko sahi function karne ke liye jayada takat ki jarurat ho.

Yeh light machine gun open breech hai, is liye jab firer trigger ko release karta hai to moving mechanism puri tarah pichhe rehta hai aur chamber khali hota hai. Is type ke operation wala hathyar kam samay mein jyada rds fire karne ke liye saksham hai, is se "cook-off" ki karwai nahi hoti hai.

Ek jawan dwara asani se barrel ko interchange kar sakta hai, jis se action ke dauran badal kar thanda kar sakta hai. Is se barrel ki life bani rehti hai (Garam barrel se fire karne se barrel jaldi ghisne ke chances hote hai).

Bolt ki rotation motion ke dauran barrel extension lock housing mein locked rehta hai, barrel ka ek hissa jo chambar ke peechhe sthit hota hai. Aisa banawat hone se barrel aur bolt ko inter-changeability ki suvidha deti hai. Yeh NEGEV LMG 7.62 ki bhibhin parts ko cover dwara dhul aur mitti se surakshit kiya gaya hai.

Yeh NEGEV LMG 7.62 se automatic aur semiautomatic mode mein fire kar sakte hai. Ek belt packed soft assault drum dwara feeding kiya gaya hai jo LMG ki underside mein attached kiya jata hai.

CHAPTER-4

ASSEMBLIES : NEGEV LMG 7.62 X 51 MM

1. Yeh Light Machine Gun seven (7) main assemblies ka bana hai.

(a) Barrel assembly.

(b) Receiver assembly

(d) Return spring assembly

(e) Trigger mechanism assembly

(f) Stock assembly

(g) Bipod Assembly

2. Barrel Assembly. Barrel assembly receiver ke sath ek quick connector se attached hai joki ek soldier action ke dauran turant nikalkar jodsakta hai. (Barrel ko nikalna aur jodne ke liye receiver ko kholna jaruri hai). Is barrel assembly mein dite gaye compenents shamil hai:-

(a) Flash Suppressor / Jump Compensator.

(b) Barrel - subassembly.

(d) Carrying handle.

(e) Gas cylinder block.

(f) Gas regulator.

(g) Lock housing (barrel extension) - barrel sub assembly ka ek hissa hai.

Barrel component niche diya gaya hai:-

(a) Flash Suppressor / Jump Compensator. Flash suppressor/ jump compensator barrel ki front end mein ek screw dwara threaded hai. Is device ke dwara light machine gun ki recoil aur jump ko kam kiya gaya hai. Users koflash suppressor / jump compensator ko kabhi nahi kholna chahiye.

(b) Barrel sub-assembly.Barrel receiver ke front end mein attached hai. Barrel ki rear end mein ek lock housing, locking lugs ke saath installed hai. Lock housing ke thik saamne chamber maujud hai. Chamber ready rd ko receive karta hai aur pressure build up ke dauran cartridge case ko support karta hai. Ek projection joki barrel ki rear top-side mein diya hai, yeh receiver ke sath barrel ko LMG se connect karta hai. Yeh projection receiver mein banne ek corresponding depression ke saath fit rehta hai aur barrel receiver catch dwara locked rehta hai. Carrying handle barrel mein ek connector dwara assembled hai, jis karan firing ke dauran barrel ke saath fold kar sakte hain. Handle mein plastic cover hai jisse barrel ki handling karne mein madad milti hai. Barrel pe ek gas cylinder block installed hai, do pin dwara press fit mechanism se assemblekiya gaya hai. Gas cylinder block ke teen functions hai:-

(i) Barrel se aye gas ko ek regulator dwara piston head par pass karta hai.

(ii) Front sight ka ek base banta hai.

(iii) Receiver par barrel ka front support banta hai.

Chamber aur bore ko ghisne se bachane ke liye hard chromium plateka bana huwa hai. 4 rifling dwara bullet ko suitable spin pradan karta hai, flight ke dauran stabilize ke liye. Kharab rifling weapon ki accuracy ko kam karta hai aur barrel ki service life ko kam karta hai; isliye, bore ko hamesha saaf suthra rakhna chahiye.

WARNING:-Barrel bore mein bane kisi bhi prakar kaobstruction barrel mein jyada pressure banne ki karan ban sakta hai, natija barrel explode hokar LMG ko nuksan pahuncha sakta hai. Isiliye, bore ko hamesha saaf suthra rakhna chahiye khaskar firing se pahle. Barrel mein bullet ki movement mein rukawat pani ki drop ya oil droplet se bhi hosakti hai, isiliye hamesha firing se pahle barrel ko saaf karna chahiye.

(c) Front sight assembly. Front sight assembly light machine gun se aim karne keliye estimal mein laya jata hai. Zeroing ke dauran is front sight se dahine bayen aur upar niche ki correction kar sakte hai. Front sight mein diye gaye components shamil hai:-

(i) Front sight base.

(ii) Front sight blade (incl night sight).

(iii) Plunger.

(iv) Windage screw.

Sight base front sight blade ko suraksha aur base dono pradan karta hai. Yeh sight base dahine bayen ki correction karne keliye hai. Front sight blade do parts se bane hai - top part ek beta light ke saath night firing ke liye, aur ek threaded bottom part. Yeh blade front sight blade par upar ki taraf se screw kiya hai. Upar niche ki correction dene ke liye plunger ko multi-purpose tool dwara pura dabane ki jarurat hai. Front side plunger pura push karne se bottom parts lock rehta hai, upar wala blade par maujud beta light ko zeroing ke baad firer ki aur karna jaruri hai.

(d) Carrying Handle. Carrying handle ek connector dwara barrel ke rear end par assembled kiya hai. Yeh handle barrel/ aur LMG ko carry karne mein, aur lagatar firing ke dauran garam barrel ko utarne mein bhi madad milta hai. Connecting pin dwara handle ko left side mein fold karke rakhta hai jisse firing ke dauran line of sight clear rehta hai.

(e) Gas cylinder block. Ek press fit mechanism hain aur do (2) pin dwara barrel mein installed hai.

(f) Gas regulator. Gas regulator piston ko barrel bore dwara kitna gas chahiye control karta hai.

3. Receiver Assembly. Ek box jaisa receiver assembly hain jo bent sheet metal aur welded steel parts se bana hai.

(a) Receiver ke sath niche diye gaye assemblies jora hua hai.

(i) Rear Sight Assembly.

(ii) Belt feeding system.

(iii) Trigger mechanism assembly.

(iv) Bipod Assembly.

(b) Yeh receiver char section se bane hue hai.

(i) Front Section. Receiver ke shuru se lekar jahan brl lock hota hai. Front block se brl ko support karta hai aur bipod ka base banta hai. Receiver front end mein ek hole hai joki LMG ko koi machine rest se attach kar sakta hai.

(ii) Central Block Section. Yeh milled steel central block receiver se weld kiya hua hai. Is mein brl fit hota hai aur brl catch ke jariye lock karta hai. Ek mechanism bana hai joki ek projection se kaam karta hai jisse receiver cover ke bina khole brl ko nahi nikal sakta hai, aur yeh left side par rehta hai. Yeh ek mechanical safety hai.

(iii) Rail Section. Rail section central block se receiver ke rear end tak extend hota hai. Ejection port ke niche cocking knob guide rail weld kiya huwa hai. LMG puri tarah cock nahi hone par rail mein bane ratchet (shaft) cocking knob ko moving mechanism ke saath ek sath aage jane se rokta hai isse unchahe firing ko rokta hai. Yeh bhi ek mechanical safety hai.

(iv) Rear Block Section. Rear block receiver ka rear end par attach kiya hua hai.

(c) Rear Sight Assembly. Ek sight base par rear sight mounted hai. Is sight mein niche diye gaye components hai. Sight ke sare components ko steel ka bana sight base carry karta hai. Elevation drum ko pura clockwise ghumane se sight se detach hojata hai. Isi condition mein sight ko 180° ghumane se ek night sight banjata hai, ismein ek ‘U’ notch dikhai deta hai jiske dono side par beta light sight laga hua hai.

(i) Rear Sight Assembly.

(ii) Elevation Drum.

(iii) Rear Sight Plunger

(d) Belt Feeding Mechanism. Teen assemblies ka bana hua hai.

(i) Belt Tray Assembly. Feeding mech ka ek hissa hai.

(ii) Receiver cover assembly. Central block ke rear end par joda gaya hai. Ismein kai sare parts joda huye hai.

(aa) Receiver cover assembly.

(ab) Retaining Pawls (front and rear). (ac) Positioning Pawls (Front and Rear). (ad) Feed and ejection opening covers. (ae) Receiver cover catch.

(iii) Feeding Lever Assembly. Yeh receiver ke left hand side par joda gaya hai. Ismein kai sare main parts hai. Yeh ek central pivot par mounted hai, jiske wajah se rocking motion pradan hota hai.

(aa) Feeding lever sub-assembly. (ab) Rear and front pawls.

(ac) Lever bearing.

4. Bolt Carrier Assembly. Is mechanism se feeding, loading, locking, firing, unlocking, extraction, ejection aur cocking ki karwai hota hai. Is mein nimn assemblies shamil hai:-

(a) Bolt Carrier. Bolt carrier sare chal wale purjon ko jagah deta hai. Front mein ek piston aur rear mein bolt installed hai. Bolt, bolt carrier mein locking ke daruan 35° mein ghumta hai.

(b) Bolt Assembly. Bolt chamber ke rear end mein firing ke daruan locked rehta hai. Bolt ready rd ko belt se chamber mein feed karta hai aur khali case ko extract karta hai. Bolt ke do hisse hota hai.

(i) Bolt. Firing ke daruan sare pressure ko jajab karta hai. Is ke front mein 4 locking lugs hai jiska brl extension ke corresponding lugs se locking ke dauran milap hote hai.

(ii) Extractor. Extractor bolt face mein maujud hai. Feeding ke dauran cartridge ke rim par sawar hojata hai aur pichhe ke harkat ke dauran chamber se fire case ko extract karta hai.

5. Return Spring Assembly.Return spring assembly bolt carrier ko aage aur pichhe ki harkat pradan karata hai. Ismein nimn shamil hai:-

(a) Return spring guides.

(b) Return springs.

6. Trigger Mechanism Assembly. Is mein mechanical housing shamil hai aur grip pradan karne ke sath parts bhi is mein install hai. Mechanism housing welded sheet metal parts ka bana hua hai. Ismein niche diye gaye parts shamil hai:-

(a) Trigger and trigger guard.

(b) Fire selector.

(d) Sear.

(e) Disconnector.

(f) Disconnector blockage/ catch (semi-automatic mode mein automatic firing karne se rokta hai).

Trigger guard sheet metal ka bana hai aur yeh grip aur receiver ke saath attached kiya hai. Trigger guard trigger ko bevajah dabane se rokta hai. Fire selector ke teen posn hai:- Safe, Semi-automatic aurautomatic. Fire selector knob mechanism housing ke left side mein maujud hai.

(a) Safe. Is posn mein trigger neutral rehta hai, sear aur bolt carrier interrupter dono niche nahi dabte aur weapon cock nahi hota.

Note:- Safe position mein yadi cock karne ki koshish karte hai, to bolt carrier interrupter bolt carrier ko rok deta hai kyuki ratchet cocking knob ko hold kardeta hai. Cocking knob ko release karne ke liye fire selector ko semi auto ya auto mein karna padega aur pura cock karna hoga.

(b) Semi-auto. Jab trigger ko pura dabaya jata hai to sear niche dab jata hai aur moving mechanism freely aage ki harkat karta hai. Bolt carrier ki isi aage ki harkat ke dauran disconnector operate hojata hai aur sear apni normal position mein aajata hai aur bolt carrier ko pichhe ki taraf rok deta hai. Trigger ko release karne par disconnector apna original position mein aajata hai aur sear ke saath dobara milap ho jata hai.

(c) Automatic. Jab trigger ko press karte hai, to sear apni lower position mein hi rehta hai, jisse disconnector operate nahi hota aur sear apni jagah par nahi aata, natija bolt carrier freely aage aur pichhe ki harkat karta hai. Trigger ko release karne par sear apni original position par aajata hai aur bolt carrier ko pichhe ki taraf rok deta hai.

SAFE SEMI-AUTO AUTO

7. Stock Assembly. Stock assembly ek integral unit hai joki ek operator level par nahi khola jata. Stock assembly mein nimn sub-assemblies hai:-

(a) Stock base assembly. Isme stock base, guide, hydraulic buffer aur stock base catch. Hydraulic buffer stock base aur guide ke beech screw threads ke dwara connector ki kaam karta hai.

(b) Stock body assembly. Do additional sub-assemblies hai:- Stock body sub-assembly aur Cheek rest assembly. Milakar in do sub-assemblies mein stock assemblies ke sare plastic parts hai.

Stock assembly stock base par receiver dwara fixed hai:- Stock base mein side rails bane hai jisse rear block ke corresponding grooves mein slide karke fit karte hai.Ek bar rakh diya toh stock base stock base catch dwara surakshit hai jorear block ke bottom edge par locked karta hai. Stock assembly ko LMG se alag karne ke liye, stock base catch ko push karke upar ki aur uthana hai, sath hi rear block se slide out karen. Stock ki lambai firer apni kad ki mutabik, firing positions aur postures ke hisab se set kar sakte hai.

Stock ko guide se alag karne ke liye. Position controller ko pull karen taki position locker ki posn pata chale (1). Dusre haath se, locker ko niche ki taraf khinche (2) aur stock body ko guide se slide karke nikal de (3).

Adjusting the cheek rest. Cheek rest ko ek hath se asani se upar aur niche kar sakte hai. Lower karne ke liye kalme wali ungli aur anguthe ki madad se dono controller ko barabar push karen (1) uske baad pull yaneeche push karen (2).

8. Bipod assembly. Bipod NEGEV LMG 7.62 ko prone positionmein support karta hai, aur sath hi stability aur accuracy bhi firing ke dauran pradan karta hai. Bipod receiver ke front block mein mounted hai. Bipod mein niche diye parts shamil hai:-

(a) Legs.

(b) Springs.

Bipod base se LMG ka receiver aur bipod assembly juda rahta hai. Base ek pin dwara receiver ke saath connectrd rahta hai, jis karan rotation ko simit kiya gaya hai. Bipod ke middle section mein folded posn mein behtar pakad ke liye plastic-coatingki gayi hai. Leg ke bottom mein pads aur spikes diye gaye hai jo ki behtar grips aur anchorage ke liye hai. NEGEV LMG 7.62 ko rest halat mein rakhna ho toh, bipod ko aage ki taraf fold karen. Bipod ki length ko knob ke dwara adjust kar sakte hai.

CHAPTER-5

FIRING CYCLE : NEGEV LMG 7.62 X 51 MM

1. Firing Cycle.

(a) Feeding.

(b) Loading.

(d) Firing.

(e) Unlocking.

(f) Extraction.

(g) Ejection.

(h) Cocking, bringing a round to feeding position (belt).

Niche diye gaye charts belt feed firing ka hai. Yeh is NEGEV LMG ka most common firing method hai, aur ismein weapon components aur mechanism ki action involved hai.Firing cycle light machine gun ki cocked aur safe par rakhne se shuru hota hai, aur belt tray ki position mein.

LMG : COCKED POSN LMG : FEED POSN

(a) Feeding. Firing selector ki posn semi-automatic aur automatic par rakhne se sear ko niche jane ki jagah milta hai. Trigger press karne se sear niche dab jata hai aur bolt carrier se alag ho jata hai.

LMG : FEEDING POSN

Bolt carrier sear se alag ho jata hai aur return spring ki taqat se aage harkat karta hai.Bolt carrier mein maujud bolt, bolt carrier ke sath ek sath aage ki harkat karta hai, raste mein chamber ke sidhai wala rd milta haiaur tray ramp ki aur push karta hai, rd ko chamber mein dakhil karta hai.

(b) Loading. Bolt rd ko chamber mein dakhil kar chuka hota hai. Extractor cartridge ki rim par mount ho jata hai, extractor spring ki taqat se. Bolt carrier ki aage ki harkat jari rehta hai, bolt ka lugs lock housing mein shama jata hai, aur sath hi feeding lever agla rd ke bayen move karata hai.

FEEDING LEVER LEFT POSN

(c) Locking. Bolt carrier ki aur aage ki harkat ke dauran bolt bayen se dahine ghumta hai aur bolt ka lug barrel locking lugs ka lock housing ke saath milap hojata hai.

(d) Firing.Bolt carrier ki akhri harkat ke dauran, locking ke baad, bolt carrier mein attached fixed firing pin apne bush hole se nikalkar chamber wale rd ki primer par chot marta hai.Receiver central block bolt ki harkat ko rokdeta hai. Primer activate ho jata hai, chingari paida ho jata hai, chingari cartridge case ki powder ko jala deta hai. Combustion gaschamber pressure ko badha deta hai sath hi bullet ko barrel bore dwara aage dhakel deta hai.

FIRING

Bullet barrel bore mein accelerate karta hai. Barrel mein bane rifling bullet ko rotate karata hai jisse bullet ko spin milta hai aur flight ke dauran stabilize hota hai. Bullet ki barrel bore mein harkat ke dauran jab bullet gas port se gujarta hai. Gas port se mila kuchh gas, gas regulator ki jariye gas cylinder ko milta hai.

(e) Unlocking. Gas regulator ki jariye gas cylinder ko mila gas, piston head par dabav dalta hai. Piston bolt carrier ke sath ek sath pichhe ki harkat karta hai.Kuchh nirdharit samay par jab barrel par safe pressure aajata hai, to bolt unlock ho jata hai. Bolt carrier aur attached bolt ab ek sath piche ki harkat karte hai.

UNLOCKING

(f) Extraction. Unlocking ke baad bolt carrier aur attached bolt ke ek sath piche ki harkat ke dauran extractor ne fire case ko pichhe lata hai.

(g) Ejection. Bolt carrier aur bolt ek saath pichhe ki harkat jari rakhte hai. Raste mein ejector fire case ki rim par dhakelta hai. Natija, fire case ejector port ki jariye eject hojata hai.

EJECTION

(h) Cocking, aur feeding position mein rd ko lana. Bolt carrier ki pichhe ki harkat, natija feeding lever dahine shift hojata hai.Is harkat se feeding lever ki pawls belt ko dahine shift kar deta hai, aur bolt aur chamber ke sath mein rd aajata hai, sath hi pehle wale link ko link port ki jariye bahar dhakel deta hai.

Jaise hi Bolt carrier ki pichhe ki harkat samapt hoti hai, aur return spring sikur jata hai. Yadi trigger par dabav aur Safety catch ki posn semi-auto par ho, toh sear apni normal posn mein aajata hai aur bolt carrier ko pichhe hi rok deta hai. Yadi trigger par dabav aur Safety catch ki posn auto par ho, toh sear apni jagah par daba rehta hai aur firing jari rahti hai, jab tak ki firer trigger ko release na kare.

(j) Aam Roken Lying posn, bhar, sight rg 300, ready, samne tgt single shot fire. Sune. Is prakar trigger ko press karne se LMG fire karte-karte ruk jaye to rok ko pehchane pehchanane ka tarika kalme wali ungli ko trigger se bahar nikale LMG ko cock kare, yadi rd eject ho to eject hue rd ko le aur rd ke primer ko check kare rd ke primer par thik chot miss fire rd, durust shist lete hue LMG ko fire mein shamil kare,

LMG thik fire karega. Sune, Is prakar trigger ko press karne se LMG fire karte-karte ruk jaye to rok ko pehchane pehchanane ka tarika kalme wali ungli ko trigger se bahar nikale LMG ko cock kare yadi cock karne se round eject na ho to Safety catch ko safe per kare butt kande ka milap tode. kande se niche layen, receiver catch ko dabate hue reciver ko kholen, nirikshan ki karwai Karen, iss prakar LMG ko cock kar, safety catch safe par, receiver cover ko kholkar aur nirikshan karne se teen prakar ki roke malum ki jati hai.

(i) Faulty Link

(ii) Defected Amn

(iii) Khali Assault Drum

(j) Anya Roken Lying posn, bhar, sight rg 300, ready, samne tgt single shot fire. Sune, Is prakar trigger ko press karne se LMG fire karte-karte ruk jaye to rok ko pehchane pehchanane ka tarika kalme wali ungli ko trigger se bahar nikale LMG ko cock kare, cock karne se LMG cock nahi to dahine hath ke aguthe ki support pistol grip per le, bolt carrier ko hold kare bult kande ka milap tode LMG ko niche laye receiver cover ko kholen, belt aur aslt drum ko LMG se alag Karen, LMG ko cock Karen , Safety catch safe par, Feed tray se link ko hateyen, Feed tray ko uthate huye body ko clear kare.(body clear) Chamber ka nirksan kare chamber mein kata hua case, Ruptured case extractor ka istemal karein. Ruptured case extractor ke teen bhag

(i) Base

(ii) sleeve,

(iii) Centre pin.

Centre pin ko sleeve mein dakhil Karen, Base aur Centre pin tight Karen, chamber me dakhil Karen, Safety catch semi auto trigger press LMG cock And safe. Yakin kare kata hua case ruptured case extractor ke sath bahar unscrew Karen bhara hua aslt drum ko lagaye belt ko lagayen durust sisht lete huye fire kare. LMG thik fire karega.

CHAPTER-6

FIRING KI TAYARI, FIRING AUR FIRING REGULATIONS : NEGEV LMG 7.62 X 51 MM

1. Firing ke liye tayari karna. Belt ki tayari. 120 round ki assault drum ko tayar karen.Ammunition box se belt ko bahar nikale, yakin karen belt aur amn saaf suthra ho aur achhi halat mein ho.

WARNING:- Ganda, corroded, deformed rounds ya loose bullets wale belt ko kabhi estimal na karen. Defective ammunition se LMG jam ho jati hai aur ish istiti mein firer ko nuksan pahuch sakta hai. Check kiye gaye belt ko assault drum mein is prakar dakhil karen ki feeding tray mein bharte samay rds ka khola huwa bhag niche ki taraf kiya ho. Yakin karen bullet ki nok assault drum mein kiye huyemark ki taraf ho.

(a) Light machine Gun ki tayari.

(i) Light machine gun ki safe position par, receiver cover ko kholde, aur yakin karen ki tray par koi link nahi hai.

(ii) Fire selector ko semi-auto position par karen.

(iii) Light machine gun ko cock karen aur cocking knob ko aage tab tak karen jab tak ki click ki awaj aayen.

(iv) Fire selector ko safe position par karen.

(v) Yakin karen gas regulator knob ki position "1" par ho.

(vi) Assault drum ko chadade, aur belt ko feeding tray par rakhen yakin karen pehla rd feeding slot par ho.

(vii) Receiver cover ko band karde.

INSERTING ASSAULT DRUM

INSERTING BELT

CLOSING RECEIVER COVER

(b) Firing.

(i) Fire selector ki posn ko semi-auto ya automatic position par karen, jarurat ke anusar.

(ii) Trigger ko pura press karen.

(iii) "Firing Regulation" mein diya huwa limitations ke anusar firing jari rakhe.

SAFETY CATCH TO FG POSN

(c) Firing Regulation. Belt se firing karne ke liye regulator ki position ko "1" par set karen. Extreme environmental conditions mein, rate of fire kam ho sakta hai, natija rok par sakta hai. Us waqt regulator ko position “2” par karen. Barrel ki life ko barkarar rakhne ke liye rate of fire ko 85 rounds/minutese jyada na karen. Yadi 2 assault drum (up to 240 rounds) maximum rate of fire mein lagatar firing kar raha hai, to barrel ko change karen aur hawa se thanda hone de jab tak ki touch karne layak na ho. Aam taur par, LMG ko 3-5 rds ki short burst fire karne ki recommended karta hai. Barrel ko turant thanda karne ke liye oil ya pani kabhi bhi na dale!

(d) Ammunition ko Unloading karna. Light machine gun ko safe position par set karen. Receiver cover ko kholde. Belt ko nikalde aur tray se link ko hatade.Yadi bolt carrier aage ho (sabhi amn fired kardiya hai), fire selector ko firing position par karen, cock karen aur light machine gun ko safe par karen. Tray ko uthaye aur yakin karen koi rds, fire case ya links light machine gun par na ho. Fire selector ko fire mode par karen, trigger ko press karen aur bolt carrier ko control karke aage jane de.LMG ko safe positionpar set karen.

CHAPTER-7

MAINTENANCE : NEGEV LMG 7.62 X 51 MM

Light Machine Gun Maintenance - User's Level

1. General. Is bhag mein ek NEGEV LMG 7.62 Light Machine Gun users ko kholne aur jodne ki bare mein bataya jayega. Yeh tariqa ek jawan ko operation aur maintenance ke dauran kaam aayega. Is ke alawa kholne ka kaam ek authorized armorer ko hi karna chahiyen. LMG ko kholne se pahle niche diye safety instrs ko follow karen:-

(a) Kisi bhi prakar ki koi live ammunition light machine gun ke aas pass na ho.

(b) Ammunition ko kabhi bhi tools ki tarah estimal na karen.

(d) Jodne ke liye kholne ki vipreet karwai karen, anyatha koi bataye.

2. Operator-Authorized Dismantling.Assemblies, jo ek operator ko kholne koauthorised hai:-

(a) Barrel.

(b) Stock.

(d) Bolt carrier.

(e) Trigger mechanism.

(f) Gas regulator.

(g) Assault Handle

(h) Detachable rear sight.

3. Barrel disassembly.

(a) Receiver cover catch ko dabaye (1) aur khol de (2).

(b) Dahine haath ki madad se carrying handle ko uthaye, barrel catch ko baye (1), barrel ko aage ki aur dhakel karalag karde (2).

4. Stock disassembly.

(a) Yakin karen LMG cock nahi aur bolt carrier aage hi ho.

(b) Stock base catch ki upar wale hisse par dabaye (stock ko upar ki taraf uthate huye alag karde).

5. Return spring disassembly.Stock ko alagkar lene ke baad, return spring base ko andar ki aur push karen, aur upar karen, anguthe se, return spring assembly ko release karde aur bahar nikal de.

6. Bolt carrier disassembly.

(a) Fire selector ko fire position par karen.

(b) Trigger par dabav rakhte huye, cocking handle ko jhatke se pichhe laye, aur bolt carrier ko alag karde.

7. Trigger mechanism disassembly. Extracting tool for mechanism housing connector ki madad se mechanism housing connector ko bahar nikalde. Mechanism housing ko niche ki aur rotate karte huye alag karde.

8. Gas regulator. Gas regulator knob ko kisi flat surface par barrel se parallel rakhe, multipurpose tool ka estimal karte hue gas regulator ko press karde,aur 90° rotate karde . Regulator knob, regulator aur spring ek sath alag karde.

Note:- Yadi LMG ko lagatar firing ke baad saaf na karen aur na hi oil lagayen to regulator par carbon jam jayega. Is karan regulator ko kholne mein dhikat asakta hai. Regulator wrench ki madad se, regulator ko kai bar ghumaye jisse jamma huwa carbon saaf hojayega.

9. Detachable rear sight. Detachable rear sightke base ko picatinny rail se detachable rear sight nuts se unscrewed aur clamp ko release karke alag kar sakte hai. Nut ko puri tarah unscrewed karne ki koshish na karen kyuki screw ki akhir sire par riveted kiya huwa hai.

10. Operator-Authorized Assembling.Jodne ke liye kholne ki vipareet karwai karen, jaise:-

(a) Detachable rear sight

(b) Gas regulator

(d) Bolt carrier

(e) Return spring

(f) Stock

(g) Barrel

Jodne ke baad, fire selector ki alag alag position par cock aur bolt carrier ko release karke check karen ki sahi joda hai.

11. Detachable rear sight.Detachable rear sight ko jodne ke liye kholne ki vipareet karwai karen.

12. Gas regulator.

(a) Gas regulator knob ko "1" par set karen (jissegas regulator knob aage face karen aur barrel bore line ki sidh par ho), regulator ko dakhil karen, spring ke saath-barrel ki right side mein, jise ki slot barrel bore ke parallel ho. Gas regulator knob ko securely pakade, gas regulator knob ko barrel ki sidh mein kisi flat surface par rakhe, multipurpose tool ka estimal karte huye gas regulator ko press karen, 90° aur 180° ghumayen.

(b) Jodne ke baad, yakin karen ki regulator ki lug regulator knob ki corresponding recess mein fit ho gaya hai. Yadi nahi, to 180° ghumaye jab tak engage na ho.

13. Trigger mechanism assembly.

(a) Mechanism housing ko install karen, aur mechanism housing connector ko apni bani hole mein dakhil karde.

14. Bolt carrier assembly.

(a) Yakin karen cocking knob ki position aage aur fire selector ki position fire mode par hai.

(b) Yakin karen bolt ki posn aage hai sath hi bolt carrier ko receiver mein bane guide se milate hue dakhil karde. Is samay trigger par dabav rehna chahiye taki bolt carrier ko sear na roke aur bolt carrier pura aage chale jaye.

15. Return spring assembly.

(a) Return spring ko dakhil karde taki bolt carrier ki side mein bane recess mein baith jaye.

(b) Return spring base ko push karde. Yakin karen ki return spring ki dono side ke pins apni apni slot par engage hogaye hai ,receiver walls pe.

(c) Spring ko lock karne ke liye pahle aage push karen aur baad mein niche dabaye taki return spring mein bane pins receiver ke corresponding recess mein engage hojaye.

16. Stock assembly.

(a) Stock ko rear block mein bane rail mein dakhil karde taraf niche ki aur push karen jab tak click na ho jaye.

(b) Stock ko upar ki aur uthaye aur yakin karen ki proper locking hogaya hai.

17. Barrel assembly.

(a) Carrying handle mein pakade, Receiver cover khula hona chahiye, barrel ko dakhil karde jab tak click na ho.

(b) Barrel lock hogaya hai yakin karne ke liye barrel ko bahar khinchkar dekhe.

CHAPTER-8

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE : NEGEV LMG 7.62 X 51 MM

Preventive Maintenance

1. General. LMG ke rakh rakhaav ka sabse imp stage maint hai, is prakaar, hathiyaar ke life ko lamba karne aur rokon se door rakhne ke lie aapko sabhee rakh rakhaav ke nirdeshon ka achhi tarah palan karna chahie.

Note:- Yadi daily safai karna mumkin na ho to niche diye parts ko saaf karke rakhe.Yeh niyamit taur par har 2000 rds fire karne ke baad niche diye parts ki safai ki jani chahiye:-

(a) Gas regulator and its housing.

(b) Piston and its housing.

2. Daily Maintenance. Daily maintenance routine ko savdhani se follow karen jab ki hathyar estimal bhi na kar raha hai.Daily maintenance is prakar se karen:-

(a) User level tak hi hathiyar ko khole.

(b) Sabhi moving parts ko anti rust oil bigha chindi se clean karen Mausam ke anusar.

(c) Oil laga chindi se barrel bore ko cleaning rod se lagaye. Yeh karwai jab tak karen tab tak chindi mein koi maila na aaye.

(d) Chindi ki madad se receiver ko saaf karde. Khas kar bolt carrier, bolt aur feeding system rails ko saaf karde.

(e) Baki bacha huwa light machine gun ke parts ko bhi achhi tarah se oil bigha huwa chindi se safai karen, jaise bipods, receiver cover, gas cylinder aur gas regulator.

(f) Agar jarurat ho to, multi-purpose tool ki madad se gas piston rings, gas cylinder aur gas regulator housing mein jama huwa gas ko bhi safai karen.

CLEANING THE LOCK HOUSING CLEANING GAS REGULATOR HOUSING

CLEANING THE GAS BLOCK CLEANING PISTON HEAD RECESS

CLEANING THE PISTON GROOVES CLEANING THE WIDE PISTON GROOVES

(g) Saaf sukha kapda ya chindi ki madad se sabhi oiled parts ko sukhade. Sabhi gande oil aur gas ko saaf karde, barrel bore ko bhi sukha saaf karen.

(h) Yeh karwai jab tak jari kare tab tak chindi mein koi mail na ho. Akhir mein LMG mein patla oiling karen, sivaye barrel bore ki, barrel bore hamesha sukha aur saaf rakhe.

Note: - Oil ki prakar aur kis tarah LMG ki body ko lagana hai yeh Mausam ki anusar hoga. Temperatures below -10°C ke liye special nonfreezing oil ka estimal kiya jaye.

(j) Akhiri mein LMG ki operation ko check karen (cock karke trigger press). Dhyan rahe barrel bore mein oil na lagaye. Isse hamesha sukha rehne de.

3. Routine Checks. Rojana ki rakh rakhav ki activities mein, hathiyar ki purjon mein nuks ko check karen, deformations, crushing, jung ke nishan, corrosion aurukhra huwa rang aur coating. Niche diya huwa jagah par khas dhyan de: -

(a) Barrel aur barrel bore (shamil lock housing).

(b) Gas regulator.

(d) Extractor.

(e) Firing pin tip.

(f) Bolt carrier - piston connection area.

(g) Return spring - integrity aur straightness ko check karen.

(h) Mechanism -housing mein integrity aur operability ko check karen.

(j) Receiver - welds aur rivets ki integrity ko check karen, rails ki straightness.

4. Pre-firing maintenance. Firing se pahle niche diye tayariyan karen: -

(a) Sikhi hui tariqa se hathiyar ko kholde.

(b) Rojana ki safai follow karen.

(d) Bolt carrier ke 8 jagah par ek ek drop oil lagade - Slide ke dono taraf 2/2 drops, 1 drop bolt guide pin helix mein aur bolt ke neck mein 1 drop aur upar wala slide kedono taraf 1/1 drop.

(e) Tray se oil ko saaf karen.

(f) Receiver rails ko oil lagayen.

(g) LMG ko jorde aur operation ko check karen (cock karke trigger press).

(h) Barrel bore ko hamesha sukha rehne de. Barrel se oil safai karna isliye jaruri hai ki oil ek sukhne wala chiz nahi hai. Oil wala barrel se firing karne par barrel ke ander ka rifling kharab hosakta hai, lambe samay ki fg ke daruan.

5. Post-firing maintenance. Firing ke dauran propellant jalne par gas LMG par jam jata hai. Jama hua gas par moisture pakarne se LMG par mechanical damage aur corrosion hota hai. Isi liye, firing ke turant baad hathiyar ko saaf kar lena chahiye. Yeh jama gas chemical aur mechanical tariqa se nikala ja sakta hai. Hathiyar ki post-firing maintenance isi parkar se karen:-

(a) Hathiyar ko kholde.

(b) Wpn ke sabhi parts ko anti rust oil laga chindi ke madad se safai karde.

(d) Brl bore ko oil laga chindi se safai karen.

(e) Sukha chindi ki madad se sabhi purje ko sukha de shamil brl bore.

(f) Aur yeh karwai jab tak karen tab tak chindi mein koi ganda na aaye.

(g) Achhi tarah safai hojane ke baad after firing insp karwaye.

(h) Moving mechanism rails ko oil lagade (bolt carrier aur bolt).

(j) Receiver rails ko bhi oil lagaye.

Maintenance in Adverse/Extreme Conditions

6. General. Extreme temperature/environment conditions area mein jaise sand, dust, rain, etc. mein LMG ko proper functioning karane ke liye special maintenance ki

jarurat parta hai. Us conditions mein, gas regulator ki position ko "2" par set karen. Yadi LMG estimal na kar raha ho to sabhi purjon ko cover karke rakhe.

7. Low temperature. Jab temp (-) 10° se drop hojaye to LMG ko sukha rakhe aur special anti-freezing oil se lubricate karen. Is temp mein freeze hone wala oil ki estimal se purjon ki harkat karne mein dikat hogi. Aur jab temperature bar jata hai, to LMG par condensation ke karan droplets (nami) ban jata hai. Us waqt LMG ko sukha karen aur halka oil lagade. Jitna ho sake ammunition ko hamesha sukha aur saaf rakhna chahiye.

8. Sand & dust conditions. Is conditions mein receiver ke jariye sand aur dust ander chale jata hai aur oil ke saath milkar “oily mud” bana deta hai joki LMG ki proper functioning mein badha dalta hai. Receiver ke inner aur sare assemblies ko sukha saaf karen. Sukhane ke baad bolt carrier rails aur bolt locking helical slot ko halka oiling karen. Ammunition har waqt cover karke rakha hona chahiye. Ammunition mein sand particles rehne se chambering aur locking ke dauran failure hosakta hai. Agar ho sake, to firing se pahle barrel ko utare aur sand ko hillakar ya blow kar ke urade.LMG ko hamesha close position mein (bolt carrier aage) rakhe.Yadi loaded LMG ke saath harkat karne ki jarurat ho to pehla rd feeding lever ki pawls mein fansa ho. Firing se pahle LMG ko cock karen.

9. Mud and wet conditions. Gila Mausam mein hathyar par laga tel saaf hojata hai aur natija friction jyada hosakta hai, isliye oil bhari matra mein lagadena chahiye, khaskar receiver ka aage wala hissa aur bolt surface aur receiver ka contact surface par.

10. Lubrication.

(a) 4° se above - Oil OX - 52.

(b) 4° se - 18° - Oil OX - 13.

(d) - 40° se - 50° - Oil OX - 13 + Superior Quality K/Oil 2:3.

11. Maintenance and Cleaning Kit.

CHAPTER-9

ZEROING : NEGEV LMG 7.62 X 51 MM

Zeroing

1. General. Zeroing ek karya hai jo ki bullet ko aiming point par hit karane ke liye angle of elevation pradan karna hai. Sabhi NEGEV LMG 7.62mm factory mein bante waqt sights adjustment kiya huwa hota hai (shamil spare barrel). Har barrel mein jis LMG ki hai uska numbering kiya huwa hai. NEGEV LMG 7.62mmki front sight structure blade ko zeroing ke dauran upar aur niche (elevation) multi-purpose tool dwara kar sakta hai. Front sight base se dahine aur bayen (windage) ki correction kar sakta hai.

2. Zeroing Check.

(a) Zeroing ki process shuru kare isse pahle, yakin karen ki barrel aur receiver par numbering kiya hai jo ek hi ho.

(b) Detachable rear sight achhi tarah fit ho aur sight ki pin sahi kaam kar raha hai.

(d) Zeroing range - 25 mtr.

(e) Fire selector ki position semi-auto par ho.

(f) Elevation drum "3" (300 m) par set kiya huwa ho.

Light machine gun ko zero tab mana jayega jab 300mtrki range par 5 goliyon ka gp ka size 5cm x 5cm square mein ho aur MPI 1.3 cm aiming point se upar ho.

Range (M) Vertex Ht

(cm) Range (M) Vertex Ht

(cm)

0 - 4.8 150 17.9

25 1.3 200 17

50 6.6 250 11.2

75 10.9 300 0

100 14.3

3. Front sight par zeroing karne ka tariqa galti ki taraf shift karna hai.‘UP’ ki taraf shift karne se MPI upar aur ‘UP” ki opposite karne se MPI niche shift hota hai. ‘R’ ki taraf shift karne se MPI dahine (right) aur ‘R” ki opposite karne se MPI bayen (left) shift hota hai.

WINDAGE ADJUSTMENT

Elevation aur windage knob par 2 click karne se 25 mtr ki range par MPI 1.5 cm ka farak dalta hai. Zeroing kar lene ke baad front sight blade ki beta lights ko firer ki taraf ghuma de.

NEGEV LMG ZEROING TARGET 25 MTR

14 C M

6. 3 CM

2. 8 CM

4.2 C M

- 26 x column

- 27 x rows

1 CLICK = 1 SQUARE (0.7 CM)

2 CLICK in elevation & windage = 1.5 cm

LESSON-1

.338 SAKO TRG 42

1. Shuru Shuru ka Kaam

(a) Class ki ginti groupon mein bant.

(b) Hathiyar aur saman ka nirikshan.

Dohrai

2. Pichle lesson se kiya jaye.

Pahunch

3. Bhartiya sena ko adhik majbut aur modern banane ke liye .338 SAKO TRG 42 sniper rif ko hamari sena mein samil kiya gaya hain. Naya hathiyar hone ke karan harek sniper ko is hathiyar ke bare mein jankari hona jaruri hain taki jarurat padne par is hathiyar ka accuracy aur long range ka faida utha sake yeh tabhi sambhav hai jab ek sniper ne sqd post par achhi sikhlai paya ho.

Uddesh

4. SAKO TRG 42 sniper rif se waqiyat aur scope se jankari dena hai.

Saman

5. Rif Sako, drill carts,tool cleaning kit,1’X1’ tgt, white board, long easel,rectical ptn model, ground sheet.

Bhagon Mein Bant

6. Yeh sabaq teen bhagon mein chalaya jayega:-

(a) Bhag -I SAKO TRG 42 ki visheshtayen aur tech data.

(b) Bhag -II SAKO TRG 42 ko kholna hisse purjon ke naam, kaam,safai aur jorne ka tarika.

(d) Bhag- l SAKO TRG 42 sniper rif ki vishestayen aur tech data.

Bhag l : SAKO TRG 42 sniper rif ki vishestayen aur tech data.

7. SAKO TRG 42 sniper rif bhartiya sena mein 2019 me SF mein samil kiya gaya tha . Nov 2021 me inf school mein iska pahala cadre chalaya gaya.

(f) SAKO sniper Rif Finland ka bana huya hathiyar hai.

(g) SAKO TRG 42 BDT (barreta devp tech) aur SAAMI (supporting arms and amn manufacture institute) ke antargat bana hai.

(h) Yeh bolt action wpn hai.

(i) Recoil aur Dhamaka ko kam karne ke liyen muzzle break diya gya hai.

(j) Stability ki liye bipod ki suvidha diya gaya hai.

(k) Free floated barrel.

(l) Air cooled wpn hai.

(m) Picatiny rail ki suvidha (MMRS,ITRS)

(n) Adjustable trigger pull ki suvidha.

(o) Ajustable cheeck pad, recoil pad aur monopad ki suvidha hai.

(p) Foldable butt aur extendable butt stock.

(q) High magnification scope ki suvidha.

7. Tech data

(a) Caliber - .338”(8.6X70mm)

(b) Weight

(i) Khali rif - 5.3 kg

(ii) Bhari rif - 6.726 kg

(iii) Scope - 1.024 kg

(iv) Khali mag - 187 gm

(v) Bhari mag - 402 gm

(i) Fully extended butt -1205 mm

(ii) Folded butt - 990 mm

8. Tool cleaning kit se jankari. SAKO TRG 42 ke sath rif ki safai ke liye ek cleaning kit diya gaya hai.ismein safai ka saman aur rif ko kholna aur jorne ke liye tool rakhe jate hai.iske under saman is prakar se hai.

(a) Pouch for cleaning kit – cleaning ka saman rakhane ke liye hai.

(b) Cleaning rod (six sec) - 6 sec mein hota hai aur ise jodkar barrel ki safai ki jati hai.

(d) Adopter for cleaning rod guide - chamber ko rod wear se bachane ke liye hai.

(e) Brush for chamber – chamber ki safai ke karne ke liye istemal hota hai.

(f) Brush for barrel – barrel ki safai karne ke liye istemal hota hai.

(g) Brush nylon lubrication - barrel mein oil lagane ke liye kaam mein aata hai.

(h) Brush for bore – Bore ki safai ke istemal hota hai.

(j) Jag ptch for cleaning rod – barrel safai

(k) Loop patch holder for cleaning rod – barel safai ke kaam aata hai.

(I) Brush bronze for receiver – receiver safai ke kaam mein aata hai.

(n) Oil bottle( CLP)- Sniper rif oil lagane ke kaam mein aata hai.

(o) Bottle grease – ismein grease hota hai.

(p) Patch - (40 piece)

9. Safai Jis parkar se anya hathiyaron ki alag-alag maukon par safai ki jati hai ussi parkar .338 SAKO TRG 42 ki safai bhi ki jati hai.

10. Lubrication :- Oil CLP (cleaning lubrication preservative) aur Greeze

Scope se jankari scope ka naam Steiner M5Xi 5-25X56mm

(i) Weight : 1.024 kg

(ii) Length : 422 mm.

(iii) Magnification : 5x-25x

(iv) Eye relief : 90 mm

(v) Field of view : 7.2-1.4 m@100

(vi) Bty : CR 2450 (3v lithium)

(vii) Dioptter Setting : + 2 to -3D

(viii) Gas filling : N2 (100% fog proof)

(ix) Opr temp : -250c to 630c

(x) Storage temp : -350c to 700c

(xi) Parallax(focus) : 50mtr to infinity

(xii) Shock pressure : 900gm

(xiii) 10mtrs water pressure : water proof

40MM MULTI SHOT GRENADE LAUNCHER MK-I

(UGRA)

LESSON-I

40MM MULTI SHOT GRENADE LAUNCHER MK-I (UGRA) SE AAM JANKARI

(Ref - Multi Shot Granade Launcher MGL-40)

1. 40mm Multi Shot Grenade Launcher Mk-I (UGRA) halke wajan, semi automatic aur kandhe se fire hone wala grenade launcher hai. Yeh hathiyar India ka bana hua hai. isi ,ain Red dot sight ka suvida diya hain.Yeh hathiyar revolver ke type ka hai, is hathiyar mein 6 grenade bharne ki kshamta hai.

Visheshtaen.

2. 40mm multi shot grenande launcher ki visheshtaen is prakar se hain:-

(a) Yeh hathiyar apne desh ka bana hua hai.(Ordnance Factory Trichirapalli Tamilnadu)

(b) Is mein ek sath 06 gren bhar sakte hain.

(d) Red dot ke brightness ko kam ya jyada kar sakte hain.

(e) Mil std 1913 piccatiny rail ki suvidha diya hua hai.

(f) Sighting sys ko dekhte hue butt ke shape mein antar hai.

3. Technical Data.

(a) Weight empty MGL - 5.8 kg

(b) loaded MGL ka wt - 6.7 kg

(d) length with folded butt - 566 mm

(e) Safety distance - 100 mtr (Trg)

- 30 mtr (Ops)

(f) Sight - Red dot sight

Note :- Baki tech data 40mm MGL (South Africa) ki tarah hi hai.

4. Boresighting

(a) Saman:- Bore sighting chart, short aiming rest, MGL, head space gauge, screw driver, firer.

(b) Boresighting karne ka Tarika:-

(i) Short aiming rest par laga MGL, dhyan rahe MGL Zamin ke hamwar ho.

(ii) Sight rg - 0 mtr

(iii) Lr ke Muzzle end se 10 mtr ki duri par boresighting chart ko lagayen, dhyan rahe lr aur boresighting cart ek hi unchain par lage ho.

(iv) Lr ko kholen aur wind karen. Brl ke sidh wale cylinder mein head space gauge ko lagayen.

(v) Cylinder se Head space gauge ke plus nishan ke centre ko bore sighting chart par bane niche wale plus (+) ke Nishan ke sath milayen.

(vi) Abhi lr ko bina hilaye red dot sight ko bore sighting chart par bane upar wale + ke Nishan par milayen.

(vii) Yadi red dot + ke Nishan par mil raha hai to lr ko durusht bore sight mana jata hai.

(viii) Yadi na milen to sight par elevation aur deflection screw ki madad se red dot ko jaruratsuda correction dekar + ke Nishan par milayen.

(xi) Dubara recheck karen.

यह ब्लॉग खोजें

White ganga, Defence gyan, military facts,army knowledge,infantry school mhow,JLA Bareilly, ncccadet

INDIAN ARMY WEAPON PRECI HAND BOOK PART 2 INFANTRY SCHOOL MHOW .

INDIAN ARMY WEAPON PRECI HAND BOOK PART 1 INFANTRY SCHOOL MHOW

टिप्पणियाँ

एक टिप्पणी भेजें

इस ब्लॉग से लोकप्रिय पोस्ट

5.56mm INSAS RIFLE IP FULL VIDEO #5.56mminsasrifle #ipvideo

51 mm mortar ip video full video

40mm MGL IP FULL VIDEO. #40mmmglip #youtube